7143 
Y45 To 











4 





GIFT OF 
Professor Whitten 






















































































Digitized by the Internet Archive — 
in 2007 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


' 
é 


https://archive.org/details/grammarofgreekla0Oyennrich 


‘% 








say vee 
for 
* 











ere 
ies 
a3 








A GRAMMAR 


OF THE 


GREEK LANGUAGE 


BY 


REV. D. YENNI, S.J. 


PROFESSOR OF GREEK AND LATIN IN SPRINGHILL COLLEGE 


NEW YORK 
D. & J. SADLIER & CO. 73 MURRAY STREE? 


MONTREAL 
1669 NOTRE-DAME STREET 


Copyrigut, 1873, 
By PD. YENNL 


Syn 
wake SScov SAU NAN ok 


¢ ‘ 
rc 6.4 Sr c te IT ep aes « 
c* P « C c Esty en ¢ e 
é CTE C Ke c ¢ € 
‘ ( « ¢ Cex Cc c¢ 
cae 
c ec ¢ F ¢ Cee CM ae c . & 
ce eG < ¢” 76 3 Fie c \ oP) € 
c bes .< 
TER ie t ‘ ae et c < 
Cee Exe et 41 CLE COROT S : 





TypoGRAPHy By J. S. Cusnine & Co., Norwoop, Mass. 


PREFACE. 


——oe——— 


THE object of the present Work is to simplify and facili- 
tate the study of Greek in the middle and higher classes 
of our colleges and academies. Its plan, which is sub- 
stantially the same as that of the author’s Latin Grammar, 
has been successfully tried for many years in the school- 
room. The leading modern treatises on Greek Grammar 
have been freely consulted, among others those of Butt- 
mann, Curtius, and especially the profound and accurate 
work of Kiihner. Their labors were submitted to a 
careful analysis, and everything that could prove of real 
use to the student, and which is practically attainable in 
an undergraduate course, has been selected and adapted 
to the simple and uniform method here pursued. The 
formation of the tenses, which usually proves a stumbling- 
block in the path of the learner, will be found treated in 
a simple and methodic manner, and based on a thorough 
study of the Greek Verb. Kiihner’s Syntax has chiefly 
been followed, but the arrangement of the Concords is 
that of the well-known Latin Grammar of Alvarez, ana 
will be found logical and easy in practice. The Greek 
Accents, the Dialects, and the Greek Prosody, have been 
treated of in the form of appendices at the end of the 


Grammar. A number of appropriate Exercises with a 


V4.4296 


iv PREFACE. 


Vocabulary have been added, which serve to test the 
accuracy of the pupil’s knowledge, and to facilitate his 
first labors. 


Finally, no pains have been spared to produce a 
systematic, and, for all practical purposes, a complete 
exposition of the Grammar of the Greek language. 


THE AUTHOR. 
SPRINGHILL COLLEGE, NEAR MosiE, ALA. 
August 15, 1877. 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. 





ELEMENTARY PART. 





CHAPTER I. 
The Greek Alphabet . : ; . : ; : : 
Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonants : ; 
Breathings, Accents . 
Euphonic changes. y ; ‘ : 
Crasis ‘ ‘ , ‘ ; 
The Article : : ‘ i _ 
The Declensions ‘ ; ; . 
First Deelension . F ‘ > 
Second Declension . F . ; ; : 
Third Declension : ; ‘ ‘ : ; . 
Exceptions in Declension . ; ‘ ‘ ‘ : : 
First Declension. : 
Second Declension . . é é é 
Third Declension ‘ ; ; : : ; 


CHAPTER II. 


Contracts and Irregular Nouns . ‘ ; , ; ° 
Contracts of the First Declension : ‘ ‘ . 
Contracts of the Second Declension . 

Contracts of the Third Declension . ; ; 

Irregular Nouns : ‘ ; ; ; : é . 


CHAPTER III. 


ADJECTIVES. 
Adjectives of Three Endings 
Adjectives of Two Endings ; 3 
Adjectives of One Ending ; : ’ ‘ 
Irregular Adjectives . : é ° ‘ 
Comparison of Adjectives . ; < ‘ . 
Irregular Comparison ir ene ‘ ° 


Numeral Adjectives . 


> 
CHNTOR ED NEE 


vl CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER IV. 


PRONOUNS. 

PAGE 
Personal Pronouns ; ; , - : ‘ ; . Nesey: Ys 
Reflexive Pronouns. j : ; ; ; : : ‘ at ae 
Reciprocal Pronouns . : , ‘ : ; ‘ ‘ ‘ -* 38 
Possessive Pronouns . : ; 8 ‘ ; ghrkives ; <= 38 
Demonstrative Pronouns . ; Np . : ; A ‘ oo 88 
The Relative Pronoun . j ; : ; ; ‘ ~ 40 
Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns - ‘ ; : : - 40 


Correlative Pronouns . ; 5 4 ; ‘ ; ; Sat | 


CHAPTER V. 


THE VERB. 
Division of Verbs ; : ; 4 ; ; . ; ‘ re ty 
Voices and Tenses ; ; ‘ 4 . yor eee . . . 44 
Augment : , ; : , : , . ° ‘ ‘ .  46- 
Reduplication : ‘ ; ‘ , 4 ; - ° ; . 45 
Attic Reduplication : ‘ : oe . 46 
Augment and Reduplication i in Composition : , ‘ ‘ eT 
The verb edut. ; é ; - ‘ ‘ ; ‘ sa dO 
Table of the Personal F Endings : ; ; : eae oe : “aoe || 
Conjugation of Regular Verbsinw . : : ; : A ,: 62 
Remarks on the three Voices : ; . 5 ‘ : : Pe 
Formation of the Tenses. : ; ; ; , : ; Pae is, 
Present and Imperfect . ; ‘ : , ; , ? Pegs i. 
Future and Aorist . : ‘ P : a ; ; : ere |) 
Attic Future . : ; ; : i << OD 
Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future-Perfect : é , ; aoe 
Notes on the formation of the Tenses . ; : ; : : py & I 
In Pure Verbs : ; : ; ; : 3 : ; BRL | 
In Mute Verbs : ; : ; ; ; ‘ ‘ ‘ <a 
In Liquid Verbs . ; Mar ” ; ‘ : : ae 
Formation of the Second Hignaee: 35 é ; : ‘ ‘ Pia 6 § 
Second Aorist act., mid., and pass. . ‘ ; ; ‘ eae: 
Second Future pass. . : A F ; : ; : owe 
Second Perfect act. : ; ; : ; ‘ ; : ei Te 
‘Contract Verbs. ; ; ; : § é . Je 
Paradigms of Contract Verbs ‘ F ; : : : ; ée%. 82 
Verbsinm . : , : ; : . 84 
Formation of the ‘Tonnes of verbs i in ma : gh iahs é j (40 BO 
Paradigms of verbs inm  . : ; ‘ ‘ ‘ ; ; . 86 


Remarks on the Paradigms . ; ‘ F : : egies Oe 


CUNTENTS. 


The verbal, (obey ie i 
The verb elu, to go ‘ : j ; : é 
The verb tui, to send . 

The verb oléa, to know. ; ; ; ; ‘ 
The verb éoixa, to seem. 

The verbs ketua, jaceo, aad % mat, "‘sedeo : 
The 2d Aorist of Batvw, o8evvumi, and yryvooKw , 
Deponent Verbs . ‘ 

Active Verbs with Middle Ratare 

Formation of Verbal Adjectives in -ros and -Té0s 
List of Irregular Verbs. 


CHAPTER VI. 








PARTICLES. 
Adverbs 
Comparison of ‘Adverbs 
List of Adverbs 
Prepositions . 
Conjunctions. 
SYNTAX. 
CHAPTER I. 


THE FOUR CONCORDS. 


Of the Finite Verb with its Nominative 

Of the Adjective with its Substantive . 

Of the Relative with its Antecedent 

Of a Substantive with another Substantive 


CHAPTER II. 


The Article . 
The Particles ox and ae 
The English Conjunction THat 
The Accusative with the Infinitive 
Questions and Answers 
Simple questions 
Double questions . 


110 
110 
111 
112 
113 


114 
115 
115 
116 


117 


. . 120 


121. 
124 
125 


. 126 
. 127 


vill CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER IIL 


SUBSTANTIVES. 
PAGE 
A Substantive answering to the question whose? ; j . 129 
A Substantive denoting price, material, cic. ; . : ; . 129 
A Substantive denoting cause, manner, instrument. ‘ : es 
A Substantive limiting the meaning of another Substantive — . . 180 
A Substintive denoting measure or space. ; ‘ ‘ t . 1350 
A Substantive denoting the time when, ete. : : : : . 150 
A Substantive denoting place. ‘ . ‘ ; . Ll 

CHAPTER IV. 

ADJECTIVES. 

Government of Adjectives. : : : ‘ : ; : . 182 
Use of the Comparative ‘ ; : ; . 3 . 138 
CHAPTER V. 

PRONOUNS. 
Personal Pronouns : : , : : : cakes . 185 
The Pronoun ards ; ‘ ; : : . ; é i 2 ae 
Relative Pronouns . ‘ ; : ; Ae ak et oy ; . 186 


CHAPTER VI. 


THE VERB. 


Government of Verbs . 
Verbs with two Noininatives ‘ ‘ s 
Verbs governing the Genitive ; ; : . : : ; 138 
Verbs governing the Dative . ; : ; . 140 


; ° ‘ ° . 188 


Verbs governing the Accusative .. : : 142 
Moods of Verbs ites Walaa ‘ 144 
Subjunctive and Optative . ; : ; ; ; . 144 

in independent propositions . : ; ‘ . ‘ i . 144 

in temporal clauses ; : ; : ; : : F . 146 

in relative clauses . ; : . ; : ; : : . 146 

in conditional clauses. , : : ; ; ; é BAe 3 J 


Infinitive without the Article ; . ; Z : : oo a 
Infinitive with the Article. ; A ; : : 4 ; . 160 
Conditioned Infinitive . ; ; : : ’ é 
Participles . : t ; ; ‘ - . - Mabe | 
Construction of Participles : ; ‘ Pil ; ei . 154 


CONTENTS. 


APPENDIX I. 
ACCENTS. 


Change of the Accent by Inflection. : : , ° 
Change of the Accent by Contraction . 3 A : 
Change of the Accent in Composition. .  . . 
Change of the Accent in Crasis, Elision . ; : 
Atonics and Enclitics ; ; ‘ 

Inclination of the Accent. . ‘ ° . 

Enclitics accented ‘ ; ; : ; ‘ 

Accent in the Declensions . 3 ; é , 

Accent in Verbs . ‘ ; : 


a, 
APPENDIX II. 

DIALECTS. 
The Digamma : ways Bee ; : . , 
The Aevolic Dialect ‘ é ; ; j ; : ‘ 
The Doric Dialect. 3 : 
The Lonice Dialect . ; : : ; js 3 ; ; 
The Attic Dialect . : ; : . ; ; : ‘ 


Tur Epic or HWomertc DIALECT. 
Change of Vowels 
Change of Consonants . 


Subsigtiven. co ie Se oe i ee, 
The suffix gi . ; ‘ ° . , ‘ : 
First Declension . ; : : . : ; 
Second Declension ; ; ‘ 
Third Declension . . F : . : ‘ 

Adjectives. : : ; é : : . : 
Comparison . P 2 ; ; ‘ . j ‘ 
Numerals a ; : ‘ ; ; 3 * 

Pronouns : ear ‘ : ° 


~ Personal Pronouns 

Possessive Pronouns 
Demonstrative and Rilabve Prundns: 
Interrogative and Indefinite Froomues:; 

The Verb. 
Augment and Reduplication . 
Personal endings 
Contract Verbs ‘ ‘ : 
Formation of the Tenses : < A é ‘ 


Verbs i in Ml ° . ‘ > e e e ° ~ 


The verb eiut, to be 4 3 . . ‘ 4 : 


The verb ciui, to go. ° . ° ° ° ° ° 


PAGE 


157 
158 
159 
159 
160 
160. 
161 

162 
165 


General Rules 
Final Syllables 
Tnerements 
Penults . 
Derivatives 


Seiitences 
Witticisms 
Fables 


Vos BUL PRY 


ge 


f 


J : 


, 


’  GONTENTS. 


APPENDIX. IT 


PROSODY. 


ait * 

> ne 

diag Ca 
sepia 


A. GRAMMAR,. 


32 eke 8 ey 


OF 


THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 








ELEMENTARY PART. 





“CHAPTER I. 


wet ay ye & 


Sn aniic roi 


4 1.—The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four 
intone. 


el 
oo 


Form Name. Sound. Form. Name. Sound. 
Aa Alpha . a Pe IN oD 

B 6 Béeta b BE & Xi- x 

ry Gamma g O o Omicron o (short) 
Ad Delta d fog Pi: p 

E « Epsilon e (short) P p Rho r 

Zo. “eta Z 2 os Sigma s8 

Hy» Eta e (long) 2 or! oan t 

@ @ Theta th T v_ Upsilon u 

I «  fota i ® gd Phi» ph 

K« Kappa  k By Chi ch 

A Xr Lambda 1 Vw Psi ps 

My Mu m Qo Oméga o (long) 








Nort 1.—T before y, x, é, x; has the sound of ng in angle; as, 
&iyyedos, pronounced ang-gelos ; ayxwv, pronounced ang-kon. 


Nore 2.— The form o stands at the beginning and in the middle, — the 
form s at the end of words and also at the end of the first part of com- 
pounds. Thus cewcpyds, rpospépw. 

B 1 


ace € besig ck GRAMMAR, 


DU 
e 
*» * 


e ©.@e € 
fe SAS c 
e 

e* e€ < e ee. c 


f 


e e ¢€ 
Pia! 6 ¢@ 
e.e e« e€ 

@.¢ 


VONELS; ‘Dirwioxes, CONSONANTS. 


€ 
© 


g 2. at are seven Vowels: ¢€ 0 shen 7 w (long); 
av (either short.or long). 


The Diphthongs are either proper, at, el, 01; av, ev, ov, — 
or improper, a, n, @, Which have the ¢ subscript. — The 
diphthongs vw, nv, wv, but rarely occur. — 


The Consonants are divided into mute, liquid, and double 
consonants. 


The mutes are nine in number. They are subdividec 
into three classes : 


























P-mutes. K-mutes. T-mutes. 
smooth 1 os T Ist class 
middle B ry ) 2d class 
aspirate ) x 0 3d class 











They are also divided into P-mutes (7 8 ¢), K-mutes 
(« y x), and T-mutes (7 6 @). 


Notre. — Every smooth has its own kindred middle and aspirate ; every 
middle, its own kindred aspirate and smooth ; and every aspirate, its own 
kindred smooth and middle. Thus 7 has 8 for its kindred middle ; and 
¢ for its kindred aspirate, and so on. 


The ltquids are four, \ wv p; the double consonants, 
three, p & ¢. 
ay stands for wo, Bo, deo, 
E 66 “oe At KO, YO, NC, 
“ od, as in "AOnvate. 


BREATHINGS, ACCENTS. 


§ 3.—1. There are two Breathings: the soft (’) and the 
aspirate (°). The latter is sounded like A, as in ¢ém7ros, 
pronounced hippos. — Any word beginning with a vowel or 


LETTERS — BREATHINGS. 3 


diphthong, takes either the one or the other. With diph- 
thongs, the mark is placed over the second vowel. Thes, 
AUTOS, OLVOS; OUTOS, OLOS. 


All words beginning with v or p, take the rough breath- 
ing, and when the p is doubled, the former takes the soft, 
the latter the rough; as, ddwp, pew, mroppo. 


2. There are three Accents: the acute (*), eireumflez ("), 
and the grave (*). 


The aeute may fall on any of the last three syllables of 
a word; as, TU, Adyos, moXELOS. 


The cireumflex stands upon the last or last but one; as, 
Karas, oixos. ‘he circumflex stands only over diphthongs 
and long vowels (7 @). 


The grave falls on the last syllable only. It denotes a 
softened acute in continued discourse ; 3 CQ. TLYN Ve TLMHY 
pépet. 

A word accented on the last syllable, is called Oxytone. 


A word not accented on the last syllable, is called 
Barytone. 


3. The Marks of reading are: the COMMA (,), the 
PERIOD (.), the COLON (-), and the note of INTERROGA- 
TION (; ). 


EUPHONIC CHANGES. 
§ 4.—1. A p-mute (7 8 $) with o is changed into w. 


A k-mute (« ¥ x) with o is changed into &. 
A t-mute (7 6 @) before o is dropped. 


2. Only mutes of the same class can stand together, that 
is, a smooth only can stand before a smooth, a middle before 
a middle, and an aspirate before an aspirate. Hence, 


Any p- or k-mute before @ must be changed into its own 
kindred aspirate; before 7, into its own kindred smooth ; 
B2 


4. GREEK GRAMMAR. 


and before 6, into its own kindred middle. But a t-mute 
before another t-mute is changed into c. Thus, 


AérAex-Tat for Ae&-Aey-Tat avuo-Oeis_ for avut-Gets 

/ 66 + ” 6é v 
yé-ypam-rat ** yé-ypad-tat | ewevo-Tat Epevd-Tat 
Siwy-Ocis * )— Stwx-Oek . ‘6 aré-trev 
woy-Oeis twk-Ceis mé-mela-Tat “* mé-mel0-Tax 


Nore 1. — The same aspirate is not doubled, but in place of the former, 
its own kindred smooth is used. ‘Thus, Baxxos, Zargw, instead of Bax xos, 


Lapow. 

Notr 2. — When a word ends in a smooth (7 « 7), and the word follow- 
ing begins with an aspirated vowel, the preceding final smooth is changed 
into its kindred aspirate ; e.g., ag’ ov for dm’ ov (and this for dd ov) ; 
av’ wv for avr’ wy (and this for dvrt wr). 


3. When of two successive syllables each begins with an 
aspirate, the former aspirate is changed into its own kin- 
dred smooth — in the following cases : 

(a) in the reduplication of verbs, and 

(b) in the first aorist and future passive of @vw and 
TLOn we. 


Thus, : 
hé-pixa (from dvw) becomes 7é-dvuxa, 
véeyiuKca ( “ vem) “«  Ké-yuUKA, 
Gé-Oixa ( * Ovw) “« ré-OuKa. 


éTvO nv, TUOncopar; éTeOnv, TeEAncopat, for EOvOn», EOOny, etc. 

Nore. — Oplé, hair, has voc. pig, dat. plur. Ope ; the rest being formed 
on the stem rprx-. 

CRASIS. 

§ 5.—CRASIS is the blending of the final and initial 
_ vowels of two successive words into one long syllable. It 
most frequently occurs with the article. Thesyllable formed 

by Crasis is marked by a sign (’), called Cordnis. ‘Thus, 


tavopos for Tov avdpds wyabé for & ayabé 
Tovvopa ‘ TO Gvoma Kakelvos * Kal €KELVvos 
Tarnbes “ To arnOes Oovdatos ‘+ Tov voaToS 


Nore. — The « is usually subscribed when it occurs in the second word. 
Thus éy& ofa becomes éy@éa, kal eira = Kxgra; but ai ahisnie tas ror ae 
kal €weita = kdrera, 


EUPHONIC CHANGES — CRASIS. 5 


The EUPHONIC v.— To avoid the concurrence of two 
vowels in two successive words, the euphonic v is often 
added to certain syllables, viz.: (1) to the dative plur. in 
at; (2) to the verb éori (est); (3) tw the 3d pers. sing. and 
plur. in ot; (4) to the 3d pers. mae. in e, and (5) to the 
numeral exoot (twenty ). 

Nore. — Ovrw, thus, and uéxpi, tilt, before a vowel, hecome ovrws and 


Hex pis. — Ov, not, stands before a consonant; ovx, before a vowel; and 
ovx, before an aspirated vowel. 














a? av ARTICLE. 
( 

Singwar. Dual. : Plaral, 
N. ie ro N. A. 06: an a 
G. °* Tov THS TOV | Tw (Ta) TH | TOY TOV TOV 
D. T TH TO G. D. Tois Tais Tois 
A. Tov Thy .TO | TOY TaLv Tow | TOUS Tas Ta 




















Norte. — Instead of the feminine dual form rd, the form ra is generally 
used ; as, Ta Téxva, TH Todee, instead of ra Téxva, etc. 


The Article has no vocative of its own: it is supplied in that case by 
the sign w. 


THE DECLENSIONS. 


§ 6.— The Greek has three numbers (the singular, plural, 
and dual), five eases (the Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
Accusative, and Vocative), and three declensions. 


The dual is used when two objects only are spoken of. 
Its use is limited chiefly to the Attic writers. The dual 
has only two case-forms, one for the nom., acc., and voc., 
the other for the gen. and dat. 


tz" In the following Paradigms, the upper line of the 
dual exhibits the forms of the nominative, accusative, 
and vocative ; the lower line, those of the genitive and 
dative. 


6 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


CASE-ENDINGS OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. 




















I II. Il 
S.N.| » a@ a@-| ns as|os ov|as ov|— — 
G.| ns as ns | ov ov | ov @ oS 
Deln @ni|n @/¢ @ t 
A.| nv av av |} nv av| ov ov| ov ovija — 
Vi] 9 @:> a | 9(a@).a | ¢ ov | as ov|— — 
ees IN al Ob a pe) ea ae 
G. QV ov ov wv 
D. als ous QS ou(v) 
A : as ous: A" | of -@ | ae oe 
5 al 00 ia |. Wo ee Oe 
Dual. a @ @ € 
aL ou @v owv 























Words of the first declension in pa and a pure (that is, 
a preceded by a vowel) retain a throughout: those in a 
impure (that is, a preceded by a consonant) retain @ in 
the accusative and vocative, but take 7 in the genitive 
vod dative. 


THE DECLENSIONS. 


First DECLENSION. 


§ 7.— Words of the first declension end in 7 and a 
(feminine); in ys and as (masculine). 




















PARADIGMS. 
Honor. Land. Fame. Collector. Treasurer. 
—@) (4) (a) (6) (6) 
S.N. | tep-7 \Op-a dd&-a TEAOV-NS Tapl-as 
G. | teu-Rs  yop-as dd&ns Ted@v-ov Tapi-ov 
a , i] , / 
D. TUT) Xop-4 Odf-9 TEA@D-Y Ta pig 
A. | ty-nv = =y@p-av = Sd E-av = TreA@-nv =— Tasi-av 
V.| Tep-n \@p-a d0&-a TEN@Y-N Tapi-a 
P.N. | tip-at = =ya@p-ar = bof-at ss TeA@y-at— Tapa 
G. | tiyw-@v = =yop-@v = B0E-GY ~— TEXWY-OV— Tat-@V 
D. | tip-ais yop-ais ddf-ais Ted@r-als = Ta-als 
A.| tiu-ds yop-as d0&das Teddv-as Tapi-as 
V.| typ-at = y@p-at = Od E-au ss TEA@V-aL = Tapii-at 
Dual. | tep-a yopa Od&a Tedov-a Tapi-a 
Tiu-aiv §=6yop-aw ddf-aw Tedov-alw = Tapi-aty 





dpery, virtue. 
dixn, right. 


noovn, pleasure. 


Kkeparyh, head. 
AUT, SOTTOW. 


rnyh, fountain. 


cednvn, MOON. 
ovyy, silence. 
Ttéxvn, art. 
yuxn, soul. 





Thus decline: 


&kavda, thorn. 
yAarra, tongue. 
Aéaiva, lioness. 
pépipva, trouble. 
tpamega, table. 
airla, cause. 
Bla, violence. 
Baclhed, queen. 
evo éBeva, piety. 
kapola, heart. 


olkla, house. 
copia, wisdom. 
védpupa, bridge. 
nuépa, day. 
waxatpa, sword. 
téppa, ashes. 
Kpirhs, judge. 
wadnrys, scholar. 
mwoNirns, citizen. 
veavias, a youth. 


Decline together: ‘H @dXarra Babcia (mare profundum). 
‘H pita mixpa (radix amara). ‘H pérawva yory (atra bilis ). 
‘H paxapia aderdyn (felix soror). 


jerrea). 


victoria), —and the like. 


‘H rvAn otdnpa ( porta 
‘H peyadn Kal Aaprpa vikn (magna et insignis 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


SECOND DECLENSION. 


§ 8.— Words of the second declension end in os (mostly 


masculine); and in ov (neuter). 























PARADIGMS. 
Word. Rose. Hare. Hall. 
(6) (76) (6) (76) 
(Common form.) (Attic form.) 

S.N. | Adory-os pod-ov Nay-ws AV@rye-@v 
G. | Ady-ov pdd-ov Nay-@ AVOYE-O 
D.| Ady-@ poo-@ Aay-@ aVvOrye-@ 
A. | Ady-ov pdod-ov Nay-ov AVOYE-OV 
V.|. Ady-e posd-oy ary-os aVvwye-OVv 

P.N.| Ady-or pod-a hay-@ aVvwye-O 
G. | Ady-wv pod-wv Nary-ov avo €-OVv 
D.| Ady-ous pdo-als ay-@s AVOYE-@S- 
A. | Adry-ous poo-a hay-ws AV@y €-@ 
V.|  Ady-oe poo-a Aay-o Vary E-o 

Dual.| Aey-w pdd-@ Aay-o aAVw@ye-@ 
Ady-oLv pd6-ouv Nary-@v avarye-o 








adedpbs, brother. 
dpros, bread. 

djpuos, people. 
dvddoKados, teacher. 
dotdos, slave. 

mrLos, SUN. 

Odvaros, death. 
imtos, horse. 

kéa pos, world. 
-lOos, stone. 


vouos, Law. 
oixos, house. 
bvos, ass. 
oivos, wine. 
mobdeuos, War. 
mwévos, labor. 


Thus decline : 


TmoTauds, river. 
oTparés, army. 


POdvos, envy. 
piros, friend. 


poBos, fear. 
xpdvos, time. 
dévdpor, tree. 
5Hpov, gift. 
(Gov, animal. 
iepdv, temple. 
Evdov, wood. 
Ordov, Weapon. 
wpoBarov, sheep. 
téxvov, child. 


Decline together: ‘O av@pwros Sdixa:os (homo justus). 
‘O orrovéaios veavias (diligens juvenis). 


avopetos (miles fortis). 


me. 
“ — and the like. 


‘H edpeta odes (lata wa). 
vioos ( pulchra insula). To yarerov épyov (difficile opus). 


‘O  otpatiarns 
‘H «ary 


THE DECLENSIONS. 


THIRD DECLENSION. ~ 


§ 9.— Words of the third declension end variously and 
generally increase in the genitive. 




















PARADIGMS. 
Wild beast. Giant. Lion. Body. 
(9) (6) (6) (76) 
S. N. | @np ylyas Aéov oOMa 
G. | Onp-ds ylyavt-os —- A€ovT-o¢ TWLAT-0S 
D. | Onp-é | yiyavr-t déovt-t TOMAT-L 
A. | O%p-a yiyavt-a éovt-a capa 
V.| Onp yiyav déov coma 
P.N. | @np-es yiyavt-es — A€ovT-Es TOMAT-a 
G. | @np-av ylyavtT-ov  ReEdvT-wV CWOMAT-OV 
D. | Onp-ci(v) —-ylya-ou(v) Ddov-ct(V) = o@pa-ou(v) 
A. | O%p-as ylyavt-as —- A€ovT-as TWOUAT-A | 
V. | Onp-es ylyavt-es  —— A€ov'T-es oMpmat-a 
Dual. | @Ap-e yiyavT-e AéovT-e CWOMLAT-€ 
| @np-otv ylyavt-olv = AeOV'T-OLV CWMAT-OLV 








aiwyv, -Ovos, 6, age. 
Hyeuwyv, -dvos, 6, leader. 
kAwy, -wvds, 6, branch. 
Kodak, -axos, 6, flatterer. 
kdpak, -axos, 6, raven. 
Kavu, -wiros, 6, gnat. 
Ayu, -evos, 6, harbor. 
udpuné, -nKos, 6, ant. 
6500s, -dvTos, 6, tooth. 
Twoywv, -wvos, 6, beard. 


Thus decline: 


Neluwy, -Bvos, 6, winter. 
até, alyés, 7, goat. 
AatrAay, -amros, 7, storm. 
Aapurrds, -ddo0s, 7, torch. 
uepls, -ldos, 7, share. 
veoTyS, -NTOS, ), youth. 
wwe, vuKTds, H, night. 
geXls, -ldos, 4, page. 
oTaywv, -dvos, 7, drop. 
Prdé, -yds, 7, flame. 


yada, -axros, 76, milk. 
yévu, -aros, 76, knee. 
nmap, -aTos, Td, liver. 
Oatua, -aros, TO, wonder, 
dvoua, -aTos, TO, Name. 
wpayua, -aros, TO, thing. 
oTOua, -aTos, TO, mouth. 
Tpatua, -aros, 76, wound. 
Vdwp, -aTos, TO, water. 
ppéap, -aTos, Td, a well. 


, eee 
Decline together: ‘O yépav evdatuov (fortunatus senex). 


‘O motos trouny ( fidus pastor). 
"H ada@mrn€ Sorepa (vulpes astuta). 
To ddpu GOavarndepov (hasta 


gallina). 


mwoinwa (pulchrum carmen). 
mortifera), — and the like. 


‘H wiwv dpus ( pinguis 


To KkaXov 


10 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


EXCEPTIONS IN DECLENSION. 
FIRST DECLENSION. 


§ 10.—1. The word adana, war-cry, and some prope! 
names, as "Avdpoudda, Anda, Pirounra, etc., though they 
have not a pure, retain the a throughout. 


2. Words in trys, national names in 7s, and compound 
of a noun and a verb, make the vocative in @; as mrpod7rns, 
voc. mpopnra !— Ilépons, a Persian, voc. Wépad ! — yewpe- 
TPNS, VOC. yewpmeTpa ! : 


3. The words rwatpandotas, patricide; untparotas, matri- 
cide; opu0o@npas, fowler—contracts in as, as Boppas (from 
Bopéas ), north wind, — and foreign proper names in as, e.¢., 
y / ’ ee ° . ~ 
AvviBas, Taéddaras, etc., make the genitive sing. ind. Gre- 

‘ciah proper names, as K pitias, KaAXias, etc., usually have ov. 


SECOND DECLENSION. 


§ 11.—1. The vocative of words in os generally ends in 
e, though sometimes in os. —@eds, God, always has @ @eos. 


2. Words in os of the second declension are mostly 
masculine, but some are feminine; as, 


) AUTEROS, Vine.  -§ ~rrapbévos, virgin. 
BiBxos, book. mrivbos, brick. 
SuddexTos, dialect. paBdos, staff. 
dudetpos, diameter. o7rodes, ashes. 
doxds, beam. tapos, ditch. 
dpdcos, dew. varos, glass. 
vioos, island. dnyos, oak. 
vooos, disease. rapupos, sand. 
000s, road. : aridos, pebble, etc., 


together with the names of countries, towns, and islands ; 
as 9 Aiyumros, *Htrecpos, — 1 Képiv8os, " Edeoos, — 4 Aros, 
‘Pddos. 


3. The Attie second declension differs from the common 
declension in making the vocative like the nominative, 


THE DECLENSIONS. 1i 


and in retaining the » throughout. Like Aayes> are 
declined : 


ews (0), people. Kaddws (7), cable. 
vews (0), temple. éws (7), dawn. 
Taw@s (0), peacock. adws (9), threshing-floor. 


Words in ws sometimes drop the final v in the accusa- 
tive sing.; as, Tov Aayov and Tov hayo. This is especially 
the case with the words éws (lon. nas, -dos ), arws, n Kéas, 
4 Téws, and 0” Adas. 


THIRD DECLENSION. 
Gender. 


§ 12.— MASCULINE: (1) All words in evs; (2) all those 
that make the genitive sing. in yros; and (3) words in yy 
and np. 

Exe.: 9 dpnv, mind; o, r: oe goose; » yaornp, belly; 
y «np, fate; and neuter contracts in np, as 7d xKfp, 
heart. 

FEMININE: (1) Words in @ and os (gen. -dos); (2) words 
in as, -ados, and (3) words in ss and abstracts in ns. 

Exe.: o éyis, viper; o ddis, serpent; o Kopi, bug; 
o dergis, dolphin; o,  dpus, bird; and 4, 6 réypus (gen. 
-cos and -tdos), tiger. : 

NEUTER: (1) Words in a, 4, v; (2) words in os, ap, wp; 
(3) contracts in np from -eap. 

Exe.: 0 wap, starling; o aywp, scurf; and o iyxap, 
lymph. 

| Accusative Singular. 

§ 13. — The accusative sing. of the third declension gen- 

erally ends in a; as, Bacvrevs, -éws, king, acc. Baoiréa. — But 


1. Words in ts, vs, aus, and ous, that have os pure in 
the genitive, change in the accusative the nual s of the 
nominative into V3 as, 


TOXLS, (x. mdXews, city, Ace. modu. 
Borpus, “© Borpvos, cluster, “© Borpuv. 
ypaus, *¢ ypaos, old woman, “ ypavv. 


12 GREEK GRAMMAR. 
§ 
2. Barytones in és and us, whose stems end in a t-mute 
(7 6 @), have in the accusative both v and a, —the former 
in prose, the latter in poetry. ‘hus, 


YAP, G. yapit-os, favo r, Ace. yapuv, 


Epls, “ 16-08, quarrel, “  épy, 
KOpUS, “© «dpv0-os, helmet, “¢  KOpUD, 


and (poet.) yapita, pda, xdpv0a.— But oxytones in & and 
us, and the word Xapis, when used as a mythological proper. 
name, make the accusative in a only; as, tayis, -idos, trap, 
acc. mayida; raps, -vdos, cloak, acc. yAapvda. 


Vocative Singular. 


ee 14. — The vocative sing. is generally like the nomi- 
native; as, éApuvs, -v8os, worm, voc. @ éApivs. — But 


1. Words in evs, and those in es and us that have os pure 
in the genitive, and also zrais, -d0s, child ; Bots, Bods, ox ; 
and pads, -ads, old woman, drop in the vocative the final 
s of the nominative; those in evs, moreover, take the cir- 
cumflex. Thus, 


TOANLS, G. 1déXeas, city, V. mon. 
Borpus, ‘© Borpvos, cluster, “6 Borpu. 
hovevs, “ govéws, murderer, ‘* ovev. 


2. Words in as and es that make the genitive in avos, 
avTos, or evTos, drop in the vocative the endings os and tos 
of the genitive; as, 


péXas, G. péXar-os, black, V. pérap. 
yiyas, % yiyav-Tos, giant, “  yiyav. 
vapies,  ‘ yapiev-ros, graceful, * ‘xyapiev. 

8. Words that have in the last syllable of the nominative 
a long vowel (7 w) and the corresponding short one (€ 0) 
in the genitive, take the short vowel also in the vocative; as, 

cagys, G. cadéos, clear, V. cadés. 
Salmon, “ Salpovos, divinity, ‘“ Satpov. 
pHTop, “propos, orator, “  pirop. 


EXCEPTIONS IN DECLENSIONS 13 
$- 
4. Words in @ and os (gen. -dos), make the vocative in 
Ot; as, 


NYO, G. 7X9085 echo, V. nxot. 
NOS, “© dos, | dawn, “6 ot. 
aldsas, “  aiddos, modesty, “©  atdot. 


5. “Avaé, -axtos, king, thas in the vocative & avaé (by 
crasis ovat); but in addressing a deity, @ dva or dva!— 
Turn, -atxos, woman, has ® yvvat. 

Morr 1.— Words in is, vs, and ovs, whose stems end in a t-mute (as: 
Spuis, kdpus, tovs, etc.), make the vocative like the nominative. ‘Those in 
is, -.vos SoMetimes make the vocative in v; as, deApls, -ivos, dolphin, voc. 
dedpiv and derdls. 

Barytoned proper names in us, -dos, as IIdpis, Adds, "Ipis, etc., in the 
Ionian dialect, make the genitive in vos (see mépris, § 20), and then have « 
in the vocative ; as, w IIdpi, etc. 

Nore 2.—Oxytoned substantives (not adjectives) that have a long 
vowel in the last syllable of the nominative, retain the long vowel in the 
vocative, though the genitive takes the short one; as, roiujy, -évos, shep- 
herd, voc. w ro.ujv. — But dvjp, man (vir) ; rarhp, father, and darp, -é90s, 
brother-in-law, have @ dvep, wdrep, daep. 

The words ’Aé\\wy (-wvos), Hocedaév (-Gvos), Neptune; and cwrhp 
(-fpos), savior, have in the vocative w “Amod)ov, Iécedov, c&rep. 

Dative Plural. 

§ 15.—The dative plural is formed from the dative 
singular by inserting o before +; as Onp, wild beast, dat. 
sing. Onpi, dat. plur. @npat. 

1. When the stem ends in a mute, the euphonic changes 
($ 4, 1) take place. Thus, 

prey, vein, Dat. s. dreBi, —-Dat. pl. Prewi. 
proé, flame, “  pdoyi, e ON0EL. 
vapis, favor, “- Maprte, af yaptiot. 

2. N before o is dropped, as pny (-ds), month, dat. pl. 
not for pnvol.— When vt or v@ go before o, both are 
dropped, but then the preceding short vowel is lengthened, 
e into e (in participles only), o into ov, and @ é v into 
tv. | ‘Thus, 

tureis, struck, Dat. s. rumrévrt, Dat. pl. tumetot. 
yéporv, old man, «  yépovTt, 6 yépovot. 
EApms, worm, “  EApvI1, “  éNpior. 


14 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


3. Words ending in s, with a diphthong before it, retain 
the diphthong in the dative plural; as, 


ypaus, vetula, Dat. s. ypai, Dat. pl. ypavor. 
Bods, 02, sc" Bot, “6 = Bova. 
govevs, murderer, ‘“ ove, “ hovedat. 


But «teis (xtevos), comb; ots (@Tds), ear; Trovs (7o0d0s), 
2. if ev Ae oe / cs 
foot ; and vievs (viéos), son, have xreci, @ai, Toct, viéot. 


4. The words rarnp, wntnp, Pvyarnp, avnp, yaoTnp, belly, 
and Anuntnp, Ceres, in prose, regularly drop ¢ in the geni- 
tive and dative singular and dative plural, and insert a 
in the dative plural before ov. — The word avnp drops e 
throughout, except in the vocative sing., but inserts 6 in 
its place. 














Father. Mother. Daughter. Man. 
(6) (4) A) (6) 
Sing. N.| warnp pnTnp Guyarnp avnp 
G.| ratp-0s pentp-0s Ouryatp-ds avop-0s 
D.| rarp-t pntp-t Ouyarp-t avop-t 
A.| ratép-a pntép-a Ouyatép-a avop-a 
- V.| watep PATEp Ovryatep avep 
Plur. N.| warép-es pntép-es  Ouyatép-es  avdp-es 
G.|matép-wv = untép-wv =: Ouryarép-wv = avdp-@v 
D.| watpa-ou(v) untpa-o1(v) Ovyatpa-ot(v) avdpa-ou(v) 
A.|matép-as = untép-as_ = Ovyarép-as_~—s avd p-as 
V.|matép-es pntép-es Ouyarép-es avdp-_s 
| Dual.| warép-e pntép-€ Ouyatép-e avop-€ 
matép-ow pntép-olw Ovyarép-o.v avdp-oiv 














Nore. —'‘O dornp (-épos), star, though not syncopated in the genitive 
and dative sing., has likewise dative plur. dsrpao..— Thus’APH’N (the nom. 
supplied by duvés), lamb, gen. dpvds, dat. dpvl, acc. dpva, etc., dat. pl. dprdar. 


CHAPTER II. 


CONTRACTS AND IRREGULAR NOUNS. 


CONTRACTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 


§ 16.—1. Final aa is contracted into a; as, A@nvaa, 
Minerva, contr. ’A@nva, -ds; the rest like yapa. 


2. Final ea and ey are contracted into 4; as, oveéa, fig- 
tree, contr. avn, -As; yéa, earth, contr. yA, yns; yaren, cat, 
contr. yah, -As; the rest like rep. 


8. Final eas and ens are contracted into fs; as, ‘Eppéas, 
Mercury, contr. ‘Epyhs, -od; ’AmedXéns, Apelles, contr. 
Arends, -ov; the rest like teX@vns. 


tr Contracts of the first declension are circumflexed 


through all the cases and numbers. 


CONTRACTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 


§ 17. — A few words in eos and oos of the second de- 
clension are contracted in the following manner. 


























Mind. Voyage. Bone. 
(6) (6) (76) 
contr. contr. contr. 
Sing. N. | vdos voos | mAdos amrovs | datéov oaTodV 
. G. | vdov vov |mAdov Aov | datéov oaToU 
D. | vd@ v@ |TAOM TAM | OaTéP GOTO 
A. | voov vouv | mAdov ° mAovY| ooTéov oaTOUY 
V.| voe vov | Ade TAO | OoTéOY OaTOUY 
Plur. N. | voot vot |mAdot Aol | doTéa ooTa 
G. | vowyv vov | mAd@v TA@vV | doTéwY OoTaV 
D. | voots vois | 4Adolts Adis | daTéols ooTOIS 
A. | vdous vous | 1?Adous mrovs | doTéa ooTa 
V.| voot vot |mAdot rot | dcTéa ooTa 
Dual. | vd vo |TwAdw TAW | dcTéw OOT@ 
vooLv voiy | wAocow mroiV | doTéoLv oaToLV 








16 


16 


Words in ns, os (gen. -eos) and @, ws (gen. -dos). 


GREEK GRAMMAK. 


CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


\ 


§ 18.— Words in ns and os (gen. -eos) are contracted in 
all the cases, except the nominative and vocative singular 
and the dative plural. 

Words in @ and @s (gen. -dos) suffer contraction in the 
genitive, dative, and accusative singular: in the plural 
and dual they follow the second declension. 











Evident. Kind. Echo. 
(6, 9) (70) (7) 
Sing.N.| cadns yevos HX® 
G.|(cad-dos) cad-ovs|(yév-eos) yév-ous|(ny-00s ) Hx-ovS 
D.|\(cag-éi) cad-et |(yév-et) yev-ee |\(nxX-0t = Hy-08 
A.|(cag-€a) cad-7 | yévos (nyx-0a) nY-@ 
V.| cadés yevos nxKot 
Plur.N.|(cad-ées) cad-eis |\(yév-ea) yev-n 
G.|(cag-éov) cad-av |(yev-Cwv) yev-@v 
D.| cadpéor(v) yéver(v) Like Adyou. | 
A.|\(cad-€as) cad-eis |(yév-ea) yev-n 
V.|\(cadg-ées) cad-eis |(yév-ea) yev-n 








(cadg-ée) cad-f 
(cad-ow) cad-oiv 








(yév-ee) yev-n 
(yev-€owv ) yev-otv 





Like Adyo. 





oom 





Thus decline: 


arnOns, true. 
dobevns, weak. 
dopadys, safe. 
evyevys, noble. 
dvOos, flower. 
dépos, summer. 


Elgmos, sword. 


bpos, mountain. 
aidws, modesty. 
hws, dawn. 
Abe, Dido. 
Anrw, Latona. 


CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 17 


Nore 1. — Words in ns and os yure usually contract ea into a; as, évders, 
needy, Tov and ra évdead ; byiHs, healthy, rov and ra bya (rarely byiH) ; Ta 
xpéos, debt, neut. pl. ra xpéa. Adjectives in -gujs have both 7 and 4, as 
apuys, dull, advy and agua. 

Nore 2,— Proper names in -yévys, -xpadrns, -c0évns, -pdvns, etc., have in 
the accusative sing. both 7» and yn» (7 after the third, yy after the first decl. ). 


In the plural, they generally follow the first declension ; as, of "Apusropdvat, 
Tats "Apirropdavaus. 


7 


Proper names in -«Aqs (contr. from -«Aéns) undergo a 
double contraction in the dative sing. 


N. Acoyévns CHpaxkréns)  ‘“Hpaxrr7js 
G. Atoyévous —  CHpakr&e0s) “Hpakré-ous 
D. Acoyéver CHpakré-<t) (Hpaxrée) “Hpakr<é 
A. Atoyévn and -nv CHpanréea) ‘Hpakré-a 
V. Acdyeves CHpakrecs) ‘Hpakres 
* 


Nore 3.— Neuters in os are often uncontracted in the genitive plur., as 
Tav dpéwv, avdéwr, ete. 


Polysyllables in ws (gen. -wos) are sometimes contracted in the accusa- 
tive both singular and plural; as 6 npws, hero, rdv npwa and Fpw, rods npwas 
and 7pws. 


2. 


Words in és and us (gen. ews) and in evs, ads, oils. 


§ 19. Words in és and vs (gen. ews) contract ef into et, 
ees and eas into es. ‘Those in evs undergo the same con- 
tractions. 


Words in -ats and -ods are contracted only in the accusa- 
tive plural, very rarely in the nominative plural. 
Cc 


18 GREEK GRAMMAR. 























aK, City. Cubit. King. Old woman. Ox, cow. 
(7) (6) (6) ee) 
SN. |oris =. 4rHys Baoirets  — ypas Boos 
G. |.tdr\ews =omynyews _ Bacirdéws ypacs Boos 
D. | ons amnye * Bacrrel ypat Bot 
A. | od Tiyyuv Bactrhéa ypavv Bodv 
V. | wone mhayv  .Baotred ‘ypab Bod 
P.N. | modes mHNElS ‘Bactrels ypaes Boes . 
G. | ToX\ewv* THyewv PBacidéov ypa@v Boav 
D. | wéreou(v) TIX Er ee”» Baotnrevot(v) ypavai(v) Bovai(v) 
A.|wores mhxels Baotnréas (-eis ) rypavs _ Bods 
V. | wodes mnxes  Bactreis ypaes Boes 
Dual. | 76X«€ TYEE Bactr€e ypae Boe 
ToN€ou _mnxeow  Bacd€ow —ypaoiv ~— Booiv 





Thus decline: 


BpaBevs, umpire. *povevs, murderer. klynots, motion. 
iepevs, priest. méNEKUS, -Ews, AXE. Kplows, decision. 
koupevs, barber. doxnots, exercise. mpaiis, action. 

vowels, Shepherd. éraviis, stable. ordo.s, sedition. 


Norte. — Substantives in evs, and those in cs and vs whose stem ends in e, 
take the Attic genitive -ews, instead of -eos. Those in evs sometimes con- 
tract -ées (in the nom. pl.) into #s instead of e7s. In the accusative plur. 
they have oftener -éas than -ezs ; but vies (the nom. sing. always supplied 
by vids), son, has regularly gen. viéos and accus. pl. vieis. 


Words in -evs pure, as xoevs, a liquid measure, contract -éws, -éwv, -éa, 
and éas, into -ds, -@v, -d, and ds, respectively ; but the uncontracted forms 
are found also. — The word adievs, a fisherman, is never contracted ; hence 
always.adiéws, adiéa, arcéas. 


3. 
Words in es (gen. -tos) and vs (gen. -vos), and 
Neuters in ¢ and v (gen. -eos). 


§ 20. — Words in -vs (gen. -vos) sometimes contract -vas 
into -vs. Monosyllables usually make the vocative like the 
nominative ; as, cvs, swine, gen. cvds, voc. ods. — The word 





CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 19 


éyxerus (-vos), eel, is in the singular declined like ¢y@us, 
the plural like ajyus. 


Neuters in ¢ and v contract ef into et, and ea into 7. 





Calf. : Sheep. Fish. -* _ Mustard. - City. ° 




















(6, 7) (6, 7) © , _ (74) (76) 
1S. N.|aépris ols ix dis . cwari dotv 
| / +7 >. Qe . / bd 
— G. | roprios — ods . tx Bbos TWATEOS  GOTEOS 
4 o 
WopT-tt pe ' | 
D. p q + ott ty olWWATEL aoTel 
and -t : 
A. |dptw ~— ow iy Obv oivart = dotv ee 
4 3 FL / 4 
V. | vropre ols iu ovat aoTu 
: TOPT-LES 
rN, p ee oles iy Oves owaTn aoTn 
and -is) . 
G. | moptiov olay by Ovov owaTréwv actéwy 
4 “eee: vo s ast 4 ” 
D. bo phd ey. oiai(v) txOvor(v) owaTrecv) actecu(V) 
qopt-tas) oias and 
A. alien ixObas, Att. -0S owaTn dom * 
and -is ols * 
TOpT-les |» Aico * P x 
: dis { ix ves owaTrn adorn 
and- ) 
7 
Dual. | méptie — ole iyO-ve (-0) owamTee  aoTEe 
Toptiow  otoiv ix Ovou owaTréov aoréowv 





Like ty Ous techno ¢ : 


Bérpus (0), anes : dpis (7), oak. 

pis (0), mouse. laxvs (7), strength. 

ordxus (0), ear of corn. mirus (7), pine. 

yévus (7), chin. xédus (4), tortoise. 
4, 


Neuters in as. 


§ 21.— The neuters yépas, reward of honor; yhpas, old 
age; and xpéas, flesh, drop 7 and then suffer contraction. 
To xépas, horn, has both the contract forms and those with 
t. To tépas, wonder, retains r in the singular and dual, 
but is usually contracted in the plural. 

c2 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 























S. N.| «péas, flesh. | képas, horn. Tépas, wonder. 
\ G.|(Kpéaos) xpéws | képatos and Képas | Tépatos 
gw « , / / / 
D. (peat) Kpeg | Képart and Képa Tepare 
A.| Kpéas Képas Tépas 
V.| «péas Képas TEpas 
s t- / fm / / 
t. N. (xpéaa) Kpen | Képara, and Képa |Tépata, usu. Tepa 
G.|(Kpedov) kpe@r| Kepar@v and KEepav | TEePAaT@Y, USU. TEPOV 
D.| xpéaci(v) Képac(V) Tépact(P) 
A.|(kpéaa) xpéa |xépara and Képa | tépata, usu. Tépa 
V.|(kpéaa) xpéa |xépata and xépa_ |tépara, usu. tépa 
Dual.|(xpéae) xpéa |xépareand xépa |répate © 
(pedo ) Kpe@y| KepaTowy and Kep@v | TepaTow 





sing. and then contract @a into o. 


IRREGULAR NOUNS. 


§ 22. —’Andov (7), nightingale gen. anddvos ‘(and 
anbdobvs, dat. andot, Sophocles). 
"AmodAov and Ilocedav, Neptune, drop v in the accus. 


tov Ilocebo. 
Tédos (0), laughter; acc. yéXora and yédor. 
Advipov (10), tree; dat. plur. both devdpois and d€évdpece. 


Ecc@v (7), tmage, has, besides its regular forms, 


Thus, rov ’AzoAXa, 


also 


gen. eixods, acc. sing. ecw, and acc. plur. esKous. 
Zeus, Jupiter, gen. Ards, dat. Avi, acc. Ala, voc. Zed. 


Kreis (4), keys ace. sing. «creida and xAeiv; nom. 


ace. pl. _Kheides, KXeELOas, and KreEis. 
K vor (0, 7), dog; gen. Kurds, etc., voc. Kvov; plur. Kvves, 
KUVOV, KUTV), etc. 
Avyvos, light; ciros, corn, and decpos, fetter, are in the 


plural generally neuter. 


otaOuot and ta otabua. 
Maprus (0), -upos, witness; dat. plur. wapriot(v). 

Mivas and aatpws (untpas), uncle by the father’s 
(mother’s) side, are of the third declension, but in the 


and 


Lrabuos, station, has both oz 





CONTRACTS. 21 


gen. and accus. sing. they have also the forms of the Attic 
second decl.; as, gen. 3atpewos and ratpo, acc. rdtpea and 
matpwv. — Mives has in the aec. Miva, Mivor, and Miva. 

Nais (7), ship, vews, vnt, vadv, no voc.; dual only veoiv ; 
plur. vijes, vewv, vavoi(v), vads. 

Oldimrous, -od0s ; acc. -od6a and -ouvv ; voc. ® Oidirov. 

"Opus (0, 7), -e8os, bird; nom. and ace. plur. dpves and 
dpvides, dpvidas ; gen. opvi0wv and dpvewv. 

IIoéa Bus (0), in the sense of old man, is supplied by 
6 mpeo Burns, -ov; in the sense of ambassador, it has the 
plural forms pécBes, rpéoRewv, rpéaBeor(v), but is sup- 
plied in the singular by wpeoBeuras, -ov. 

Xelp (7), hand; gen. and dat. dual yepotv; dat. plur. 
yepoi(v). 


22 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


CHAPTER III. 


ADJECTIVES. 


Adjectives are divided into three classes; namely (1) 
adjectives of three endings; (2) adjectives of two end- 
ings, and (3) adjectives of one ending. 

ADJECTIVES OF THREE ENDINGS. : 

§ 23. — Adjectives of three endings end chiefly in 


os n(a) ov 
els eooa ev 
US Ela v 


Adjectives in os pure and pos make the feminine in a. 
Those in oos, however, have 7, unless p precede; _ as, 
-6y600s, -dn, -oov, eight; but a@pdos, -da, -dov, crowded. 

Adjectives in vs make the genitive in -eos (not -ews). 
They contract ei into e, ees and eas into es; but ea of the 
ueuter plural generally remains uncontracted. 














PARADIGMS. 
(Beautiful.) 

S. N. KAX-0S. KaX-1 KAX-OV 
G. KaN-0U KaA-HS KaX-00 — 
Dd. KaA-@ Kar-n KaA-@ 
A. KaX-OV KaN-nV Kan-Ov 
V. KaN-€ Kan-n Kan-Ov 

PON; KAA-Ol KaA-ai KaA-a 
G. KAA-@V KAA-OV KAA-@V 
D. KaX-0lS KaA-als KaA-OlS 
A: KAX-OUS KQAA-aS KaA-a 
V. KQA-0b KaA-at KAaA-a 

x 
Dual. KAA-@ KaA-a KAA-® 
KAA-OUV KaA-atv KAA-OlV 














ADJECTIVES. 


PARADIGMS — continued. 


23 












































(Holy.) 

Son: ciryl-0S _ ayea aryl-ov, 
G. aryi-ov aryi-as aryi-ov 
D. ayi-@ ay i-a ayi-@ 
A. ciryl-ov ary i-av ayt-ov. 
V. aryl-€ aryi-a ayl-ov. 

Fe he ary l-Ol aryl-at aryl-a 
G. ay i-wv ary i-wv ary i-wv 
D. ary i-ols ary i-als aryi-o1s 
A. ayt-ous ayi-as ayl-a 
¥. aryt-o aryl-al aryl-a 

Dual: ary i-w aryi-a ary i-w 

ary i-oLv aryi-aww ary i-owv 
(Heavy.) 

ve ae, & Bap-vs Bap-eia Bap-v 

G. Bap-€os Bap-etas Bap-éos 
ye 3 Bap-et Bap-eta Bap-et 

A. Bap-vv Bap-eiav Bap-v 

V. Bap-v Bap-eta Bap-v 

Pew. Bap-eis Bap-eta Bap-éa 
G. Bap-éwv Bap-evav Bap-éwv 
D. Bap-éo1(v) Bap-etats Bap-€o1(v) 
A. Bap-ets Bap-elas Bap-éa ° 
V.. Bap-eis Bap-evae Bap-éa 

Dual Bap-ée Bap-eia Bap-ée 

Bap-éow ‘Bap-etavv Bap-€ow 








24 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


PARADIGMS — continued. 




















(Graceful.) 
S.N. Vaplels yvaplecoa vaptev 
G. VapleyTos Yaplecans yaplevTos 
D. NAplevTe — yvaplecon vapievre 
A. vaplevTa yapleroav yaplev 
hae vapiev _ yapiecoa yaplev 
ge. VAPleVvTES vapleroat yaplevTa — 
G. VaplevT@v yaplera @v VAaplevT@V 
D. vaplect(V) yvaplécoals yvapiect(V) 
A. YaplevTas yvapléoaas VvaplevTa 
V. VaplevTes yaplteroat vaplevTa 
Dual. vapleyTeE Yaptéroa va plevTeE 
Vapléevrow yapléccaly - = yaplévTow 





Thus decline: 





devos, dreadful. 
Kowvos, Common. 


Nemes, thin. 


mwiotds, faithful. 


déios, worthy. 
BéBaios, firm. 


dlxatos, just. 


Kkabapos, pure. 


Aaumpos, brilliant. 


mixpos, bitter. 
Baéus, deep. 

Bpadus, slow. 
Bpaxus, short. 
yAukus, sweet. 


dacus, dense. 
evpus, wide. 
6fus, sharp. 


_ waxus, thick, fat. 


mwdaTus, flat. - 
Tpaxus, rugged. 


Note 1.— Multiplicatives in 60s, as dmdbos, simple, and adjectives in 
eos, denoting the material, as xpvceos, golden, are contracted into -ois, 
-j, obv; but those in eos with e or p before .it, as épé-eos, woollen ; dpyvp-eos, 


of silver, are contracted into -ots, -4, -otv. 


S. N. 


FY 
RadPURZ<poo 


- 


X pus-o0s 
xX puc-ov 


“> Xpus-p 


xX pus-ovp 
xX pus-ous 
xX puc-ot 
xX puvc-@v 
Xpva-ois 
Xpua-ous 
Xpuo-ot 
xX pug-a 
Xpua-otv 


Xpur-h 
Xpus-fs 
xX pve~ 
Xpug-hy 
Xpue-H 
xX pvs-at 
xX pvo-@v 
xX pug-ats 
Xpuo-as 
Xpuc-at 
Xpva-a 
xX pug-atr 


Thus, 
Xpuc-o0v | dorvyuo-obs 
X pva-ov apyup-ov 
xX pvs-i doyup-@ 
Xpuvs-ovv | apyup-ovv 
Xpuc-ouv | apyup-ous 
Xpvo-a dpyup-ot 
Xpvo-@v | apyup-av 
xXpuvo-ots | dpyup-ots 
Xpuc-a dpyup-ous 
Xpvo-a dpyup-ot 
xX puvo-@ apyup-@ 
Xpuc-otvy | apyup-oiv 





dpyup-4 apyup-obr 
apyup-as apyup-o0 
apyup-¢ dpyup-@ 
apyup-av dpyup-our 
aoyup-a dpyup-obr 
dpyup-at apyup-a 
apyup-a@v dpyup-@v 
dpyup-ais dpyup-ots 
apyup-as apyup-a 
dpyup-at apyup-a 
dpyup-a apyup-@ 
dpyup-aty ‘dpyup-otr 


ADJECTIVES. 25 


Note 2.-— Adjectives in jes and des, as reujecs, 
honeyed, are sometimes contracted as follows: 


honored ; pedirbes, 


S. N. riu-ys -Rooa Rv peAtT-o0s -ovooa -ouv 
G. Tip-vros -7TONS HvTos | pmeXT-ovvTos -ovoons -oUvTOS 
D. rip-qvre -n007 vere peNtT-obvTe ~ovoo7 -oUvTL 
and so on. 


Note 3. — To the adjectives of three endings Sciong also mas, all, every, 
with its compounds ras and cvumas; éxdv, willing; dékwv (usu. &kwr), 
unwilling ; répnv, tender; wédas, black, and rddas, wretched. 

Ilas éxwv, and all participles of the 8d declension, make the vocative 
like the nominative. 

(Declension of rés and &xwy.) 








ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 


§ 24. — Adjectives of two endings end chiefly in 
(m. f.) 


os 
@S 


nS 
WV 


(n.) 


OV 


wv (Att.) 


€$ 
ov 


S. N. was Twao-a wav EKwY éxotoa éxépv 
_G. wavr-6s «wdo-ns avr-ds éxdvTos éxovons éxdvros 
lL. wavr-l wao-7 wavr-t éxdvTe éxovo7n éxdvTe 
A. wavt-a qwao-av map éxdvra éxovoay éxdp 
V. wis 1 G0 -0, wav EKWY éxovoa exp 
P. N. mdvr-es _ wao-ac = rdvr-a ExdvTes éxovoat éxdvTa. 
G. mdvt-wy wac-Gv mdvt-wv | éxdvTwv Exoug Ov ExdvT wy 
D. mwaou(v) mdo-as qwaor(v) | éxodor(r) éxotoats éxovor(v) 
A. wdvT-as mdo-as mdvtT-a éxdvrTas éxovoas éxdvTa 
V. wdavt-es = wao-at = wdvT-a EKOVTES Exovcat ExOvT a 
SD. N. wdvr-e Tao-a wavT-€ EKOVTE éxovoa EKOVTE 
G. wdvt-ov wdo-av mdvt-ow | éxdvTow éxovoaLy EKOVTOLY 
(Declension of répyv and pédas.) 
§. .N. répnv Tépewva  Tépev péXas pédarva pea 
“G. répevos Tepelyys Tépevos uédavos peXalyys péXavos 
D. répen Tepelvyn Tépeve pédave peraivy péAave 
A. répeva Tépe.vay Tépev pera péNaLvay pédav 
V. répev Tépe.va = TEpev péday péd\awa — pédav 
P. N. répeves répewar rTépeva béNaves pédatvat bedava, 
G. repévwy rTepevadv rtepévwv ped vwv pearva@v peNdvwy 
D. répecrt(v) repelvars répeoi(v) | pédacr(r) pedalvars pédace( vy 
A. tépevas Tepelvds Tépeva péXNavas pedalvas pédava 
V. répeves Tépervar TépEeva péNaves pérarvac pédava 
D. N. répeve Tepelva répeve péXave pedalva pédNave 
G. repévoww repelvary repévorv ped vor medalvarw  peddvorv 


26 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Adjectives in ns (gen. -eos) are contracted in all the 
cases in which two vowels meet (compare § 18, and NoTE 1 
of that same §). 












































PARADIGMS. 
(Unjust.) 

ye N. QOLKOS GOLKOS  adtKov 
Gof QOtKoU abdiKov @OtKOU 
D. abix@ adix@ adikw 
tS QOLKOV GOLKOD QOLKOV 
Vv: QOLKE QOLKE QOLKOV 

P.N. AOLKOL : AOLKOL AOlLKa 
G. adikwv abiewr adlkwv 
D. adtKols adixous adiKols 
A. adltkous abdikous aouKa 
V. AOLKOL QOLKOL aolKa 

D. N. adik@ adtkw adik@ 
G. adiKkow QOtKOLV adiKkouw 

( Propitious.) 

S. N. iX€-ws iX€-wS iX€-wV 
G. iAc-@ iX€-@ ir€-@ 
D. the-@ tre-@ ire-@ 
AS. iA€-@V iXe-wy tX€-wv 
V. tAXE-WS iX€-wS iAX€-wV 
N. the-@ tre-@ tre-a! 
G. iXe-@V ire-wD i X€-wv 
D. iXE-@s irE-@s trE-@s 
A tX€-WS ir€-ws — the-w 
x. the-w the-@ trAe-w 
N. irX€-@ iA€-@ iA€-@ 
G. ire-@v the-@v the-@v 








PARADIGMS — continued. 


ADJECTIVES. 


27 





( Evident.) 






































S. N. capns capns capes | 
r aah-ous oad-ovs cah-ous 

D. cad-et oad-€l cad-el 

A. cagp-7 oadh-i capes 

V capes capes cape 

P.N. | cad-eis cag-eis cab-h 
G. Tap-av cad-ov cap-ov 
D. sapéot(v) capéot(v) capéot(v) 
‘A. cad-eis oad-es cad-} 
¥; cap-els oad-eis cagp-h 

Dh. cagp-7 cad-h cad-7 
G. cad-owv oad-ov cad-owv 

(Prudent.) 

S. N. cwppov cMOppov oadpov 
G. aw@ppovos acwppovos acw@ppovos 
D. cwoppovt cw@ppovt owppovt 
Ae owppova awdppova oabpov 
V. oappov c@ppov o@ppov 

Fr. Be cmppoves ow@ppoves coppova 
G. owppovev cwppovev owppovev 
D. cwppoct(v) ca@ppoct(v) cwoppoot(v) 

<i cw@ppovas cwppovas owmppova 

tN cm@ppoves c@dppoves cwppova 

D.N. cwppove — s@dpove cw@ppove 
G. owdpovow owppovotv swppovow 











= 


28 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Thus decline: 


&dovos, trrational. edTux 7s, lucky. 
dvouos, lawless. — wiwenns, Fat. 
évdokos, famous. ; ovyyerns, kindred. 
novxos, silent. Pirtouddys, studious. 
Aadds, babbling. doxjuwy, deformed. 
ppbviuos, prudent. &ppwr, silly. 

aoeBHs, impious. evialuwv, fortunate. 
adruxhs, unhappy. evppwv, cheerful. 
éeripavys, famous. HeOhuwv, negligent. 
evoeBys, Pious. vrépppwv, haughty. 


§ 25.— To the adjectives of two endings belong also 
the words appny, -ev (gen. -evos), male ; idpus, -t (gen. -tos), 
skilful; and the compounds of vodts, wAovds, tatnp, unTnp, 
Tous, ooovs, éehiris, watpis, yapls, THyus, and Saxpu ; as, 

evvous, -ouv, kind (neut. pl. Ta edvoa, uncontr. ). 

evTAous, -ovr, sailing well (neut. pl. Ta evrdoa, uncontr.). 

aTratwp, -op (gen. -opos), fatherless; apntwp, motherless. 

TOAUVTOUS, -ovy (gen. -0d0s ), many-footed; acc. -oda and -ovr, 

povddous, -ov (gen. -ovTos), one-toothed. 

eveATris, -- (gen. -L60), hopeful ; acc. everrev. 

pirorraTpis, -t (gen. -Ld0s), patriotic; acc. diAdrarpu. 

— evyapls, -t (gen. -LTos), agreeable ; acc. evyapuy. 

_ Olarnxus, -v gen: -eos), two ells long; (n. pl. ta diarnyn, 

contr. ). 

_ Notre 1.— The compounds of ddxpv inflect only the accus. sing. accord- 
ing to the third declension ; as ddaxpus, -v, tearless ; acc. &daxpuy, -v. The 
other cases are supplied by dddxpuros, -ov, of the second declension. 

 TAéws, full, is thus declined: S. nom. rdéws, Aga, mréwy ; gen. rréw, 


mwhéas, wAéw, etc. P. nom. wréy, wréar, rréa, etc. —Its compounds are 
commonly of two endings only ; as, 6, 7 dvdm\ews, 7d dvdrdewy, filled up. 
NoTE 2. — 2@s (contr. from cdos), safe, occurs only in the nominative 
and accusative. 
Sing. nom. o@s (m. f.), cv (n.); acc. ov (for all genders). 
Plur. nom. ods (m. f.), o@a (n.); acc. os (m. f.), oa (n.). 
The forms réy oor, of cGo1, ai cSar, and Tov’s cdovs are found also. But 
o& (nom. fem. sing. and neut. pl.) very rarely occurs. 


ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. 


§ 26. — Adjectives of one ending end variously and are 
{or the most part of the third declension. They do not 


ADJECTIVES. 29 


occur in connection with neuter nouns, except sometimes 
in poetry in the genitive and dative, in which cases the 
neuter form is the same as that of the masculine and 
feminine. ‘The following belong to this class: 


01) ayVes, -@TOS, unknown. 0% waKap, -apos, happy. 

0 7 aiythup, -7ros, high. 0 TEVNS, -NTOS, Poor. 

on MME, -ixos, of the same 07% duyds, -ados, fugitive. 
age. 


yy 


07 apTra€, -dyos, rapacious. 6 7 xYeEpvns, -hTos, needy. 


'§ 27. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. X 




















eo (Much.) 
ou Des TOAUS TOAAN TOAU 
Gi; TON TONANS TONY 
D. TOAXW TONAH TOANW 
A. TONUY TOAAHV 1OAV 
V. TOU TOAANN TOAV 
P.N. woxrol rovral ‘groN Kee 
G. TOAN@V TOAA@V TONAQYV 
D. TOAXOILS TOANaIS TOAAXOLS 
A. TONXOUS ToAANas ToAAa 
Vv. ToAAol ToAAaL TOAAa 
Dual. ~ Tg not used. 
Rais 








30 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES — continued. 






































( Great.) 

S. N. péeyas peyary pérya 
G. peyarov peyarns peyanrou 
D. bEeyaro peyary peyar@ 
A. péyav peyarnv péya 
NG peya peyarn péya 

ee WN: peyaror peyarae peyara 
(3; pmeyardwv pbeyarov pbeyarov 
D. peyarots pbeyarals peyaros 
A. peyarous peyaras peyanra 
Wis peyarot peyarat peyara 

Dual pbeyaro peydha peyaro 

peyarow peyadrXawv peyarou 
( Gentle.) 

NS, T Paos T paca 1 paov 
G. 7 paov 7 paelas 1 paov 
B. T paw mT paeia pag 
A. ™ paov mpaeiav ™paov 
V3 mpaos (€) mpacta T™ paov 

PN. TpQol, -€tS Tpactat paca 
G. Tpac@v  Tpae@v Tpacwv 
D. Wpaos, -€ol § Mpaetas Tpaéot 
A. TPAOvs, -€vS Tpacias Tpaca 
NS Tpaol, -€tS Tpactat paca 

Dual T paw Tpacta T paw 

7 pao  Wpaeiaw Tpaow 














te The adjective mpdaos follows in several of its forms, and in the 
feminine throughout, those of the adjectives in -us, -era, -v. 


ADJECTIVES. 31 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 


§ 28. — Adjectives are usually compared, in Greek, by 
adding tepos and tatos to the PANG 5 as, udxap, happy, 
MAKAPTEPOS, MAKAPTATOS. 


1. Adjectives in os drops, and if the penult be short, 
change o into @; as, 


POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. _ SUPERLATIVE. 
xovdos, light, Koupo-TEpos, Koudd-TaTos, 
mixpos, bitter, TLKPO-TEPOS, TlKPO-TATOS, 
taxyupos, strong, LoYUpPO-TEPOS, LoYUPO-TATOS, 
a&ios, worthy, a&ie-TEpos, akiw-TaTos, 
copes, wise, cOpa-TEPOS, ocopd-Taros, 
éyupos, firm, EYUPW-TEPOS, EYUPW-TATOS, 


Nore 1.— Contracts in ods from dos, add repos and raros to that ending ; 
as, drdods (from amAédos), simple, amrdovc-repos, amrdovc-raros: but contracts 
in ovs from eos, change ous into -ewrepos, -ewraros (contr. -wrepos, -dTaros); 
as, toppupois (from moppupeos), purple, woppup-wrepos, woppup-wraros. 

Norr 2.— The adjectives evdis, calm ; novxos, still; tds, peculiar ; 
cos, equal; péoos, middle; 8p0p.0s, early; d.0s, late; mpwdios, early; yep- 
aids, old; mad-aids, ancient; mep-aios, across; and cxod-aios, at leisure, 
change the endings os and auos into alrepos, alraros; as, uéoos, weo-alrepos, 
pes-altratos ; —yep-ads, yep-alrepos, yep-alraros. — Iladaids and cxondatos 
have also the regular form. 


Norr 3. — The adjectives dxpdros, unmixed ; éppwuévos, strong; &pbovos, 
AMentiful, and srovéatos, earnest, change os into es ;— dddos, babbling ; 
mrwxés, poor; and éyoydyos, dainty, change os into ts. Thus, dxparos, 
dxpat-éo-repos, etc.; rrwxbs, rrwx-lo-Tepos, TTwxX-lo-Taros (and rrwxdraros). 


2. Adjectives in as, ns, and us, add me and taros to 
the neuter ; as, 


pséras, black, beAaV-TEpOS, HENAV-TATOS, 
cabys, clear, cap€éo-TEpos, cadhéo-TaTos, 
Bpaxvs, short, Bpaxv-tepos, Spaxv-raros. 


Nortr. — Adjectives in ys (gen. -ov) and wevdys (-éos), lying, change 7s 
iut0 we; as, KAéwrys (gen. -ov), thievish, krerrlo-repos, kAerrlo-raros. — But 
— OBpcrrh- 1-00), insolent, and mrévys (-nTos), poor, have bBpiorbrepos, wevéa repos, 
i ete. 


82 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


3.. Adjectives in es drop 4, and those in wy (-ovos{ add 
Tepos and tatos to the nominative plural; as, 


vapies, graceful, Yapléo-TEpos, Vapléo-TATOS, 
codpov, prudent, oawdpovés-repos, ocwdpovéo-tatos. 


4. Adjectives in € sometimes add eo, sometimes to, to 
the stem; as, 


apnré, elderly, apnK-€o-Tepos, adnArlK-€o-TaTOS, 
apraé, rapacious, aprray-io-Tepos, aptray-lo-TaTos. 


§ 29. A less common form of comparison is that in 
iwy, cotos. It includes especially the words dvs, rays, 
atoypds, €yOpds, and xudpds (poet.). These adjectives, 
instead of being compared by tepos and raros, change the 
final syllables vs and pos into twy (neut. tov), gen. -iovos, 
for the comparative, and toros, n, ov, for the superlative. 


Hous, sweet, Holov, NOLO TOS, 

Taxus, swift, Oarrwv, TAXLOTOS, 
atoxpos, base, aloy lov, alayloTos, 
éyOpos, hostile, ey Oiwr, éyO.oros. 


Nore 1.— The form in repos and raros but rarely occurs in these adjec- 
tives. —Odrrwy (Att. for Odcowv) is generally used in place of raxlwv. — 
Oixrpds, wretched, has -drepos, -draros (and ofkrioros in poetry ).— The rest 
of the adjectives in us are, in prose, generally compared by repos and raros. 


Nore 2.—Comparatives in (wy and wros frequently drop v in the end- 
ings ova, oves, and ovas, and then contract oa into w, oes and oas into ous. 
But the uncontracted forms also occur. 























N. éx Oiwy éx Fiwy €x Oiov 1 elwy 1 \elwy am \etov 

G. €xPiovos éxOloves éxOlovos | mdelovos mrelovos melovos 
D. ex Blou ex Blom éx Jlov m elov melove m elove 

A. ex Olw Ex Ol w éx O.ov wrelw  mwrelw — mdeiov 

V. | &xOcov éx O.ov éx Oiov wretov mwretov  metov 

N, €xdlous €xOlovs éxOlw mrelous mrelovs mrelw 

G. Ex Oidvav éxOidvwy ex Oidvwy | mreWdvwy mreiovwy TEWvwr 
D. éxOloai(v) éxOloci(v) éxOloo.(v)| wreloor(v) mreloor(v) mwreloor(v) 
A, €xOlovs éxOlovs éxOlw mrelovus mrAelovs mwrelw 
Vv. €xOlovs éxOlovs éxAlw mrelovs mrelovs mrelw 


ADJECTIVES. 33 


§ 30.— IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 


ayabos, good, apelvov (N.-ov) aplaTos 
Bertiov Bértic Tos 
Kpetoowv (Att. TT) KpaTlaTos 
AWwV A@oTOS 
dhéptepos (poet.)  héptatos, dépiotos, 
anyeves, painful, andyevvorepos anyewotatos [(poet.) 
anyiov aNylaTos 
Kkakos, bad, KAKLOV KAKLOTOS 
velpov VELPLTTOS 
nocwy (Att. TT) Kirra, adv. minime 
Kkanros, beautiful, Karriov KANO TOS 
paxpos, long, [ak pOTEpos aKkpoTaTos 
paocowy (poet.) pnKioTos 
péyas, great,  —  peiSwv péyioros 
puxpos, small, [ub pOTEPOS PLKpOTATOS 
éeXdoowv (Att. TT) éXaYLOTOS 
orLyos, few, pelov OAlyLaTOS 
TET OV, Tipe, TET AITEPOS TET ALTATOS 
tlwv, fat, TLOTEPOS TLOTATOS 
monrus, much, TrEelwv OF TAEMVY TAELTTOS 
pac.os, easy, pawv paorTos 


Note 1.— los, beloved, has gidwrepos, pikbraros, — la ices gpiral- 
raros, and dldXrepos (poet. ), plAraros. 


Nore 2.— Comparatives and superlatives are sometimes formed on 
adverbs and prepositions ; as, 


dvw, above, a&vwrepos avararos 
mpbow, far, T poo WTEPOS T poo WTATOS 
brép, above, vm éprepos bmrépTaros 
vrd, under, VoT Epos voraros 


Bd 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 


§ 31. —- DECLENSION OF THE FIRST FOUR CARDINAL 


POR w 


a a ee 
mwWNDreF CoO OND NR OOD = 


15 
16 


pk ie 
0 Oa 





NUMBERS. 
els pla év dvo and dt 
évos las. ——s« OS dvoiv 
eee 2 a ety a : , 
evi pa evi dvoiv, rarely duci(v) 
v4 / va , 
éva pilav &p dv0 : 
T Pets T PELs Tpla 
Tpi@y TPLov TPLOV 
Tpiai(V) Tptai(v) Tpioi(V) 
TpEls TpEls Tpla 
TETTAPES TETTAPES TETTApa 
TETTAPWV TETTA POD TETTAPOV 
TéeTTApol(V) TEeTTApOL(V) TETTApOL(V) 
TeTTApAS TEeTTAPAS TéTTApa 
CARDINALS. ORDINALS. 
a’ eis, one TpOTOS, first 
B' &vo SeVTEPOS, a, OV 
y’ -Tpets TpLTOS, n, OV 
6' téooapes (Att. TT) TETAPTOS, N, OV 
' qwévte MELT TOS 
/ v4 v4 
sg ee EXTOS 
C’ énta EBOopmos 
/ > e ” 5 
n' oOKT®@ 600s 
0’ évvéa ; EVATOS 
ub béka d€KATOS 
f ¢/ ra , 
ta’ = vdeka €VOEKATOS 
lB" dswdexa d@d€KATOS 


uy’ Tpeis(tpia) Kai déxa 
t / \ os 

6' téacapes(a) Kai déka 

uel = TevTexaideka 

is’ = Exxaldeka 

uC’ = émrraKxaiveca 

in’ oKxTwKaidexa 


/ \ , 
Tpitos Kal dékaTos 
TéTapTos Kal déKaTos 
méumtrTos Kal O€KaTos 
EXTOS KAL O€EKATOS 
EBdopmo0s Kal dékatos 
wv \ / 
dydoo0s Kal dékaTos 


90 
100 
200 
300 
400 
000 
600 
700 
800 


900. 


1,000 
2,000 
3,000 
4,000 


5,000 - 


6,000 
7,006 
8,000 
9,000 
10,000 
20,000 
100,000 
200,000 
1,000,000 


ADJECTIVES. 
CARDINALS. 

iO’ évveaxaideka 

K’  €iKool(V) 
xa’ elKxoowy eis, pla, év 
KB’ elxoat dvo 
xy €€xoat Tpels (Tpla) 
X= - TpLaKovTA 

wu! = TeTTApaKovTa 

yo srevTnKOVTA 

E'  eEnxovta 

of é8dopunKorTa 

qm’ oydonKovTa 

Q’  évevnkovta 

p’  €kaTov 

ao 6laKocLol, al, a 

T TplakocLoe 

VU —- TETPAKOCLOL 

¢' wevTakoctot 

vy’ €Eaxkootot 

wr! emraKxoctot 

@' OKTAKOCLOL 

’ = évvakootot 

ja xX tALOL, al, a 

\B  dusytALoe 

iY  TpisytArou 

0 TeTpakisy i dLOL 

€ TevtakisyirLor 

s eSarisyé Moe 

~  emtaKkisyt ALot 

NM oKTaKisxi LOL 

8  évvaxisxi AL08 

; 

6  pUpLol, al, a 

kK Suspvptot 

Pp SEekaxispdptor 

, ; 
(5 elKOTaKismUvpLoL 
e ; 
LP  €KATOVTAKLSMUPLOL 
Siakoclakis mvpLol 


2,000,000 xp 


D2 


ORDINALS. 
évaTos Kal d€KaTos 
ELKOOTOS, 1, OV 
ELKOO TOS TPATOS 
ELKoo TOS SevTEpOS 
ELKOTTOS TPiTOS 
TPlLaKOa TOS 
TETTAPAKOO TOS 
TEVTNKOGTOS 
eEnKoa TOS 
éBdounKooTos 
OySonKoaTOS 
EVEVNKOT TOS 
EKATOOTOS, 1, OV 
dtaKocLoaTos, n, OV 
TpPLaKOaLOG TOS 
TET PAKOG LOG TOS 
TEVTAKOG LOG TOS 
efaKooloaTos 
ETTAKOGLOG TOS 
OKTAKOG LOD TOS 
EVVAKOG LOO TOS 
NLNLOG TOS, N, OV 
dusytALoaT ds, n, ov 
TPLSXLALOTTOS 
TETPAKLSYLALOG TOS 
TEVTAKISYLALOT TOS 
EEaKxisytALoa TOS 
ETTAKISYLALOT TOS 
OKTAKISYLALOT TOS 
EVVAKISYXLNLOT TOS 
puploaTos, 7, OV 
dis wuploa Tos, 7, OV 
SexaKls LUPLOTTOS 
ELKOG AKLS MLUPLOT TOS 


/ 
EKATOVTAKLS MLUPLOT TOS 


SiakoglaKkls wuplooT 


’ 
os 


36 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Note 1. —"Audw, both, is declined like 5vo. — Like efs are declined its 
compounds ovdels and pndels, no one. 


N. ovdels ovdeula  ovdév ouvdéves ovdeulac _ ovdéva 
G. ovdevds ovdeutas ovdevds ovdévwy ovdemoy ovdévwr 
D. ovdevE ovdeua ovderl ovdéot(v) ovdemats odbdéor(r) 
A. ovdéva ovdeulay ovdév ovdévas ovdeulas ovdéva 


Nore 2.—In compound numerals (both cardinals and ordinals), the 
smaller number usually precedes with xai, or follows without xai and 
sometimes with kal. 


Thus, 22, do kal efkoor, or evkoor S00 and elxoor Kal dvo 
435, mévre xal rpidxovra Kal Terpaxdgvo., OF TeTpaxdcvo (Kal) 
Tpidkovra (kal) mévre, 


Larger numbers are often expressed by means of the substantive puupids 
(-d50s) = 10,000; e.g., 
302,600 


30|2600 \ éfaxdoror kal dusxtduor Kal TpidkovTa pupiddes. 


Note 8. — The two numbers before every ten (28, 29; 58, 59, etc.), 
are usu. expressed by means of the participle of detv, to want, which agrees 
either with évds, wids, Svotv in the genitive, or more commonly with the 
larger number ; as, 


49 men; wevrjxovra évds Séovres (Or Séovros) dvdpes, undequinquaginta 
vire. | 
89 ships; rerrapdxovra mas Séovoa (or deovons) vijes, undequadrayinta 
naves. 
68 years ; éBdoujKovra Svotv Séovra (or dedvrov) Eryn, duodeseptuaginta 
anni. 


Nore 4. — Mvpior, with the accent on the first syllable, means ¢yn thou- 
sand ; with the accent on the penult (uvploc), innumerable. 


ee 


PRONOUNS. 37 


CHAPTER IV. 
PRONOUNS. 


§ 32.— PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 














S.N.| eyo, I cv, thou —s| | 
)  G.| €wod(pod), of me | cod, of thee | ov, of himself, etc 
D.| éuoi (pot), tome | coi, to thee | ot, to himself, ete. 
A.| éwé (ue), me aé, thee é, himself, etc. 
P. N.| qpueis, we ves, Ye odes, n. ohéa, they 
G.| nav, of us vLOV, of you |adav, of them 
D.| npiv, to us viv, to you |adiot(v), to them 
A.| nuas, us vpas, you ohas, n. odéa, them 
Dual.| vo, we (us) both | cho, you both | codwé (acc.) them 
both 
vov, of (to) us| od@v, of (to) | opwiv, of (to) them 
both you both both 




















Nore.— The forms pod, pol, ué; cot, col, oé; ov, of, &; splor(v) and 
opwiv, are enclitic (see § 168).— The forms o¢éa and ogwé are poetic. 


§ 83. — REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 





(Of myself, ete.) (Of thyself, etc.) (Of himself, etc.) 





€MAUTOD, EMAUTHS | TEAUTOV, TEaUTHS | EavTOV, EAUTHS 
€“avT@, €uavTn | ceavT@, ceavTn | EavT@, EavTH 

, l4 
EMAUTOV, EMaUTHD | TEAUTOV, TEAUTHD | EaVTOY, EAUTHD, -O 





HUOV AVTOV | DMOV avT@Vv EAUTOV 

val val lad al a lal a e ad 
HLL AUTOLS, -als | Umiv, avTOIS, -ais | EavTOts, EavTais 

na a) / / 
HUaS avTOUS, -as | Uuds avToUs, -ds | EavTOUS, EaUTAS,-a 


ee ee Se & 




















Nore. — The forms ceavrod, etc. and éavrod, etc. are often shortened 
into cavrod, avrod, throughout. — Instead of the plur. éavrér (or airay), 
etc., the forms (gen.) spy adrdv, (dat.) oplow adrots or -ais, (acc.) spas 
avrovs or -ds and odéa adrd, are also used, 


38 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 34. —RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 





(Of one another, etc.) 





Plural gen. adAnrA@v 
dat. arArAnXous, -aLs, -o1s 
acc. AAANXOUS, -as, -a 
Dual gen. adrdrndXowv, -aty, -owv 
dat. @AXAnAoLY, -aLv, -oLv 
acc. GAANA®, -a, -W 








§ 35. — POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
€uds, -, -Ov, my. 
NLETEPOS, -A, -OV, OUP. 
a0s, on, adv, thy. 


UMETEPOS, -A, -OV, YOUr. 
és, 7, Ov, his, her (Epic). 
oerepos, -a, -ov, ther. 


Nore. — Instead of the Epic 8s, 7, 8», the Attic prose uses the genitive 
éavTod, ~fs. ; 


§ 386. — DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

















' ([pse.) 

S. N. avTos avTy avTo 
G. avTov AUTHS avTOD 

D. avT@ auTn avuT@ 

A. QAvTOV auTnv auto 

aa auTot avuTat auTa 
a. QAUTO@V QUT@V QUTO@Y 
ee autos avuTais avTots 
A. auTous auTas QuTa 
Dual avTo _avTa QvuTw 
QUTOLW avTatv avutotv 














PRONOUNS. 


DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS — continued. 


39 




















| (Hic.) 
S. N. OUTOS avuTn TOUTO 
G. TOVTOU TAUTNS TOUTOU 
| D. TOUT® | TAUTY TOUT® 
=) A. TOUTOV TAUTND TOUTO 
P.N. oUTOL auras TavTa 
| G. TOUT@V TOUTWY TOUT@V 
Ey: TOUTOLS TAUTALS TOUTOLS 
A. TOUTOUS TANTAS TAUTA 
Dual. TOUT (TavTa) TOUT@ 
TOUTOLV TavTaly TOUTOLV 








Note 1. — Like atrés decline éxeivos, -n, -0, tlle, and &AXos, -n, -o, alius. 
—The demonstrative 85¢, nde, 745e (hic, haec, hoc), is declined like the 
article 6, 7, 74, the syllable de being merely added to its various forms. 


Like ovros are declined rozodros, tantus ; todos, talis, and TydtKooTOos, 
so great, so old, with this difference, however, that the neuter of the nomi- 
- native and accusative sing. ends both in ov and o, and that the initial 7 is 
dropped in all the forms of otros beginning with that letter. 


Sing. Plur. 
N. rosotros toca’tn Tosovro(r) TOTOUTOL TocavTat Tooa’Ta 
G. tocovTov Toca’Tys TocovToU TOTOUTWY TOTOVTWY ToOTOUTwY 
D. toco’Tw TocaiTy TocovTW 
A 


TOTOUTOLS TOTA’TAaLS ToOTOUTOLS 

. TosovTov Toca’Tny TusoiTo(r) TocovTous Tooaitas Tocaira 
Dual. 

TodovTwW Toca’Ta TocovTW TogoUTo.v TocavTaty TogovToLW 


Nore 2. ta is sometimes used as a vocative, in the sense of the 
Latin heus tu; ¢.2., ovros, Ti Bods; heus tu! quid clamas? 

Ad’rés, in the ‘ebliane cases, is used for the pronoun of the third person 
he, she, it ; as, Qavudtouer abrov, we admire him ; @detev abrots, he told them. 

When preceded by the article (6 adrés, ete. ), it has the meaning of 
idem ‘*the same.’? ‘The article then usually coalesces with airés into one 
word ($5), but in those cases only in which the article ends ina ‘vowel. 
Thus ai7rés for 6 adrés, ravré (usu. radrdv) for 7d avré, abral for ai abral, 
Tatra tery ra avra, ete. 


ger The forms adrés, ipse ; ra’ry, huic; and rabra, haec, must be well 
distingtashed from airés, idem; tairy, eidem, and tatvrd, eadem. 


40 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 837. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 




















Singular. Dual. Plural. 
Nom. SHS Oo ete? Be 
Gen. ov 7S ov @ @ -@ @V @VY Ov 
Dat. o hf @® ov aiv ow | ois als oils 
Ace. ov nv oO ous as 





§ 38. — INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 






































(Quidam.) 
S. N. TLS Tis Tl 
G. TLVOS (TOV) 
4 A 
DD; TIWi (T@) 
l4 
Aa TLWa TLVA TL 
1 sed Es TLVES TLVES tld (ATTA) 
G. TLU@V 
93 Tiai(V) : 
A. TLWaS TLVAS Tid (aTTA) 
Dual. TLVE 
TLVOLV 
(Quis? Quid?) 
S. N. Tis ; Ths ; vl; 
G. Tivos (TOV) 
ee o 
D. Tit (TM) 
4 
A: Tiva Tiva Ti 
P.N. Tives TIVES Tiva 
G. Tivav 
1). Tiot(V) 
At Tivas rivas Tiva 
Dual. Tive 





Tivow 














PRONOUNS. 


41 


INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS — continued. 




















(Quicumque.) 
S. N. OSTLS HTL 6 TL 
G. OUTLVOS HSTLVOS OUTLVOS 
D. @TLUL NTLVL @TLUL 
e/ e/ ed 
A. OVTLVa nvTwa 6 TL 
‘eae. 8 OLTLVES aiTives ativa 
G. @VTLV@V : 
D. | — ofstict(v) aistict(v) oistict(v) 
A. ousTivas aSTLWAS aria : 
Dual. GTLVE ATLVE GTLVE 
olvTLvoLy aivTLvowy olyTivoww 








Note 1.—The forms rod and rq are of common occurrence in the 
Attic writers. “Arra usually stands with an adjective; as, dea drra, 
érep’ drra.—In like manner 6rov is frequently used for otrivos, érw for 


@rim, and drra for driva. 


Note 2.—To the indefinite pronouns belongs also the word deiva, a 
certain one, such a@ one (whom one cannot or will not name). It is thus 
declined : nom. 6 4 7d detva; gen. Tod Tis Tod detvos; dat. TO 7TH TE det ; 
acc. Tov Thy Td detva; —plur. of Setves, TOv Selvwv, rods detvas. No dative 
occurs. Sometimes, though rarely, de?va is used indeclinably. 


§ 389. — CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 














THAKOS ; how great or 
oT NALKOS, old ? 





Interrogative. Indefinite. 
moaos ; * 9 Too 0s, 7, dv, aliquantus 
he quantus ! 
OTTO 0S, 
Tot0s ; 1o.os, a, ov, of a certain 
qualis ? ell oe Ws 
O7rotos, kind. 
wanting. 











* The interrogatives beginning with w are used in direct questions ; 


those beginning with 6, in indirect. 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


CORRELATIVE ADJECTIVES — continued. 





Demonstrative. 


Relative. 





TOG0S, n, ov, tantus 

4 / 7 
Toa Osbe, TOTNHSE, TOTOVSE 
TOGOUTOS, -avTN, -OUTO(V) 


60S, 7, ov, quantus 





ToLOS, a, ov, talis 

4 , 4 
TOLOSOE, TOLADE, TOLOVSE 
TOLOUTOS, -aUTN, -OUTO(V) 


oios, a, ov, qualis 








THAIKOS, 80 great, so old 
TNALKOSOE, -NOE, -OVOE 
TNALKOUTOS, -AVTN, -OUTO(?) 





| rlKos, nN, OV, as great, 


as old 


—_« i» 








PHE VERB. 43 


CHAPTER V. 
THE VERB. 


DIVISION OF VERBS. 


- §40.— There are two main classes of verbs: verbs in 
@ and verbs in pe. 
Verbs in » ave divided, according to their characteris- 
tics, into pure, mute, and liquid verbs. 
The characteristic of a verb is the letter going immedi- 
ately before o. 7 
PURE verbs are those whose characteristic is a vowel. 
They. are either 3 ; 
Pure contract, whose characteristic is a, €, or 03 or 
Pure uwneontracted, whose characteristic is ¢ or v. 
MuTE verbs are those whose characteristic is one of the 
nine mutes. ‘They are subdivided into 
P-mute verbs, whose characteristic is a p-mute or 77 ; 
K-mute verbs, whose characteristic is a k-mute or 
oa(TT); 
T-mute verbs, whose characteristic is a t-mute or ©. © 
LIQUID verbs are those whose characteristic is one of 
the four liquids. 























MUTE. 
PURE. (P-mute.) (K-mute.) . (T-mute.) LIQUID. 
Boece f. (f cy. x RR Re ep 
tov WT - oo(TT) ¢ 
TLULa-w hetTr-o TrEK-@ AVUT-w oTéAXw 
pire-w Tpip-w oTéy-o Wevd-w déu-o 
dnr0-w ypad-w Bpéx-w Tei0-w haiv-@ 
KWAV-W TUTT-@ Taoo-w ppac-w oTrElp-@ 








44 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Norr. —In the formation of the tenses, the characteristic wr is consid- 
ered as a simple P-mute; the characteristic oo(r7), generally as a simple 
K-mute, and the characteristic ¢, generally as a simple ‘l-mute. 


VOICES, TENSES. 


§ 41.— The Greek language has three voices: the 
Active, Passive, and Middle Voices. 

The Middle Voice expresses (1) an action which the 
subject performs on itself, the subject being both agent 
and object; e.g., Aovw, IT wash (another); Aovowas, L wash 
myself (= 1 bathe);—(2) an action which the subject per- 
forms on an object belonging or nearly related to it; e.g., 
éTUwato THY Keparnv, Tov Taida, he struck his (own) head, 
his (own) child (rvmrev xeparny, traida, etc., to strike the 
head, the child of another); — (8) an action which the sub- 
ject does or causes to be done for itself, that is, for its 
own use and advantage; e.g., éd0vAwcaTo THY vicor, he 
subjected the island to himself; @apaxa érrotnoato, he caused 
a breastplate to be made for himself. 


§ 42. — The Tenses are six: the Present and Imperfect, 
the Future and Aorist, the Perfect and Pluperfect. They 
are divided into 


Principal | and - Historical. 
PRS. ypdgw, I write. - IMP. @ypadov, Iwas writing. — 
PRE. yéypaga, I have written. PLP. éyeypagev, I had written. 
FUT. ypaww, I shall write. AOR. €ypaya, I wrote. 


Note 1.—Some of the tenses (the Aorist act., mid., and pass.; the 
Perfect and Pluperfect act., and the Future pass.) admit of two forms, 
called the first and second Aorist, the first and second Perfect, etc. — 
Very few verbs have both forms, and, in general, those that admit of the 
first form do not admit of the second, and vice versa. 

The Greek Aorist generally corresponds to the Latin historical Perfect 
and to such English forms as I wrote, I came, I went, I gave, I begged, 
and the like. 


Note 2.— There is also a Future-Perfect in use, but for the most part 
in the middle voice only, more rarely in the passive. 


THE VERB. 45 


AUGMENT. 


§ 42. The Augment is prefixed to all the historical 
tenses, but in the indicative only. 

There are two augments: the syllabie and the temporal. 
The syllabic belongs to verbs that begin with a consonant ; 
the temporal, to verbs that begin with a vowel. 

The syllabic augment is e prefixed to the verb-stem ; as, 
Aéyw, é-Aey-ov. If the verb begins with p, the p is doubled ; 
as, plirtw, éppirrov. fate 

The temporal augment consists in lengthening the ini- 
tial a € into 7, o into @, az into 7, ot into @, av into nu, and 
tivintotv. Thus, 


édrrltiw Impf. 7Amcfov Perf. 7AmiKka Plpf. 7Amixecv 
Omidéw ‘6 wyutdouv 66 wuldnKa ‘6 @widAjKELY 
ait éw 66 MToUP ‘6 aTnKa 66 arhKew 
avréw $6 mUouy ‘6 mUAnKa 66 mbAjKELY 
olkrifw _  — gKrigov 66 @KTika 66  @xtixey 
‘ikerevw ‘6 ‘Txérevov ‘6 ‘ikérevka ‘6 “Tkerevkecy 


Nore 1. — The three verbs BovdAoua, I will; dtvaua, I can, and wédd\w, 
I intend, am about to, often occur, in Attic writers, with 7 instead of e; 
as, nweANov and EueddXo», etc. 


Nore 2.— The following verbs change e into e: é€xw, to have, Impf. 
elxov; édw, to permit; éoridw, to entertain; é0ifw, to accustom; éXiocw, 
to. wind; &\xw (and éAktw), to draw; Eprw, éprigw, to creep; &roua, to 
follow, and épydfoua, to work. 


Notre 3.— Verbs beginning with 7, w, e, ev, or ov have neither augment 
nor reduplication. — Evxoua, to pray, however, has sometimes nvyduny, 
and always perf. niyua. — Of elkdtw, to liken, the forms jxKafov, jKraca, 
and qxacuac sometimes occur in the Attic writers. 


REDUPLICATION. 


-§ 48.— Reduplication consists in repeating the first 
consonant of the verb-stem with e. It is prefixed to the 
perfect, future perfect, and the pluperfect; the latter, 
moreover, as an historical tense, takes the augment e¢ 
before the reduplication. 


Ey sos: GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Those verbs only admit the reduplication which begin 
with a simple consonant or with a mute and liquid; but 
verbs beginning with p, a double consonant (wy & €), or 
two single consonants which are not mute and liquid, or 
with yv, yA, admit the simple augment only. Thus, 


ypagow, write, coi yé-ypaga ree é-ye-ypapety 
piréw, love, we-pii\nka é-1r€-PiHKELv 
plrrw, throw, ‘¢  &-ppipa ‘6  é-pplpev 
fnréw, seek, ‘6 é-(T Ka ‘6 é-&nT KEL 
aTvcow, fold, ‘6 é-rTuxa (6 é-mrrbxev 
yrigw, carve, ‘6 &-yhugha s6 é-yAdewv 


Nore 1. — The reduplication, as well as the simple augment in verbs 
that are not susceptible of reduplication, remains through all the moods 
of the Perfect. 


Nore 2.— The augment e of the Pluperfect in the Attic dialect is often 
omitted, especially in compounds ; e.g., dvaBeBHxer, katadéXecr7o, for aveBe- 
BHKeL, KaTehéXeTTO. 


Nore 3. — Aéyw, to say, has Nédr\eywac (nO Perf. act.); diaréyoua, to 
converse, has dreiheywar. — DvdAdEeyw, to collect, has cuvethoxa and cuveldey- 
far. — Melpoua, to obtain by lot, has efuapras and eiuapro, it is (was) fated. 


ATTIC REDUPLICATION. 


§ 44.— The Attie reduplication consists in repeating 
the first two letters of verbs beginning with a, ¢, 0, before 
the temporal augment. These verbs are chiefly: 


bfw (OA-), smell, Att. Pf. 85-wda 

apdw, plough, Hs dp-npouat 

arév, grind, - ad-HrAET wa 
éehéyxw, CONVINCE, - €A-7H ACY Mae 
éhicow, wind, ee éd-nALy wat * 
éyelpw, wake, se éy-7'yepmar 
é€uéw, vomit, a EU-NMEKA, -T Mal 
éhavvw, drive, as €\-7A\aka, -mat 
épeldw, prop, €p-7peika, -T ual 
drelgw, anoint, e ad-HrALba, =wmat 
épuTTw, dig, * dp-wpuxa, -yuas T 
ayelpw, collect, bd aY-NYEepKa, -at 


* Or eideyuar (with the rough breathing); t and wpuypuac 


THE VERB. 47 


AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOSITION. 


§ 45. — Verbs compounded with prepositions take the 
augment between the preposition and the verb, and if the 
preposition, ends in a vowel (apo and zrepé excepted) 
the vowel is elided. IUpo with the augment e frequently 
becomes pou. 


amroBd\\w Impf. dw-éBadr\ov Prf. dro-BéBrnxa Pipf. dw-eBeBAnKerv 
éxBad\d\w ‘6 €€-EBadXov ‘¢  é€x-BEBAnKa ‘6  €&-eBeBAHKELY 
1 poBddd\w ‘<  wpovBaddov ‘6 apo-BéBAnKa ‘¢ — wpobBeBANKELY 
TwepiBadrdw ‘s wepi-EBaddov ‘+ mepi-BéBAnKa ‘¢ wept-eBeBArKELY 
oupplirTw ‘¢ ouv-éppirtov = **_— auv-Eppipa ‘¢  ouv-epplperv 


2. Verbs compounded with dus take the augment in the 
middle when the verb begins with a vowel (but not 7 or 
w); otherwise they take it at the beginning; as, 


dus-apeotéw Impl. dus-npéorovy Perf. dus-npéornxa Plpf. dus-npeor jKecy 
dus-Tuxéw ‘6  é-dus-ruxouv = **_—s Se-dus-TuxnKka =6** ~— é- €-Sus-T UX HKELY 


3. All other compounds take the augment at the be- 
ginning; as, 


olixodouéw Impf. Sxodduour Perf. gxoddunka Plpf. w@xodoujKerv 
bMudodoyéw ‘6 éuvdoddyouv 66 penvOodynka ‘6 €wenvdodoy HKe 


Nore 1.— A few verbs take the augment and reduplication both at the 
beginning and in the middle ; as, 


dvop0bw, raise up, AvepOovv mapo.éw, riot, émap@vouv 
évoxréw, molest,  hvwydouv dvéxoua, endure, Avercxdunv. 


Thus also: dcairdw (from Slaira), to feed, and diaxovéw (from didKovos), 
to serve ; Perf. de6tyrnKxa, Sedinxdvnxa; Impf. édi7jtwv and diytrwyv, édinxdvouy 
and dinkxdvoup. 


Notre 2.— A few verbs, compounded with prepositions, take the aug- 
ment before the preposition; as, dudiévyum, to clothe ; érlorapuar, to know ; 
Kabifw, to set; xabevdw, to sleep, and a few more; Aor. judleca, Impf. 
Arierduny, éxdOcfov, etc. 


48 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Note 3. — The following verbs, though derived from substantives or 
adjectives, are treated as if they were compounded of a preposition and 
a simple verb: 


éykwuidtw, extol, évexwulatov érOuuéw, desire, éreOvuouv 
éyxeipéw, attempt, évexeipouvv ériTnievw, pursue, emer Hdevov 
éexkAno.d{~w, converse, éexnolafov kaTnyopéw, accuse, Kat nydpouv 
évedpevw, plot, évidpevov mpopntrevw, prophesy, wpovpyrevov 


Nore 4. — A few verbs, derived from words already compounded, take 
the augment at the beginning ; as, évavriotua: (from évayrlos), to oppose ; 
dvri-Botéw (from dyriBorH), to meet with; éumeddw (from Zysedos), to 
establish ; —Impf. jvavriovunr, jvTiBdrovv and Att. AvreBbrnoa, Aumédovy 
and éverédoup. 


THE VERB. 


§ 46. — The verb ets, to be. 


49 
















































































Indic | Subj. | Optative. | Imper. | Infin. | Partic. 
PRESENT. 
i ana I may be.| I might be. | be thow.| to be. being. 
S. 1. | edu @ el'nv elvar ov 
2. | ef ns eins to odca 
d. | éori(v) n ein eoTw bv 
AD. 2. | éoror Tov elnrov éoTov: G. | 
3. | ésréy Tov elnT nv éoTwy évros, etc. 
P.1. | éopév WO [MEV el nev. 
2. | éoré Te elnre gore 
| 3. | elal(v) wo(v) | elnoav or elev | Eorwoar 
IMPERFECT. 
Twas. : 
S. 1. | qv 
. 2. | Ro0a(Fs) 
3. |-Ay 
D. 2. | forov(Frov) 
3. | Rotnv(jrnv) 
P. 1. | Auer 
2. | Te 
3. | Roav 
FUTURE. 
I shall be. I would be. 
S. l. | €oouar écolunv érecOar | érduevos, 
2. | on or @oe ‘| €xo10 N, ov 
3. | éorae €g0lToO 
D. 1. | érdueOov ae é€coluefov ae 
2. | €cecbov éco.s Gov 
3. | €reaOov écola nv 
P.1. | écdpueda écolueba 
2. | €cecbe éco.ebe 
3. | €o ovrae €couvTo 





the forms 4s, #rov, and yrnp. 


E 


Nore. — The imperfect forms jc6a, jorov, and yorny, are preferred to 


The form #s frequently occurs in later 
writers. The middle form juny (instead of #v), I was, is very rare. 





50 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 





§ 47. —TABLE OF THE PERSONAL ENDINGS. 






















































































ACTIVE. 
Indic Subjunct. Optative. | Imper. Infin. Partic. 
Present. |S. w w OLpt eu WV, OUTA, OV 
€Ls ns ous € (G. ovTos) 
él n ot érw 
D. 
e€TOV NTOV oLTov €TOV 
€TOV nNTOV olrnyv éTwv 
P. oper WLEV Oley 
€TE NTE OLTE €TE 
ovgi(v)| wor(v) ouev érwoav, Att. dvTwr 
Imperfect : Sing. ov, es, e(v); — Dual, erov, érnv ; — Plur. oper, ere, ov. 
Perfect. |S. a évat ws, ula, os 
as (4G. dros) 
€(v) 
D. 
atov |Like Pres.|Like Pres. |Like Pres. 
arov 
P. apev 
are 
agi(v) 
Pluperfect: S. ev, evs, e6; —D. ecrov, elrnv; —P. emer, ere, evar. 
1 Aorist. | S. a Copa au as, aca, av 
) as ats ov (G. avTos) 
e(v) al aT w 
D. 
arov |Like Pres.| acrov arov 
arny alrny aT wy 
P. apev Lev . 
are aLTe are 
av avev drwoav, Att. dvrwy 
Future. 
Like Pres.} —— _ |LikePres.|} -—— _ /|Like Pres.|Like Pres. 





we The endings of the Passive Voice are the same as those of the Middle, 





TABLE OF THE PERSONAL ENDINGS. 


THE VERB. 


dD) 





























MIDDLE. 

Indie. Subjunct. | Optative. Imper. Infin. Partic. 
S. omar Wat olunv éo Oar dmevos, 7, ov 

0 nN. 010 ou 

€TAL NT at OLTO éo Ow 
D. duebov wuebov oluebov 

ea Bov no ov ov Oov ea Bov 

eg ov noOov olaOnv écOwy 
P. due0a wueda olueba 

eae noGe og Oe eg Je 

ovTrat WT OL OLVvTO éodwoav, Att. éo0wyv 





Imperfect : S. dunv, ov, ero; — D. dueBov, eOov, écOnv ; — P. dpueda, €o0€, ovro. 





S. war 
cat 
TOL 

D. peor 
oOov 
oOov 

P. peda 
ode 
VTaL 


MEvos, N, ov 
w 








Mévos, 1, OV 
elnv 





vo 
ow 


aOov 
cOwy 


oe 





a0at 





cOwoav, Att. cOwy 





Méves, N, Ov 





Pluperfect: S. unv, oo, ro; — D. pedov, c0ov, cOnv; —P. pe0a, oe, vro. 



































S. dunv alunv acBat dpevos, n, ov 
w “ato at 
aTO atTo ac0w 

D. duedov alueGov — 
acOov | Like Pres. | awcOov ag ov 
doOnv alaOnv doOwy 

P. dueba alueba 
age ac b& age 
avTo QLvTo dcdwoav, Att. dcdwy 

S. omac 
n OF e 

erat 

D. due8ov 
eo Dov — Like Pres. a Like Pres. | Like Pres. 
ea Oov 

P. dueba 
eo Ge 
ovTat 








the endings of the 1 Aorist excepted, for which see § 58. 


E 2 


52 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 48. —CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -{. 



































ACT- — 
Tenses. Pers. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNOTIVE. 
Present. ee ae Ai I loosen hu-w, I may loosen 
2. j-ers, thou loosenest AU-ys : 
ou hv-e1, he, she, it loosens dU-7 
D1, 
2. Av-er ov, ye two loosen hi-nTov 
3. dv-erov, they two loosen Xi Arby 
a B Av-ouev, we loosen Av-@ev 
2. r “ETE, Ye loosen AU-HTE 
3. hv-dvor(v), they loosen Av-@ou(v) 
Imperfect. | S. 1. @-dd-ov, I was loosening 
2. &-d-es 
3. |  &-Ad-e(v) 
D4. . 
2 é-\p-e€TOV 
3. é-Ay-ér nv 
fA; é-\U-0 MEV 
2. é-\u-ETE 
3. -\U-ov | 
Perfect. S. 1. | NeAv«-a, J have loosened he-AUK-w, I may have 
j 2. | d¥-AuK-as he-AbK-ys | loosened 
3. | Ae-DAuK-e(v) he-AUK-7 
Dp: 1. 
2. he-AbiSarov he-AVK-7}TOV 
3. Ae-NUK-aTOV Ae-AVK-HT OV 
coat he 2A gk-a per Ae-AUK- EV 
2. he-AUK-are Ne-AUK- TE 
3. | de-AvK-dou(v) Ne-AviK-Woe(v) 
Pluperfect.| S. 1. | é-de-Aux-evv, I had loosened 
2. | éErnerbK-evs 
3. | &-Ne-vK-ec 
D.:1. 
2. | é-Ne-AUK-ELTOV 
3. é-de-AuK-eirnv 
P. 1. | &de-Avn Bier 
2. | é-Ne-AvUK-bLTE 
3. | &Ne-AvK-eoay * 
“fp. Aorist. 4| S. 1. é-ddo-a, I loosened hvo-w, I may loosen 
2. é-\bo-as Ado-ys 
3. ¢-\do-e(v) Ado-7 
DA, 
2. é-vo-urov AUo-hrov 
3. é-\ug-aT nv AUvo-HTOV 
: da é-Ato-hwev | AUo-wyev 
2. é-Abo-are AUo-nTE 
/ ‘\ 3. ¢-Nbo-av Avo-war(v) 
Future. cap © dvo-w, I shall loosen 
2. AVo-exs 
3. AUo-er 
jt Fee - 
2. hUb-erov 
3. vo-EeTOV 
P.4. Avo-Omev 
2. AUo-eTE 
3. Avo-dvor(v) 




















THE VERB. 


53 


CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -Q. 








IVE. 

OPTATIVE, IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE, 
Av-oum, I might ; hi-ev, to hi-wy, loosening 
Av-o1s [loosen db-e, loosen [loosen Av-ovca 

_ Nv-o8 : v-éTw Av-ov 
G. 
Av-dcT ov hdb-erov Av-ovTos, etc. 
hu-dlr nv Au-ér wy : 
— Ad-oliwev 
At-aT6 Av-ere 
AU-ovev du-éTWOaY, USU. ORS 











Ae-AvK-oyue, I might 
AerAVK-o1s [have 1. 
NE-AUK-O4 


Nechve-drs y 
Xe-AuK-dlT nv 
Ne-AUVK-Ouper 
he-AUK-OlTE 
Ne-AvK-dtey 


héAuK-e, loosen 
Ne-AVUK-ETW 


Ae-X e-erov 
Ne-AUK-ET WY 


Ne-Nbx-ere 


he-AbK-évat, toy 
[have 
[Zoosened 





‘| Ne-AvK-Erwoay, USU. de-AvK-d”TwY 


Ne-AuK-ws, having 
Ne-Avk-vial loose red | 
Ne-A.vK-ds 


A echve-iros. etc. 








Avo-aiyu, I might 
Avo-aus Or-evas [ J. 


AVo-ae OF -eve(v) 


 bo-atrov 

_ Avo-atryny 

 Avo-aipev 

 dvo-atre 
AUo-atey or -evay 


Abc-ov, loosen 
Abo-dtw 


3 
\uUc-aTov 
A\¥o-dTwv 





» 
s 
A\vo-arTe 


Abo-ar, to 
[ Loosen 





huo-dr&cav, usu. Avo-dyTwr 


Ave-as, having 1. 
Avo-aca 
ADo-ay 


4 . 
ve-avTos, etc. 





— Nds-oum, 1 would 
| dUo-ois [loosen 
AVo-o1 


 Avo-ovrov 
| dvo-olr ny 
Avo-oLpev 
AUo-oure 
Avo-o1ev 














hbo-evv, to be 
[about to 
[ loosen 





Nvo- -wv, being 
ovea [about 
yo 


[to l. 
ED habe 








54 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 49. — CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -Q. 












































MID- 
Tenses. Pers INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. S. 1. dAv-ouat, I release by Av-wuat, Tmay ransom 
2. AU-n [ paymentofran-|  dv-7 
3. dv-erar [som, Iransom| —v-nrac 
Re OS du-dueOov Au-wuedor 
2. \v-eo Gov dAv-no Gov 
3. dv-eo Oov U-no Bov 
Pd. v-dueda du- dueba 
2. U-eo Be AU-no Oe 
s 3. AU-ovTat AV-wyT at 
Imperfect. | S. 1. é-du-dunv, I was ran- 
2. €-\U-ov [soming 
3. é-\U-€T oO 
(Rak: é-\v-dueBov 
2. €-U-eo Boy 
3. é-du-éo Onv 
Pei: é-\u-dueba 
2. é-\U-e0 Oe 
3. é-\U-ovTo 
Perfect. S. 1. Aé-Au-yar, I have ran- | r\e-v-uévos, I may have 
| 2. | dé-Av-cae [ somed ) [ransomed 
3. é-Avu-Tat ns 
D. 1. de-AV-eOov N 
2. dé-Avu-o Bov 
3. | AéAv-cbov 
t age Ae-AU-weOa 
2. Aé-Av-abe 
38. | Aé-Av-vrae 
Pluperfect.|} S. 1. | éAe-Av-unv, I had ran- 
: 2. | é-Né-Av-co [ somed 
3. | é&Aé-Av-TO 
D. 1. | é-Ae-Av-weBov 
2. | é-Aé-Av-cOov 
3. | é-Ae-Av-cOnv 
P. 1. | é-Ae-Av-neba 
2. | €-Né-Au-o Ge 
3. | é-Aé-Au-vTO 
1 Aorist. ope é-\uo-dunv, I ransomed hvo-wuat, I may ran- 
2. é-lvo-w Avo-7 [som 
3. é-\Uo-aTo Avo-nT aL 
Dh, é-\ug-dueOov Auvo- wedov 
2. é-\vo-acboy - \to-no boy 
3. é-duo-do Onv Avo-no Gov 
eS é-\vag-dueba Avo-wpeda 
2. é-Lic-acbe \Uvo-no be 
3. é-\Uo-avTo Avo-wyTat 
Future. = tee B Avo-ouat, I shall ran- 
2. Avo-n OF -€4 [som 
3. AUo-er aL 
D4, Avo-dueov 
2. Uvo-eo Oov 
3. AUo-eo Gov, etc. 
P; 4: 
: ya 
Fut. -Perf. 3. | Ae-Avo-ouat, I shall have ransomed. (Like Pres. ) 





THE 


VERB. 


55 


CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -Q. 


DLE. 





OPTATIVE, 


IMPERATIVE. 


INFINITIVE, 


PARTICIPLE, 





dv-olunv, I might 
Av-010 §=— [ransom 
dv-orTo 

dv-olwebov 

dv-o1e Oov 

du-ola nv 

dv-ol ueba 

dv-o.o Oe 

dv-oLvTo 


v-ov, rans. 
Av-é0 Ow 


Av-ea Gov 
Avu-éo Ow 


Av-ec be 


Av-ecbar, to 
[ransom 





du-ég Owoav, USU. Auv-EcOwy 


Avu-duevos, ransom- 
Av-omevn [ing 
dv-dmevov | 








Ae-Av-pwévos, I might 
etnv = [have r. 
eins 
ein 


Aé-Au-co, TANS. 
Ne-AU-o Ow 


Aé-dv-o Hov 
e-AU-o Owy 


Aé-Avu-o Oe 


Ae-AU-c Har, to 
[have ran- 
[somed 





Ae-AU-cOwoav, U 


Su. Ne-AU-c Ow 


Ae-u-pévos, having 
Ae-Au-wévy| ransomed 
Ae-Av-wévor 











Avo-alunyv, I might 


AUo-acar, to 








Avo-duevos, having 





Avo-oluefov 
dva-o1c Oov 
Avo-ola ny, etc. 





_|Ae-Aua-oluny, etc. 





Avo-aco [ransom ADo-a, rans. [ransom Avo-apévyn [7ans. 
AUo-alTo Avo-do Ow Avo-dwevov 
Avo-aluePov 

Avo-ato Oov Avc-acOov 

Avo-alaOny Avo-do Owy 

Avo-alueda 

Atvo-arobe vo-ac Ge 

AUG-aLvTo huc-doOwoav, USU. Avo-do Owy ‘ 
Avo-olunv, I would Nto-ecOur, to| Avo-duevos, being 
Avo-o1o ©=[ ransom [be about} dvo-ouévn [about 
Avo-01TO [to rans.| dAvodpuevoy [to r. 





Ae-Avo-eo Pat 








Ae-Ava-duevos 





56 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 50. — CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -QQ. 
PAS. 





INDICATIVE, SUBJUNOTIVE. 


~~ 
© 
5 
mn 


Tenses. 


1 Aorist. 





w 


O28 ee Fae Spe Po re | foto Cobo oo po 


Sdv-ns v0-fs 
&Avd-n vd-7 
é-\v0-rov vd-Hrov 
é-ud-Frny Avd-HTov 
é-\U0-quev Avd-Guev 
é-\vUO-yTe vO-Gre 
é-Avd-noav Avd-dor(v) 


do-Oro-opat, I shall be 1. 
u-O7o-7 OF Et 

u-O7o-eT aL 

dv-Ono-6 wePov 
dAu-0n0-e0 Gov 
du-Oj0-€5 bor 
Au-Ono-opeba 

Av-O7o-€0 Oe 

hu-Oho-bvTat 


ye The present, imperf., perfect, and pluperfect are the same as in the 
§ 51. — REMARKS ON THE THREE VOICES. 


1. The perfect imperative very rarely occurs, and for 
the most part in verbs only whose perfect has the meaning 
_of the present. 

_ The perfect subjunctive and optative is frequently ex- 
pressed periphrastically by the perfect participle and the 
| subjunctive or optative of eivar; as, AeAUKaS @, Solverim ; 
—eAVKOS env, solvissem. 

In Attic the Ist pers. sing. of the pluperfect active 
sometimes ends in 7, instead of ew; the 38d pers. plur. is 
generally shortened into evap. 

2. The aorist indic. denotes past time, and corresponds 
to such English forms as J came, I went, I saw, I wrote, 
and the like; but sometimes, in general propositions which 
express a fact borrowed from experience, the aorist indic. 
is rendered by the English present or by zs wont, 7s accus- 
tomed, with the infinitive; e.g., Time destroys (or is wont 
to destroy) beauty ; KaAXos 0 Ypdvos avndwoeD. 

The aorist imperative is always rendered by the present; 
the aorist subjunct., optative, and infinitive, by the present 
as well as by the past; the aorist partic., generally by the past. 

The aorist subjunctive, when used in subordinate clauses 
introduced by éav, dtav, évredav, mpl av, etc., corresponds 
to the Latin future- perfect. 


@-80-nr, I was loosened sto I may be loosened 





1 Future. | S. 





r. 




















THE VERB. 5% 


CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -Q. 
SIVE. 





























OPTATIVE. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE, PARTICIPLE. 
hud-ely v, I might be hvd-Avat, to be hud-el , being 
Avd-Eins [loosened | AVO-yTL, be loosened [loosened | \vO-€toa [loosened 
Avd-etH Av6-ATw \v6-év 
dvd-élnrov AVO-nT Ov G. 
hud-dinr ny hud-4T wy v6-évros, etc. 
hud-éinwev 
hud-éinre . Av6- 
vd-etev Avent agar 
u-Iyo-ohunv, J should hu-Oho-er at h-Bno-fueves 
oe o [be loosened hu-Ono-0nevyn 
du-O}o-91T 0 hu-On0-8 wevov 
Av-Ono-oluedov 
du-OHo-olc Gov 
Au-Ono-bho Pov 
du-Ono-pt ueba 
uv-O7no-o10 Oe 
Siete Waa 


























Middle; but with a passive meaning: Iam (was, have been, etc.) loosened. 


REMARKS ON THE THREE VOICES. 


_ 8. The forms -eas, -eve(v), and -eav of the aorist opta- 
tive act are Aeolic. They are employed by the Attic 
writers in preference to the regular forms. 

4. The endings of the 2d pers. sing. (mid. or pass.) i 
-n, -ov, and -w arise from the primitive forms -eoat, -noat, 
-eoo, and -aco, the o being dropped, and the remaining 
vowels contracted accordingly. ‘Thus, 


ov 
@ 


eoal = eal = 74 - €70 = €0 
noat = nat = 7 aco = ao 


5. The 2d pers. sing. of the present and future indic. 
mid. or pass. ends among the Attic writers both in y and 
se. The form in e regularly occurs in BovrAe, oer, and 
iyee (from Bobropat, oiouat, and fut. dyouar); but 
subjunct. Bovry, ofp. 

6. In the dual and plural of the 1 aorist optative pass. 
the » is often dropped; as, AvGeiror, AuGeirny, AvGet wen, 
AvOeire, for AvOEinTor, etc. 

In the 1 aorist imperat. pass. (in -7@2), not the &rst, 
but the second, aspirate is changed into its own kindred 
smooth ; hence Avd-n71, not AVT-nOt. 


58 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 


§ 52. — FIRST GENERAL REMARK. — Before entering 
upon the formation of the tenses, the pupil ought to com- 
mit to memory, and make himself master of, the personal 
endings of the tenses in general (§ 47), and of those in 
particular which he is about to form. In learning those 
endings, he will observe 


a) that in the indicative, the principal tenses make the 
dual in ov, ov; the historical, in ov, nv; 

6) that in the subjunctive all the tenses make the dual 
in ov, ov; in the optative, in ov, nv; 

ec) that the O-sound of the third person singular, dual, 
and plural of any imperative is written with o. 


§ 58.— SECOND GENERAL REMARK. —In the formation 
of any of the tenses (the present and imperfect excepted), 


Pure verbs lengthen the characteristics a € into , o 
into w, and 7 v into tv; 

Mute verbs undergo the euphonic changes (§ 65); 

Laquid verbs shorten the present stem by dropping the 
second letter in at, et, AA, and mv; as 


datv- 
dav - 


te The present-stem is obtained by dropping the final w or oua of 
the present. 


Pres.-stem. 
Short stem. 


OTELp- oTEXA- | Kapy- 























OTTEp- OTEA- Kap- 


§ 54. — PRESENT AND IMPERFECT. 


The PRESENT. — Suffix the proper endings to the pres- 
ent stem. 


The IMPERFECT act. —Suffix ov to the present-stem and 
prefix the augment; as, Avw, imperf. act. (pres.-stem Av-) 
é-Av-ov. 


The IMPERFECT mid. or pass. — Suffix oun to the pres.- - 
stem and prefix the augment; as Avw, imperf. m. or p. 
(pres.-stem Av-) €-Av-dunv. 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 59 


§ 55. FUTURE AND AORIST. 



































Indic. Subj. . Optat. 
future-act. @ — | Objet 
Future m. or p. Oat — oiunv 
Imper. Infin. Partic. 
Future-act. — €LV WV, OVTa, OV 
Future m. or p. — ecOat OMEVOS, 7, OV 








The FUTURE act. — Suffix the proper endings to the 
future-stem ; as, Avw, future act. (fut.-stem Avo-) Avo-w. 

The FUTURE mid.— Suffix the proper endings to the 
future-stem ; as, Av@, future mid. (fut.-stem. Ave-) Ado-opmar. 

The 1 FUTURE pass. — Add (the tense-sign) @no- to the 
pres.-stem, and suffix the proper endings ; as, Avo, 1 future 
pass. (pres.-stem Av- + tense-sign O@no-=dv-Ona-) Av-Ono- 
Oma. 





Nore 1. — The future-stem is obtained by adding (the tense-sign) o to 
the pres.-stem ; as, Avw, fut.-stem (Av + ¢)= Ado- 3 Tiudw, fut.-stem (Tiun 
+o) = Tino-. 


By applying the euphonic changes in the case of mute verbs, it wi!l be 
seen that 
P-mute verbs make the fut.-stem always in y ; 
K-mute verbs make the fut.-stem always in ¢; 
T-mute verbs make the fut.-stem always in co. 


Thus, ypddw, fut.-stem (ypad +o) = ypay-; Bpéxw, fut.-stem (Bpex + 0) 
= Bpeg-; Pevdw, fut.-stem (Yevd + 0) = Peuc-. 

Liquid verbs, in the future act. and mid, do not add the tense-sign o, 
but simply shorten the stem (§ 53).and then suffix the proper endings. 
These endings are for liquid verbs, in the future act. and mid., the same 
as those of contracts in éw (§ 78), viz.: @ for the future act. and ofua for 
the future mid. 


Notr 2.— In the 1 future pass., liquid verbs change the stem-vowel e 
of monosyllabic short stems into a; but short stems of more than one 
syllable retain e. 


60 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Pres. Fut. act. Fut. mid. 1 Fut. pass. 
Tipd-w, TLULNO-w, TLC -OMaL, Tiun-OHno-omat. 
piré-w, pirjo-w, pirjo-ouar, pirn-Ojo-omat. 
dnX6-w, SnrAwWo-w, dnrAwWo-omat, 5nAw-Ojo-omat. 
KWAU-w, KWAUT-W, KwAUo-oOMaL, KWAV-OHo-oMat. 
ypag-w, ypay-w, ypay-opar, ypap-Oho-opar. 
TEK-W, whéé-w, wéE-omal, w hex -OHo-omat, 
melO-w, melo-w, mwelo-ouat, Teic-ONo-omat, 
ppat-w, ppac-w, ppdo-omat, ppac-Oho-ouat. 
TIN-w, TiA-@, TLA-OUMAL, TiN-OAo-oMat, 
oTé\X\w, oTEN- , oTEN-00MAL, oTAN-O7o-oMat. 
paly-w, pav-o, pav-ovuat, pav-Ojo-ouat. 
inelp-w, iuep-O, iuep-o0pac, iuep-Ono-omat, 

EXERCISE. 


§ 56.—1. Form the future opt. and partic. act. of 
ypadw (suffix the proper endings [out, wv| to the fut.- 
stem [ ypayp-] = Yparp-ovpt, Yparp-av), OLK ew, purarre, Viet, 
éyOaipw, ctavpdw, TiAdw, KdurrTwo, Bpéyo, ayaTraw, avira, 
ovopato, pbeipw, Tradevw, KadUTTTO. 


2. Form the future infin. and opt. mid. of Sexo (suffix 
the proper endings [eo@at, o/unr] to the fut.-stem [diw£-] 
= diwk-eo8at, Siw€-ofunv), wovéw, mpatta, picbdw, cxevato, 
KOTTT@, TTOPEVM, THAANXW, TUTTM, TViyw, KaUVwO, TTOVdALw, 
HOAVVO, TLWTTAW, KLVEW. 


3. Form the 1 future opt. and infin. pass. of Adyo (add 
the tense-sign Onc to the present-stem [Aey-], apply the 
euphonic changes [Aey-Ono = Aey-Ono J, and suffix the proper 
endings [odunv, ec Bat] = A€y-Ono-oiunv, eyx-Ono-ec Oar), TpiBo, 
povevo, ViKaw, ayyérAXrw, Oavudlo, Tdcow, eippaivo. 


ATTIC FUTURE. 

§ 57.— The Attic Future occurs in the active and mid- 
dle voices only. It consists in dropping o in polysyllabic 
futures in -dow, -eow, and iow, and then contracting the 
vowels thus brought into contact. Futures in -iow retain 


FORMATION OF ‘THE TENSES. 61 


the «, but add the contracted endings, as if a real contrac- 
tion had taken place. ‘Thus, 


érxavvo, drive, fut. édacw, Att. €Xo,-ds,-4, etc., like tiudo. 
TENE, finish, fut. TeNerG, Att. TEAG,-€65,-€l, Miee dina. 
Kopico, carry, fut. coutow, Att. couse,-teis,-tel, 

Thus in the middle: xoptodpat, -tet, -veirat, etc.; inf. 
copteto Gar, —'The Attic Future is used only in the indic., 
infin., and partic., never -in the optative. Thus, redo, 
Tedeiv, TEA@V, but always TeAdcout. Exceptions are rare 
in the Attic dialect. 


The verbs that admit of this form are the verbs éAavva, 
TeAew, Kouilo, also Karéo, to call, and all verbs in -/€&m, whose 
characteristic is 6, very often ArBafm, to mount, the verb 
audévvypt, to clothe, and all verbs in -avvvpe. 


§ 58.— SYNOPSIS OF THE AORIST ENDINGS. 


-_. 


























Indic. Subj. Optat | 
1 Aorist act. a @ QL put 
1 Aorist mid. | apnv @ [Lae aipnv 
1 Aorist pass. | nv a einv 
nS 78 eins 
y) 0 ein 
NTOV TOV elnTov 
NTNV TOV ELNTNV 
Nev G) [LEV €(7 WEev 
NTE HTE einTe 
noav aot(#) elev 











62 : GREEK GRAMMAR. 


SYNOPSIS OF THE AORIST ENDINGS, — continued. | 














Imper. Infin. Partic. 
1 Aorist act. OV, ATW at as, aca, av 
1 Aorist mid. al, ac0w acOau GMEVOS, N, OV 
1 Aorist pass. Hvar eis, eloa, &v 


nO Gen. 
NTO évTos, etc. 
NTOV 


HTOV 


NTE 
NTOCAV 




















The 1 AoRIST act.— Suffix the proper endings to the 
fut.-stem and prefix the augment in the indicative. Thus, 
Avo, 1 aorist act. (fut.-stem Avo-) &-Avo-a. 

The 1 AonIsT mid. — Suffix the proper endings to the 
fut.-stem and prefix the augment in the indicative. Thus, 
Avo, 1 aorist mid. (fut.-stem Avo.) €-Avo-adynv. 

The 1 Aorist pass. — Add (the tense-sign) @ to the 
present-stem, suffix the proper endings, and prefix the aug- 
~ment in the indicative. Thus, Avo, 1 aorist pass. é-Av-0-nv. 
Nore. — In the 1 aorist act. and mid., liguid verbs lengthen a of the 


short stem into 7, e into ex, 7d intotv; in the 1 aorist pass., they change 
‘of monosyllabic short stems into a. 


Pres. 1 Aor. act. 1 Aor, mid. 1 Aor. pass. 
TLUd-w, é-Tluno-a, é-Tino-duny, é-T14n-0-nv. 
piré-w, é-pidno-a, é-piryno-duny, é-pi7-0-nv. 
dndd-w, é-d7\wo-a, €-5nrAWS-AUNY, €-dnAw-0-nv. 
KwAU-w, é-KwAVT-a, é-kwvo-dunr, é-Kwv-0-nv. 
TplB-w, é-T pip-a, é-rpip-duny, €é-r plp-0-nv. 
Aéy-w, é-\eE-a, é-he&-d uy, é-héx -0-nv. 
melO-o, €-1T elo -a, €-mreio-h nV, é-rrelo-0-nv. 
ppai-w, é-peag-a é-ppac-auny, é-ppdo-0-gv. 
TiNd-w, €-Tth-a., €-TUA-dunY, é-7 [h-0-nv. 
paly-w, é-pyv-a, é-pnv-duny, é-pay-0-nv. 
oTl\d-w, €-oTELN-4, é-oTELA-AULNY, é-o TAN-0-nv. 
ayyédr-w, NY YEA, HYYVEA-GENP, HY YEN-0-9V. 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 63 


EXERCISE. 


§ 59.—1. Form the 1 aorist ind., imper., and partic. act. 
of oputtw (suffix the proper endings [a, ov, as] to the fut.- 
stem [opvé-, according to § 40, NOTE], and prefix the aug- 
ment in the indicative = wpv€-a, dpvé-ov, opv&-as ), avayxala, 
oparrw, aiTéw, TEAK, EAeéw, KADaipw, oikéw, AVUTW, OpMoLea, 
AEva. | 


2. Form the 1 aorist opt., inf., and imper. mid. of apyo 
(suffix the proper endings [adunv, acbat, ar] to the fut.- 
stem [ap&-], = ap&-atunv, apE-ac0at, dpé-at), opudw, aviTo, 
KAAUTT@, TroLew, mepilw, Aakidw, TEAXM, THETA, Wnpitw, Siaré- 
youal, oT vow, UKAW, TUTTW, TTEPAVOW, TPATTW, TiAAM. 


3. Form the 1 aorist ind., infin., and part. pass. of 
kort (add the tense-sign @ to the pres.-stem complying 
with § 40, NOTE [xort + 0 = xog@-], then suffix the proper 
endings [nv, jvat, as], and prefix the augment in the 
indic., = éxdO-nv, copO-jAvat, copb-eis), Tapdcow, ayaTrdao, 
imetp@, oT Ail, TAX, KLVEw. 


§ 60.— PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, FUT.-PERFECT. 



































Indic. Subj. Optat. 
Perfect act. a w@ Out 
Perf. m/or p.' | pat pévos @ Mévos €lnv 
-Fut.-Perfect Oat ns olny 

Imper. Infin. Partic. 
Perfect act. €, ET — &vat @S, via, Os 
Perf. m. or p. | oo, c0o obat MévOS, 0, OV 
Fut.-Perfect — ecOat OMEVOS, N, OV 

















The PERFECT active. — Add (the tense-sign) « to the 
pres.-stem, suffix the proper endings, and prefix the redu- 
plication. Thus, Avo, perfect act. AéAv«-a. 


64 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Note 1.— P-and K-mute verbs do not add the tense-sign x, but simply 
aspirate the characteristic and then suffix the proper endings. — T-mute 
verbs, on the contrary, throw out the ‘l-mute and replace it by x. 


Nore 2.— Liquid verbs add the tense-sign x to the short stem (§ 53). 
They, moreover, in the perfect both active and middle or passive, change 
the stem-vowel e of monosyllabic short stems into a. 


‘The PERFECT mid. or pass. — Suffix the proper endings 
to the pres.-stem (in liquid verbs to the short stem) 
and prefix the reduplication; as, Avw, perfect mid. or 
pass. Aé-Av-par. i. 


The FUT.-PERFECT. — Suffix the proper endings to the 
future-stem and prefix the reduplication. Thus, Avo, 
future-perfect Ae-Avo-opat. 


Present. Perfect act. Perf. m. or p. Fut.-Perf. 

TLULA-O, TE-TiLNK-A, TE-Tipn-Mal, TE-TLUNT-OMAL. 
pire-w, me-birnK-a, Te-pirn-mat,  e-plAno-omat. 
dnAvd-@,  d¢-dnXA@K-a, de-OnrAw-walt, d¢e-dnAwWo-opmat. 


/ , - , ~ 4 
KWU-O, KE-KWAUK-A, KE-K@AU-[LAL, KE-KWAVO-OMAL. 
S. / 4 / 
TpiP-o, Té-TpLp-a, TE-T PLLL-[LAL, TE-Tpiy-OMal. 
/ / / / 
TAEK-O, Té-TEY-A, TwéeTrEY-Mal,  We-WAEE-omat. 
mei0-w, 1 é-TELK-A, TE-TELO-al,  ——-TTe-7T€io-Opmal. 


dpac-o, 7 é-ppak-a, Té-ppac-salt,  Te-ppdc-opmat. 


TiAA-O, Té-TLINK-A, Té-TLA-MAL, wanting. 
dép-o, dé-dapk-a, dé-Sap-pat, 

oTENA-, €-OTANK-A, é-oTAN-Mal, 

ipelp-o, iMEPK-A, i(MEp-Wat, 


§ 61. Nore. — The fut.-perfect is used almost exclusively in the middle 
voice and is of rare occurrence. It is wanting in liquid verbs and gener- 
ally also in those pure and mute verbs which have the temporal augment. 


The fut.-perfect is used in principal sentences only, and in such subor- 
dinate clauses as are introduced by the conjunctions 67: and ws (that). In 
other subordinate clauses it is supplied by the aorist subjunctive with a 
conjunction compounded of &p, as édv, drav, érecddv, etc. —In the active 
voice it is sometimes expressed by the perfect partic. act. with the future 
of eiul; as, NeduKWs Ecouat, solvero; éyrwKdres éodueOa, cognoverimus. 


_ FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 65 


§ 62. — The PLUPERFECT. Suffix ev for the active, and 
unv for the mid. or pass. to the perfect-stem and prefix the 
augment. Thus, Ave, plpf. act. (perf.-stem Ae-AvK) é-NedU«- 
ew; plpf. m. or p. (perf.-stem Ae-Av) €-AeAU-pnp. 


Exercise. 


§ 63.—1. Form the perfect infin. and part. act. of dana 
(aspirate the characteristic, suffix the proper endings 
[évat, wos] and prefix the reduplication, = de-d.wx-évar, 
de-diwy-ws), oixéw, pirtw, puTevw, cUpw, ayaTaw, ypado, 
aitém, yapaTTw, ohadrAw, o7Eipw, ywpéw, revdw, aipo, 
Tapackevalo, ayyéAXw, piclew, KadUTT@, TrOLKiAX. 


2. Form the perfect imper., infin., and part. m. or p. of 
ypadew (suffix the proper endings [ao0, Aa, pévos] to the 
present-stem, apply the euphonic changes, and prefix the 
reduplication, = ye-yparpo, ye-ypad-Oar, ye-ypap-“évos), 
Tadevo, Bpéyw, sTavpow, ante, Yevdan, opororyew, Or(Ba, 
aitéw, ywpitw, TéEAXW, TKOTTW, AVUTW, EpwTdw, TPATTO, 
Javpato. | 

Analyse and parse : 


§ 64.—1. "Hpxo, ypicoto, avvc Ons. —2. Aedadpnoat, érén- 
cov, Tap@Kico. — 3. ‘PudO&v, cipact, djnvopev. — 4. *Emipy- 
vav, erédpnvav, nEiwoas. — 5. "Hitnow, omeipw, éaotreipw. — 
6. KexevjpueOa, ctavpwOjva, medvrAako. —T. Onvacwr, 
eCntnxuav, wmricOns. —8. ‘Hupérw, eupetvw, ypicov. — 
9. “Hp, ntnoo, brropeivav. —10. ‘Omracber, adopowxa, 
néar. — 11. Acipo, veipac an, dpaot. —12. “"H&i@cbwr, 
MKELAAV, MBVOMAKOL. 


EUPHONIC CHANGES. 


§ 65. — The following are the principal euphonic changes 
which mute verbs have to undergo in the formation of the 
tenses, especially the perfect and pluperfect mid. or pass. 


1. A P-mute with o makes w, a K-mute with o makes 
&,a T-mute before o is dropped. 


P 


86 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


2. A P-mute before pw changes to p, before 7 to 7, 
before 0 to ¢. 


A K-mute before » changes to Ys, before 7 to x, 
before @ to x. 


A T-mute before « changes to o, before 7 and @ 
likewise to o. 


3. The letter o between two consonants, in both mute 
and liquid verbs, is dropped. 


4. The 3d pers. plur. of the perfect and pluperfect 
indic. mid. or pass., of both mute and liquid 
verbs, is expressed periphrasticaliy by the plural 
of the perfect participle m. or p (évot, at, a) 
with eof or Hoar, accordingly. 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 


§ 66. 


— PARADIGMS, 


67 


Exhibiting the euphonic changes and serving as models 
for the inflection of mute verbs in the perfect and plu- 
perfect mid. or pass. 











Ind. 


S. rérpe (Bu ) wuac 


Té-rTpt (Bo ) Pat 
ré-rpt (BT ) rat 


.TETpl (Bu ) umedov 


Té-Tpt (Bob) pOov 
Té-Tpt (Bo0) poor 


.TeTpl (Bu ) pueda 


Té-rTpt (Br0) pbe 
Te-Tpt (Bu ) mmévor 
elal(v 


mwé-whe (Km ) Yuae 
wé-wie (ko ) Eau 
mwé-mwhe (KT ) KTaL 
mwe-ThE (ku ) yuedov 
wé-1e (ko8) x0ov 
wé-rhe (koO) xOov 
mwe-Thé (ku ) yueda 
mwé-rhe (Ko0) x0e 
mwe-me (Ku ) Yuévou 
elal(v) 


| P-mute. | K-mute. T-mute. 
; PERFECT. 
(rplBw) (7 X\éxw) (7 elOw) 


wé-re. (Ou ) chat 
mwé-ret (00 ) oat 
mwé-ret (Or ) ora 
me-el (Ou ) cuebov 
mé-me. (000) cov 
wé-ret (000) oBov 
me-mrel (Ou ) oueba 
mé-ret (000) a6 
me-met (Ou ) suévor 
elal(v) 


























|Imp.| S.rérpe (Bo ) wo wé-whe (ko ) &0 mwé-re. (00 ) oo 
te-Tpl (Ba0) p0w mwe-mé (Ko0) xOw mwe-rel (000) c0w 
.Té-Tpt (Ba) dOov mwé-1e (ko) x Pov mwé-met (000) cov 
te-Tpl (Bo) POwv mwe-Thé (ko?) xOwv me-mel (000) cOwv 
.Té-Tpt (BoO) Pbe wé-rhe (koO) xGe mwé-ret (000) ofe 
te-Tpl (Ba0) POwoav | we-rhé (koO) XOwoay | we-rel (000) cOwoar 
(or te-Tpl-pbwy) (or mwe-rdé-x Ow (or we-mel-cOwv) 
Inf. Te-Tpt (Bod) pat me-Whé (KO) xOau mwe-et (000) c0at 
Prt; Te-Tpt (Bu ) muévos | meme (ku ) yuévos | me-ree (Ou ) opévos 
PLUPERFECT. 
Ind.| 8. é-re-rpl (Bu ) wunv | éare-md€ (ku ) yunv | éme-wel (Ou ) oun 








é-ré-rpt (Bo ) Yo 
é-ré-rpt (Br ) mro 


.érerpl (Bu ) uucdov 


é-ré-rpt (Ba) pOov 
é-re-Tpl (Bo0) pOnv 


.ére-Tpl (Bu ) ppeda 


é-ré-rTpt (BoO) poe . 


Te-Tpt (Bu ) puévot 
qoav 





é-ré-mhe (ko ) £0 
é-ré-he (kr ) KTO 
é-re-Thé (ku ) yuebov 
é-ré-re (koO) xOov 
é-re-whé (koO) xOnv 
é-re-whé (Ku ) ymeba 
é-ré-rhe (Ko0) x0e 
mwe-Té (KK ) Yuevoe 
hRoav 





é-ré-re. (00 ) oo 
é-ré-re. (Or ) oro 
é-rre-rel (Ou ) cpueov 
é-ré-me. (000) obov 
é-re-rel (000) cOnv 
é-rre-rel (Ou ) oueba 
é-mé-met (000) be 
we-me. (Ou ) cmévor 
oav 





Nortr. — Liquid verbs in -alywand -vvw, in the perfect and pluperfect mid. 


or pass. generally change v before uw into oc. 


S. ré-pac-mwar 


ré-pav-oat 
w €-Pav-T at 


D., re-pdo-pebov 
aw é-pav-Oov 
wé-pav-Oov 


Thus ¢alvw (short stem dar-), 
P. re-pdo-peba 
1 é-payv-Oe 
me-pac-pévo. eicl(v). 


Thus Aupalyw, Mepalyw, mepalyw, mialyw, palvw, onuatye, vpalver, novva, 
éfvvw, raxvvw. — But some change vinto uw; as, Enpalvw, aicxvvw, rapokivw, 
etc. (pert. m. or p.), €Ejpaumar, eEjpavoa, etc. % — Tpaxvyw, make rough, 
has -vyar, -uupar, and -vouar. 

Norr. —In the perfect and pluperf. m. or p., liquid verbs drop the ¢ 
in all the endings beginning with o@ (§ 65, 8); hence dédap-Gov, imper. 
dedap-Ow, infin. deddp-Oar, for 5édap-cOor, etc. 


F 2 





GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 67. — Synopsis 


OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE VERBS vo, TpiBo. 
dioxw, Tel\Owm, AND orédAXo. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 













































































Indicative.| Subjune. | Optative. | Imper. | Infinitive. | Participle. 
Pres. vw vw Avo doe Ave Avwy 
Imp. é-vov 7 
Fut. iow AVootme Avoewv NVewy 
1 Aor.| &-dvoa vow Vora door NSoat AUvoas 
Perf. | Aé-AvKa Ne-AUKW | A/Ee-AVKOLWL | Aé-AUKE | A/e-AUKEVaL | AE-AUKWS 
Pipf. | éX\edKewv 
Pres. TplBw TplBw TplBowwe | rpiBe TplBeuw TplBwy 
Imp. é-T piBov 
Fut. Tplyw T plop rplvew Tplywv 
1 Aor.| @-rpiwa Tplyw Tplwaue| rpivov Tpiwat tplwas 
Perf. | ré-rpipa | re-rplpw | re-rplpoum |ré-rpide | tre-rpipévar | Te-Tpipas 
Pipf. | érerplpey 
Pres. duwKw d1wKw OcwKoipe SlwKe SudKewy iwKwy 
Imp. é-dlwkov 
Fut. | d.wEw inciaene OrwEorput Order dcwEwy 
1 Aor.| é-dlwkéa duwEw OuwEaruu Slwtov di.@Eat diuwtas 
Pert. | de-dlwxa | de-didyw} de-decryorp |Se-Slwye | de-duwyévai| de-diwx ws 
Pipf. | é5edidyecv 
Pres. mel mwelOw melOoiue mele awelbeuv melOup 
Imp. é-evov 
Fut. melow meloouue qeloev WEelo wy 
1 Aor.| @-rewa welow mweloayu|  melcov TELO OL meloas 
Perf. | wé-reixa | e-melxw | we-melxou |wé-weixe | me-meikévar | WE-TELKWS 
Plpf. | éwemelxecv 
Pres. oTéX\Kw oTé\X\w| oréd\rXNoywt| oréd\dX\e}| oTédreLv oT éXNwy 
Imp. | &-ored ov 
Fut. oTEND oTENOCUL oTeNEty oTENOY 
1 Aor. | €-crevha oTelhy orelhayu | oretdov| oretrar oreidas 
Perf. |é@-cradkxa | é-orddKxw| é-oTddKowm |@-oradke | é-oradkévar | €-cTadkw3 
Pipf. | é-orddkecv 








FORMATION 


MIDDLE VOICE, 


OF THE TENSES. 


69 










































































Indicative. | Subjunct. | Optative. Imper. | Infinitive. | Participle. 
Pres. AVvomat hUwpae Avoluny Avou Aver au Audpevos 
Imp. é-hudunv : 
Fut. Avoomat Avoolunv Avocet ar Avo dbuevos 
1 Aor. | €Avoaunv| AVowpac Avoalunv NOoae AUcacOar| RAvodmevos 
Perf. | Aé-Avuac NeAupévos w | Ne-AupEvos Aé-Avgo | Ne-AVoOar | Ae-Auevos 
Pipf. | &\edvunv elny 
F.-Pf. | Ne-Avoomac —— Ae-Avoolunv| — _ | Ae-A¥oeoOar | Ae-AvodpeEvos 
Pres. TplBopat TplBwyat TptBoluny TplBou TplBecOar| TpiBduevos 
Imp. | €rpiBdunv 
Fut. Tplyomar Tpivolunv TtplpecOar| rpupdmuevos 
1 Aor. | é-rpwdunr| rtplpwuar| rpualunv Tptwas tplyacOa| Tpivdpevos 
Perf. |ré-rpimpat | re-Tpiupévos|re-rpiupévos | ré-rpuvo |re-rpipOa \re-rTpiwpévos 
Pipf. | érerpiupny w env 
I.-Pf. | re-rplvoua oo Te-Tpupolwev ——  |re-rplperOat |re-Tpupdpuevos 
Pres. dcwKomae OLwKwuat OuwKdunv d.wKou diuwKerPar| dSiwKxduevos 
Imp. é-Siwkdunv . 
Fut. duwEouat —— diwtolunv diwkerBar| Siwkduevos 
1 Aor. | €-dtwEdunr diwEwuat dwwialunv| di@éac OuweéacAat| SiwwE&dmevos 
Perf. | de-dlwymae | de-Suwyuévos| de-diwyuévos| de-Slwko | de-didx Oar |de-Suwypévos 
Pipf. | édedtayunv w elnv 
F.-Pf. | de-dimE0uar —— de-diwkolunv| — _ | de-diwkecOar| SeduwEduevos 

4 

Pres. wel#ouat melOapwat meoluny melOou melbec Oat mecOduevos 
Imp. é-mevbunv ; 
Fut. meloomat mewooluny melcecOar|  meioduevos 
1 Aor. | é-rewodunv welowpat meioalunv Teo at twelcac@at| meicdmevos 
Pert. | ré-rewcpar | we-revouévos|re-meiouévos | wé-reioo |re-wetoOar |rre-meioévos 
Plpf. | érerelounv w elnv | 
F.-Pf. | we-relocopac a mwe-reicolunv| — _ |me-melceoOat|re-reioduevos 
Pres. oTéd\Xomar | oréA\wwar| oTreddolunv| .otédAdov | oréAdecOar!| oTEAdOuEVOS 
Imp. | é-creNbunv 
Fut. oTEeAOUMAL oTedoluny orTedeto bar | sTedovmeEvos 
1 Aor. | é-orei\dunv| oreihwpar| oreralunv| oretrdac | oreldacOat| orecddpevos 
Perf. |@-cradwar | é-craduévos |é-craduévos |é-cradco |é-crdd\Oac |é-cTradpévos 
Plpf. | é-orddpnv @ einv 
F.-Pf. wanting. wanting. 








70 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 



































PASSIVE VOICE. 

The Present, Imperfect, Perfect, and Pluperfect the same as in the Middle 

Voice. 
\ 
Indicative. , Subj. Optative. | Imper. | Infinitive. Participle. 

1 Fut. | Avdjocouac AvOncoluny AvOncETAar | AVOnodpueEvos 
1 Aor. |é-\vOnv AvOS =| AvOelnv AVOnTL | AVOFvaL dvOels 
1 Fut. | rpipPjoopar TpipOnoolunvy | —— | TpihOjoecOa| TpipOnodpevos 
1 Aor. |é-rplpénv TpLpOd | rpipOelnv TplpOnri| TpipOAvar -| TpipOels — 
1 Fut. | dwwyAjoouar| —— | dwwxOnoolunv| — | dwwxOhoec0at| Siwy Oynodpevos 
1 Aor. |é-d.Hx Onv Siw ID | duwy Oeinv Siwy OnrTt| duwxX OH vac diwx Oels 
1 Fut. | reiw@joouae meio Onoolunv wes Once Oat| reco Onodbuevos 
1 Aor. |é-relcOnv wei O® | reo belnv mwelcOnr.| mec Ojvar mea Oels 
1 Fut. | crad@joouar oTadOnoolunv oTahOnoes Oat|oTadOnobuevos 
1 Aor. |é-oradOny oTAANOD | cTadOelny | oTaNOnTigTANOHvat aTandels 
































§ 68. — A TABLE 


Exhibiting the various tense-endings and the euphonic changes 
of mute verbs, in the indicative of the principal tenses, both 
active and middle or passive. 



































Classes. | Fut. a. | Perf.a.| 1Fut.p. |1Aor.p. | Perf. m. or p. 
> - | -wac *Imp. Inf. 
2 : -7w -Ka -Ohoouat -Onv -cat  -o0 
& are) | ' -Tat -00w =-o Oat 
- -1TW 
£ -Bw Bait 
= -yw -pa -pOjcouat | -pOnv -var -wWo 
Rice ” 0 
a aati -TTAaL -P0w -plat 
= -Ew -xa -xOjcopar | -xOnv -Eae -f0 
S oe “Kral -x0w -xOau 
> -TW 
S -dw | “TMOL 
= -ow -Ka -cOhjcouar | -cOnv -TaL -G0 , 
at | ee : j . 
0 ~tw | ora. -c0w -cbat 
> -w : 
42) - La oS ~[at 
'B -0 -Ka -Ojnoouat -Onv -cal -d0 
= -vw 
5 ag -TAL -Ow -Bat 











FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 71 


NOTES ON THE FORMATION OF THE ‘TENSES. 


(Pure Verbs.) 


-§ 69.—1. Verbs in -ao, with e,, or p before a, lengthen 
in the future, etc., the @ into a; as, é&w, permit, éadca, 
élaca, elaka, elapat, ecaOnv, etc. — Thus, éortiaw, entertain ; 
dpdw, do; dwpaw, detect, etc., and also axpodopat, hear 
(fut. axpodcopat, aor. nKpoacapuny). : 

But ypdopuat, use; titpaw, bore, and those in -aw with o 
or uv before a (as Boaw, shout; éyyvaw, pledge, etc.), have 
n. Thus, ypynooua, tenow, Bojnoomat. 


2. The following verbs in -é# take in some tenses ¢, in 
others 7: 


atvéw (Att. émrawéw), praise, ut nunwat; in all the 
| other tenses e. 


atpéw, take, npé@nv (also npnOnv) and aipeOjcopat s 
the rest with 7. 


déa, bind, dnow, édnoa, édnodunv, dednoopat ; the res* 
with e. 


mwoOéw, desire, -now, -noa (also wo8écoua, érdbeca), 
meTroOnka, TeTdOnmat, but always émoécOnp. 

wovéw, work, -now, -noa (but -éow, -eoa, in the sense 
of to suffer pain); pf. memevnka, in both senses. 
The mid. and pass. have 7 throughout. 


3. The following: verbs | take the diphthong av or e, 
respectively: 


kato, burn, f. cavow, 1 aor. éeavoa (trans.), 2 aor. 
éxanv (intrans. ). 


KrNatw, weep, f. KrAavoouat, or Dor, -odpat, éxdavaa, 
etc. 


12 


Oéw, run, {. Oevcopat or -ovpat. 


(§ 95). 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


véw, swim, f. vevoomat or -ovpat, évevoa, vérevKa. 


The rest from tpéyo 


mréo, sail, f. rrevcomat or -ovpatl, ENEVOA, TémTAEVCA; 
aor. p. émAevoOnv. 


péo, flow, f. pevoopuat éppevoa (see § 95). 


. 4. The following insert o in the perfect and pluperfect 


mid. or pass., in the 1 aor. and 1 future pass. 


Those with 


@ or € in parenthesis retain that vowel throughout in the 


formation of the tenses: 


and 


yerdw (a), laugh. 
O\dw (a), bruise. 
kr\dw (a), break. 
omdw (a), draw. 


xardw (a), loosen. 


axéouat (€), heal. 


ddéw (e), grind, Att. red. 


dpkéw (€), suffice. 


éuew (€), vomit, Att. red. 
féw (e), boil (intrans. ) 


féw (€), scrape. 


Teréw (e€), finish. 
aviw, complete. 


dptw, draw water. 


é0w, scrape. 
wTvw, spit. 
vw, rain. 
aKxovw, hear. 
évatw, kindle. 


kedevw, command. 


kvalw, scratch. 
kuAlw, roll. 


Aevw, stone. 
walw, strike. 
wadalw, wrestle. 
wréw (ev), Sail. 
mplw, saw. 
mratw, stumble. - 
celw, shake. 


x6w (w), heap up. 


xpaw, prophesy. 
xplw, anoint. 
patvw, touch. 


The following vary between the Cater formation 


that with o: 


Spa, do, dédpayat and REI. aor. édpacOnv. 


Opava, 
Opavpac). 


break, 


/ 
TéO pave pat, 


eOpavaOnv (Plat. 


Kralo, weep, Kéxravmat, later KékNavo par. 


4 
TE- 


Krelow, shut, Kécreywar and -cpat, éxreicOnv, KreLo- 


Onoopat. 


KONOVM, maim, KekoOAOUMaL and -cpuat, éxorAOvVOny and 


-c nv. 


«povw, strike upon, Kéxpovpat, rarely -cwat, aor. 


bd] 7 
éxpovaOnv. 


OS a a a a 


FTO RCN tutieriye hes 


SATA A 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 73 


véw, heap up, vévnwat (-cuat doubtful), évycAnv. 
Wdaw, rub, Arnwa and -cpas, éyrnOnv and -o€np. — Att. 
—nrypat, x Onv. 


Le” pupvioxw, remind; xpdouct, use, and ratw, stop, have uéurnuar, 
texpnuat, wémavuac; but éuvicOnv, expjacdny, éravcdnv, and éravdnv. 


6. The following verbs in -jo lengthen the characteristic 
m the future and aorist act. and mid., but retain the short 
stem vowel (v) in the remaining tenses (dv, etc., which 
has dédvca) 


dv-w, puton, f. diow aor. Zdtca pf. dé5vxa Séd5vuae aor. p. edv0nv 


03-w, saerifice, biow é6ioa Tébka = TéOvuat érvdnv 
uv-w, luosen, iow éXtoa AéAGKA AAT éXUOnv 


(Mute Verbs.) 


§ 70.—1. The verbs éyo, have, and tpéyo, run, resume 
in the future the original aspirate of the first syllable; as. 


exo, fut. &w; tpéyw, fut. SpdéEouar. 


The two verbs Oar, bury, and Opimrw, bruise, retaim 
the initial @ in all the tenses except the perfect active and 
the second aorist; as, Adio, réOaupmas, reOadOar, adOny, 
Oapbets, OabOncopar, —Opibo, téOpuppat, teFptdOar, etc. ; 
but réraga, éradny, radjvat, érpidny. 

Thus tpépa, nourish, and tude, smoke: Opérw, réOpappar, 
€OpéhOnv, OpedOjvat, OpepOjoopat,— Gino, Cura, TéOvupat ; 
but 2 pf. rétpoda, érvdnv. 


2. The following change in the perfect act. the stem- 
vowel e€ into o: 


k\értw, steal. pf. act. céxdoga, but pf. pass. céxAepwpuac. 
Aéyw, collect, ‘6 auvelKoxa, 4s ouvelNeypuat. 
néurw, send, ‘6 owérouoa, ‘ wT ENA. 


rpémw, Urn, ‘6 —- rérpopa (like 2 pf. of rpépw, to nourish). 


14 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


The verb Aéyo, in the sense of to say, has no perfect act., 
but in the perf. pass. it takes the regular reduplicaticn. 
NeAeywat, — Stareyouat, to converse, has dveiAeypat. 


3. The following change in the perfect mid. or pass. the 
stem-vowel e into a: 


oTpépw, turn, pf. m. or p. éorpaypar, but aor. p. éorpépOnv. 
Tpérw, turn, ‘i TET PALA, “ ET pépOnv. 
Tpépw, nourish, x TéOpappat, * EO pe pOny. 


4. The 3d pers. plur. or the perfect and pluperfect mid. 
or pass. of mute and liquid verbs, instead of being expressed 
periphrastically by the perfect partic. with eto/ (jjoav), ends 
sometimes in -@rat (-ato). ‘The characteristic of ‘T-mute 
verbs, in this case, sce nips unchanged. Thus, 


rplBw, rub, 3d et pl. rerpig-drat, Eetone of rérpif-vrat, 
wrékw, twine, wet éxX-aT aL, om ém NEK-VT AL, 
xwpliw (5), sever, — - Kex wpld-adrat, de kex wp.d-vr au. 
pbelpw, destroy, EpOdp-drat, ee EpOap-vrar. 


5. When a P-mute characteristic is preceded by pu (as 
in wepro, send; caumro, bend), or a K-mute characteristic 
by y (as in adiyya, tie; éEerxéyyo, convince), both the uw 
and y are dropped in the perfect mid. or pass. before the 
endings beginning with w. Thus, 


wémepyuat (for mémreup-par) eoguy-wat (for Zo pvyy-uac) 


mwémepyar éoguyéat 
TWETELTT AL €o puyKTar 
meméu-we0ov (for wemépu-ue0ov) éoply-ueov (for dea) icieg etc.) 


6. Of the following verbs, those in -cow (Att. -rTw) 
make the future in -cw; those in -@ (which for the most 
part denote a call or sound) have, on the contrary, a K-mute 
for their true characteristic : 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 75 


tppotrw, fit. . épésow, row. Trdoow, form. 
Bpdoow, shake. Taoow, scatter. aticow, peel. 

aidgw, groan. oluwew, lament. oTnpliw, fix. 

ddahdvw, shout. dd\oAViw, shout. otifw, brand. 

ypvvw, grunt. péegw (poet.), do. oupifw, whistle. 

Kolfw, squeak. puotagw, drag. opatvw (Att. rr), Kill. 
Kpacw, Cry. oTtafw, trickle. opviw, throb. 

Kpwcw, croak. aTahd¢w, drop. _Tpl{w, chirp (rérpiya). 
pactliw, whip. orevaww, sigh. prvgw, bubble. 


‘Aprace, rob, has Att. fut. apmwdacomat, aor. nptraca, ete., 
but in common language, -a&m and -aow; 2d aorist pass. 
npraynv.— Baotalw, support, fut. -dow, aor. p. -dyOnv. — 
Nvotago, nod, fut. -dow, aor. -aca, etc.; later -a&w, etc.—— 
llaiGw, sport, fut. mavEovpat and tratEouae ; aor. Att. évraica, 
pi. Att. wémratopae (later éracEa, wéema:ya, -ypat, -yOnv). 

Krafm, sound, has Kcrady&o, &xrayéa, KexXNayya. — Lar- 
wivw, blow the trumpet, has -y&w, and later -to. 


(Liquid Verbs.) 


§ 71.—1. In the future optative of liquid verbs, the 
Attic endings ony, oins, ofp, etc., are used along with the 
regular forms ott, ots, of, etc. (See § 79, 1.) 


2. In the 1 aorist act. and mid., the following verbs in 
-aive do not change the stem-vowel a into n, but inte a: 
(1) all verbs in -paive and -taiva, as Tepaiva, finish ; riaive, 
fatten, aor. érépava, ériava (exc. Tetpaiva, bore, and paiva, 
stain, which take n; rarely wrdvar); — (2) the verbs 


isxvatvw, make lean. _xothalvw, hollow. épyalvw, enrage. 
kepoalvw, gain. Aevkalyw, whiten. weralyw, ripen. 


Kadaipw, purify, and onuaivo, give a signal, have both 
y and a. — Aipo, raise, and &dXopat, leap, have jpa, jrAapnv 
(temporal augm.), but inf. doa, dhacOa, etc. 


76 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


8. The following verbs drop v in the perfect and plu- 
perfect act. and pass. and 1 aorist pass.; as, 


kplyw, judge, kéxpika, Kéxptuat, éxplOnv. 
kAlyw, bend, KéxNika, KékNipat, ExNtOnv. 
wrvvw, wash, a én dvKa, ow ém NUMA, ém NUOnp. 
telvw, stretch, Téraka, _ TETA MAL, éraOny. 
ktelvw, kill, éxTaka, €xTG Mat, éxradnv. 


Nore. — Kplvw, xX\lvw, and mAvvw often retain the v in the 1 aorist pass. 
in poetry: in prose, katexAlvOn Occurs in Xenophon. 

Of xrelfvw, the forms éxrayxa and éxrdvOnv also occur. The Attics, 
instead of éxrdxa, generally use éxrova; and instead of €xrauar and 
éxrdéonv, they use 7é0vynxa and dréGavoy with b7é and the genitive, 


4. Perfects in -yea from verbs in -vw (as pemiayta, 
mepuyKa, Tapwtvyca, etc.) occur only in later writers. 
The best writers either drop the », as in xpiva, criva, etc.. 
or use the 2d perfect in the sense of the first, as é«rova for 
éxtaxa, —or form the perfect from another stem, as péva, 
remain, pf. weuevnea (stem MENE-); véuo, divide, pf. 
vevéunca (stem NEME-), — or choose another verb. 


5. The following verbs, in the perfect, pluperfect, 1 aorist 
and 1 future pass., transpose the vowel and the consonant 
following of the short stem, and then lengthen the final 
vowel, suffixing the endings xa, wat, Onv, respectively. 


BadXAw, throw,  (Bad-, Bra-) Bé-Bdy-K-a  Bé-BAyn-uar é-BAH-O-nv 














déuw, build, (deu-, due-) 5é-Sun-k-a =: 6 €-yun-rar 

kdpvw, toil, (kap-, Kua-) Ké-KULN-K-a 

oKé\dw, dry, (oKked-, oKNE-) = &-0KAN-K-a oKAHocomaL 
Téuvw, cut, (reu-, TUE-) Té-Tun-K-a «= TE-Tpy-pae =s-_- E- TL}'-O-Nv 


6. The 1 aorist pass. of liquid verbs but rarely occurs , 
in many verbs it is not used at all. The 2 aorist pass. is 
more common. 

As the 1 aorist pass., so are also the 2 aorist act. and 
mid. of liquid verbs of rare occurrence, especially in 
prose, 


FORMATION OF THE TresEs. 17 


FORMATION OF THE SECOND TENSES. 


§ 72. — The Greek language has two forms for the aorist. 
act., mid., and pass., two for the future pass., and two for 
the perfect and pluperfect active. These forms are known 
under the name of first and second tenses. 

The second tenses, therefore, are : 


The 2d. AORIST act., mid., and pass., 
The 2d FUTURE pass., 
The 2d PERFECT and PLUPERFECT act. 


Pure verbs, with very few exceptions (such as éxany, 
eppinv, épiny, dédna, from Kaiw, péw, dvw, daiw), form only 
the first tenses. — Mute and liquid verbs may form both 
the first and second tenses. 


_ § 13. — The second tenses are all formed on the short 
stem. The short stem is obtained, in liquid verbs, by 
dropping the second letter in a, a, AA, and wy (§ 53); in 
mute verbs, by changing e of the verb-stem into 4, ev into 
v, n into a, rr into 7, oo(TT) into y, and € into 6. Thus, 


Verb-st. | Xex7- | hevy- | tyK- | Kom7- | Taco-| dpat- 
Short-st. | Avz- | guy- | Tak- | KoTr- | Tay- | ppac- 





























II AORIST. 
Indic. Subj. Optat. 
2 Aorist act. op @  Olpal 
2 Aorist mid. ounv Wal ofunv 
2 Aorist pass. nv @ einv 








78 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


II AORIST, — continued. 





























Imper. Infin. Partic. 
2 Aorist act. €, éTw ely | @V, ovaa, OV 
2 Aorist mid. | 0d, éo6@ éo Bat dMEVOS, N, OV 
2 Aorist pass. nO, nT@ vat eis. eloa, &V 








§ 74.— If AORIST act., mid., and pass. — Suffix the 
proper endings to the short stem, and prefix the augment 
in the indicative. 


The endings of the 2 aorist act. «<e the same as those 
of the imperfect act. 

The endings of the 2 aor. mid. ave the same as those of 
the imperfect mid. 

The endings of the 2 aor. pass. are the same as those of 
the 1 aorist pass. 


Note 1.— The stem-vowel e of monosyllabic short stems is changed 
into a in all second aorists, except those of the verbs BAérw, Aéyw, Aérw, 
préyw, and wéyw, which retain the e. 











Present. Short stem. Aor. act. 2 Aor. mid. 2 Aor. pass. 
Aelr-w, (ur-) é-u7r-ov, é-humr-bunv, é-\lar-nv, 

T pém-w, ( rper-) €-Tpam-ov, é-Tpam-duny, €-Tpamr-nv, 
oT éXd-w, (ored-) é-oTdN-V. 
éyelp-w, (évep-) oo Hyep-buny, 


Nore 2. — Verbs whose 2 aorist act. or mid. would not differ from the 
imperfect have no 2 aorist act. or mid.; but they may have the 2 aorist 
pass., because this tense has endings different from those of the imperfect 
passive. Thus the verbs PAérw, see; dAéyw, say, collect; érw, peel ; 
préyw, burn; péyw, blame; ypadw, write; rpiBw, rub; Kr\lyw, bend; 
cvpw, draw, etc., want the 2 aorist both act. and mid.; but they have 
the 2 aorist pass.: éBdémrnv, édéynv, éypadyy, éxtpny, etc. 


Notr 3.— Two verbs change the characteristic ma into B; six, into ¢. 
These verbs are: 
Br\drrw, injure, 2 aor. p. €BAdBnv | Opirrw, enfeeble, 2 er. p. érpupny 
Kpurtw, conceal, ‘+ éxpuBnvy | pdmrrw, sew, éppadny 
Barrw, tinge, o éBadnv plrtw, throw. sy épplony 
Gdrrw, bury, ‘ rdgpny oKkanTw, dig, nf 4oKdgn 


fORMATION OF THE TENSES. 79 


Note 4. — Téurw, cut, has usu. 2 aorist act. @revov (more rarely érapov). 
— Zpixw, burn slowly, and pixw, cool, dry, have éouiynv and éyuynrv. — 
IiAjoow, strike, has érAnynv, but in composition -erddynv, as éerddyny, 
katewAadynv. — Iikdkw, twine, has érddkxnv and érdéxnv. — Tpwyw, chew, 
eat, has @rpayov. 


II FUTURE pass. 





Indic. |Subj.| Optat.| Imper. | Infin. Partic. 





2 Future pass.| owas | — |odunv| — _ | ea@a | dpevos, n, ov 





























§ 75. —11 Future pass. — Add (the tense-sign) yo- to 
the short stem and suffix the proper endings. 


Nore. — The e of monosyllabic short stems is changed into a, as in the 
2d aorist. The endings are the same as those of the 1 future passive. 
TplB-w  (rpiB-)  TpiB-7o-opar oUpw- (cvup-) gup-ho-omar 
KkémtT-w  (Kkomw-)  Kkom-Ho-ouat gpadr-w (opay-) cPpad-jo-ouat 
mréx-w  (aex-) mAak-Ho-opat paly-w (pav-) Pav-o-omat 
TaTT-W (TaYy-) Tay-ho-opat oTéX\\-w = (oTedX-) oTad-ho-omat 


II PERFECT act. 





Indic. |Subj.| Optat.| Imper. | Infin. Partic. | 


























2 Perfect act. | a w | out |e, érwm| vat | ws, via, os | 





§ 76. — 1 PERFECT act. — Suffix the perfect endings to 
the short stem, prefix the reduplication, and change, 
moreover, 


the stem-vowel «¢ into o, 


+ a into 7 (after p into a), 

Ge t (from ec) into ot. | 
Tpép-w (Tped-) Té-T pop-a 5ép-w (dep-) 5é-dop-a 
THK-w (TaK-) Té-TNK-O pbelp-w (p0ep-) é-p0op-a 
wpatT-w  (mpdy-) wé-mrpay-a | Oddd-w (Oa)-) ré-Onv-a 
Nelar-w (Atrr-) hé-Nourr-a gpatv-w (pav-) 1é-pnv-a 


Norr 1.— The ev of the present remains in the 2 perfect unchanged ; 
as, pevy-w (pvy-), flee, 2 pf. wépevya (not ré-gpuy-a).— Kpdfw, shout, has 
2 aor. Exparyov, 2 pf. xéxpaya (with pres. signification, ‘‘I cry ’’). 


Norz 2.— The following transitive verbs acquire in the 2 perfect an 
intransitive meaning ; 


BO : GREEK GRAMMAR. 


mwelOw, persuade, 1 perf. rérexa, 2 perf. réroa, I trust. 


mpattw, do, wémpaxa, mwérpaya, I fare well. 
dvolyw, open, avéwyxa, avéyya, I stand open. 
éyelpw, wake, . ey nyepka, éy7yopa, I am awake. 
ojmw, make rotten, —_— céonnra, Iam rotten. 


THKw, melt, Térnka, Tam melted. 
dyvum, break, éaya, Tam broken. 
palyw, show, (wépayka) wépnva, I appear. 





Nore 38.— The 2 pLurerrect changes final a of the 2 perfect into ew 
and prefixes the augment; as, 2 pf. «écor-a (from xémr-w), 2 plpf. 
€-Ke-KO7-€LD, 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


§ 77. — Pure verbs in -do, -éw, and -dw are contracted in 
the present and imperfect act., mid., and pass. — The re- 
maining tenses are all formed regularly like those of Ave. 


Verbs in -d# contract a with o, w, and ov into o, with 
e and y into a, and subscribe ¢ where it occurs. 


Verbs in -ém contract e€ into e, eo into ov, and e with a 
long vowel or diphthong into ena same long vowel or 
diphthong.- : 


Verbs in -dw contract o with a long vowel into », with 
a short vowel and ov into ‘ov, in all other combinations 
into of. Accordingly, 








PRES. ind.. . IMPERF. PRES. subj. 
dw becomes & €oV becomes ovy bw becomes @ 
deus qs €€s els dns ots 
det @ €€ El én ot 
deTov a&rov éerov etrov | dnTov @Tov 
deTov a&rov eérnv eirnv | dnTov @Tov 
dome G@ev éouev ovpmev | dwyuev Quev 
dere are €eTE e€(Te énTe Ore 
dova.(v) @ot(v) | €or ouy bwou(v) Gou(v)} 


ga The infinitive -de.v, though in some modern editions of the classics 
written with « subscript (¢v), ought to be dav, as if contracted from -aev, 
The infinitive -dev is contracted into ody (from oer). 


6 > 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


Like tipdw, dirdw, dnrdo, inflect : 


ayardw, love. 
drardw, deceive. 
dr-avrdw, meet. 
Bpovgdw, thunder. 
épwrdw, ask. 
ko\up Baw, swim. 
KuBepvaw, govern. 
vikdw, conquer. 
érrdaw, roast. 
dpudw, rush. 
wnddw, leap. 
ovyaw, be silent. 
cwmrdw, be silent. 
cvAdw, plunder. 


TedeuTaw, end, die. 


To\uaw, dare. 
guodw, blow. 
G 


alréw, ask. 


aKkodovbéw, follow. 
admev\éw, threaten. 


doKkéw, exercise. 
Bonbéw, help. 
fnréw, seek. 
kivéw, MOVE. 
koopuéw, adorn. 
Kparéw, prevail. 
Aaréw, babble. 
pucéw, hate. 
voéw, think. 


Ouidéw, CONVETSE. ° 


mow, do. 
mwréw, sell. 
oKoTréw, consider. 
poBéw, frighten. 


dit6w, deem worthy. 


5orédw, deceive. 
dovrAdw, enslave. 


éXevOepdw, set free. 


fnr\bw, emulate. 
npidw, punish. 
kavow, innovate. 
kevow, empty. 
pacriydw, whip. 
duowdw, assimilate. 
wrnpdw, fill. 
oravpbw, crucify. 
oTepavow, Crown. 
orpeBddw, torture. 
tateivow, humble. 
xnpow, bereave. 
xpvobw, gild. 


81 


82. 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 78. — PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 


a 



























































VERBS IN -AQ. VERBS 
(Active. ) (M. or P.) » (Active. ) 
S. tTip-dw @ TLU-domar Guat pid-éw . @ 
Tip-dets as TUU-ay @ pud-ders evs 
© T lp- hee g TLU-GET AL arat pudréet ‘et 
2D. Tiu-aduefov wueloy 1 
$s Tiu-GdeTOV GToy Tiu-decbov Gabor pur-€eTov €tTov 
as} Ti-GeTOV GToV Tiu-desBov Gdabov pik-ferov eirov 
| P. Tiu-dowevy Gmuev Tiu-adueda = Wea pid-coev over 
TLU-AETE are Tip-deo Oe adobe pir-tere etre | 
Tiu-dovai(v) @ou(v) Tim-hovTat  GvyTa- pir-€ovot(v) ovor(v) 
S. Tiu-dw @ ) . Thp-dwpar Quac |) . | prdr-éw é 
; Tiu-&ys as = tuy-dy @ = | pid-égs ns 
= TLu-aY @ . | 8 Teu-dynra ara = | pud-én ) 
8 | D. S Tiyt-awpeOov § wyuelov |S 4 
= Tiu-dntov Grov ‘' rip-dnoOov aabov |= | didr-énrov Hrov 
= ® a ov 
fo, Ti-anTov Grov — Tiu-dnobov aabov A pir-énTov ov 
2 P. tTiy-dwuev = Gev ° Tip-wueba wpeba | 4 | Pird-Ewmev ev 
: TLpU-ANTE are 4 Ttu-anao Be aoe a pir-énre TE 
ot Tyw-dwoi(v) @or(v) J re-dwvrat = @vrae | pir-éwor(y) wor(r) 
fn S. rip-douu (St Ti-aoluny @unv Gik-€ois = ott 
a Tip-cous @s TLu-GoLo @o ph-éors ots 
ra ack TLp-ador @ Tlp-hoOLTo @To pih-Eor oc 
=D. Tiu-aoluebov guedov 4 
3 Ti-do.trovy Tov Ti-do.wbov wabor pir-€o.Tov “otrov 
2 Tiu-aoltny § @Tny Tiu-aoloOnv gaobnr gir-coirny birnv 
©} P. ru-dowmer @pev Tiu-aolueba = wea pir-éoimev Bipev | 
Ti-LOLTe QTE Tiu-dowwbe wale pir-éorre ire | 
Tiu-Lovev (ev T lu-hOLVTO @VvTO pir-€orev Vier 4 
S. tlu-ae @ T lp-dovu @ pik-ec EL 
Ttp-aeéTw dc0w Tip-aéo Ow dow pir-e€T w irw | 
= D. riu-derov = Grov Tiu-deoOov Gabor pir-éerov (TOV 
= Ti-aeTwWY aTwWDV Tip-decOwy doOwv pir-e€Twv  eltwr 
| P. riu-dere are Tip-dheo Oe aabe pir-€eTe cr 
TliU-aETWOAY GTWOAY Tiy-atcOwoav dobwoav | did-eéTwoar or tise 4 
iE Tip-dey qv Tiu-dec0ar =aobat pir-éevy ety 
S Tiy-dwy = Tiu-abmEevos  WLeEVOS pir-éwy @y 
oo Tiu-dovoa Wwoa TiU-AouMevyn WEeVY did-éovga otcoa 
e TLu-Gov Ov TLU-AdMEVOY  wueVvoY pir-éov ouv 
Py Tiu-dovTos Wvros, etc. Tip-aouévov wyyévov, etc.| pid-éovros odvros, etc, 
IMPERFECT. | 
S. é-riu-aov wy —ériyp-aduny §aunv é-pid-eov our 
é-Tlu-aes as 8-7 ip-dov @ é-pid-ees ets 
€-Ti-ae a é-Tiu-deTO  fiTO €-plh-e€ El 
D. é-Ti-aduedov gueBov 
€-Tip-deTov Grov €-Tiu-decOov acbov é-pir-éerov efrov 
é-Tiu-aér nv aTyv é-ri-aéoOnv aoOnv é-did-eérnv elrnyv 
P. é-riu-douev Opev é-Tip-adueba Mueda €-Ppid-€omev obey 
E-TIUL-GETE GATE é-riu-decbe aobe é-pid-éeTe etre ; 
| tek é-riu-aov Ov é-rii-dovro ‘@vTo é-pld-eov — ou a 


CONTRACT VERBS. 83 


PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 






































In -EQ. VERBS IN -O?. 

(M. or 2.) (Active.) (M. or P.) 
Pid-éouar oumaL OnA-d6w @ dnA-dopar ovmat 
pir-én 7 dyA-ders ots dnd-by of 
pir-éer at Fras dnA-dee ot dnr-deT at otrat 
pir-éoueOov obpuebov Snr-odue0ov ovpebov 
pir-éeo Gov elo doy SnA\-deToOv  ovTor Snd\-decGov  ovcbov 
pir-éeo Gov io Oov Syd-deToOv  ovToY SnA\-decOov _odaGop « 
pir-edueda weba Snd\-Couev odpmev dynr-ocueba =. oUpsea 
pir-éer be eta Oe 5nd-dere ovTe | dnd-deg be ova be 
gpir-dovrat ov au dyA-dover(v) otcr(v) SyA-dovrat  ovrau 
Pij-Ewpar Pua dnd-0w @ dnA-dwmac Opar 
piréen SnA-O7ns ois 5nd-dn ot 
pir-énrat Yra dnA-07 ot Ond-onTat OTat 
Pir-ewuelov fuelov Onr-owmePov wyuelor 
piri-énobov Nodov Snd-onTov Tov 5yndA-dnc0ov da0ov 
pir-énaOov a Oov Snd\-Ontov Tov Snd\-dnobov dcboy 
pir-educda  Ouedov Snr\-Owuev Bev dnr-owpea = wpueba 
pir-éno be 17 Oe dnA-onTE Ore dndr-ona Ge abe 
pir-EwvT ae 8 5nr-dwar(v) Bor(r) Snd-OwvTat vrac 

gir-eolunv = Blunv Snr-orpe oct Onr-oolunv  olunv 

» pir-€oro 0 dyA-dots ots dnd-do10 oto 
gptd-éoiTo TO dnA-dot of dnd-dovro oiro 
pir-eoluefov gtuelov Onr-oolueBov oluePor 
pir-€o.s Bov to Oov Snd-do.roy otrov dnd-dowwOov otabov 
pir-eolaOnv cOnv Snd-oolrnyv olrnv dnr-oolcOnv olaAnyv 
pir-eolueba mea SynA-Coumev ocuev Onr-oolueba olyeba 
pir-éo.s Ge grt dnd-oolTeE ore dnd-do.s Ge oto be 
pir-o.vTo VTO dnd-dovev ovev 5yA-do.vro otvTo 
ptd-éou ob 57-0 ov dnd-ov. 00 
pir-eéo Ow ela Ow SnA-deTw ovTW dnr-0€00w o0cOw . 
pir-cecfov eit Bov Snd-CeTov ovTor - dynA-decOov ovcbor 
pir-eéoOwv elo Ow Snr-0€Twy ovTwY Snr-oc0wy otvcbwy 
pir-éeo Ge eio0e Ond-deTe ouTE dnd-dec Ge ova Ge 
pir-eécOwoav elaOwoav| Sndr-odrwoay ovTwoay dnr-0dcOwoav ovcbwoar 
pir-erbar eta Bar dydA-deuv oop dnr-decGar odcbat 
pir-eduevos  ovpevos dnr-dwy Ov dnd-odMmevos  ovpevos 
pir-eouévn oupévn SnA-dovta ovca Onr-oouévn = oupévn 
pir-eduevovy  ovpevov dnd-dov oop SynA-odmevov ovpevoy 
pir-ebuevov  ovpévou SynA-CovTos ovvros OnA-oouévou ovpévou 

IMPERFECT. 

é-pid-edunv ovunv é-674\-00v ~— ou é-Ond-odunv ovpny 
é-pidh-éov od €-57)\-0€s ous é-6n\-dou od 
é-pid-eTo €(To é-67)\-0€ ou é-Sn\-deTo oro 
é-pid-edueOov . ovpebov é-dnd-00 uePov ovpeBov 
é-pir-éecOov etadov é-Syd-o€rov ovTov é-SyA-der0ov ovtcbov 
é-pir-eéoOnv elo Ony é-Snd-o€rnv ovTny é-Snr-o€cOnv ovcOnv 
é-pid-edueba ovpueda é-Ond-douev oder é-Syr-odue0a ovmeda 
é-pit-€er0e  ciobe é-Snd-dere  o0Te é-Snd-decGe ovabe 
é-pir-éovTo  ovvTo €-07\-00v oup é-5yd-0ovTo  ovvTo 








G 2 


84. GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 79. — Nore 1.—In the singular of the optative act. of contract verbs, 
- Attic writers generally employ the forms in -yv; in the dual and plural, 
the common forms are more in use. The following are the Attic forms: 








S. rTiu-gnv pir-olnv dndr-olnv 
TLU-W@ns pir-olns dnd-olns 
TLU-QN pir-oln “SyK-oln 

D. ri-@nrov pid-olnrov dnd-olnrov 
TLU-QHT NV ptr-o17T nv Ond-01nT nv 

P. rip-gypev pid-olnmev dnA-olnuev 
TLU-QTE pir-olynre dnr-olnre 
T l= @ev ptd-otev dnd-otev 


a 
Nortsr 2. — Four verbs in -dw ({dw, live ; rewdw, hunger ; dupdw, thirst, 
and xpdouar, use) contract ae into 7, dec and dy into y, as, £@, (Hs, fn, etc., 
inf. (fv, imper. (7H, impf. efwv, Efns, ef, etc. 


Nore 3.— Dissyllables in -éw (as rdéw, sail; 0éw, run ; mvéw, blow, 
etc.) admit only the contraction in e (from e and ee); as, » 


Pres. tr éw, wrels, wet, rh éomev, mretre, TAEovCGL. Part. rréwy. 
Impf. €7 \eov, ders, 2rder, etc. — Mid. rréopar, wrED, mwhetrat, etc. 


Thus de?, oportet, and déoua, need. — But déw, bind, is usually contracted 
throughout, esp. in compounds. ; 


Notes 4.— The verb Aovw, wash, is often contracted in those endings of 
the imperfect active and of the present and imperfect mid. or pass., which 
begin with e oro. Thus, ; 


Act. dou, éXoduev, etc., instead of €dove, éXovoper. 
Mid. doviuar, Aodrar, etc., AodeAar, for Novouar, AoveTar, over Bat. 
éovuny, édod, éXovTO, etc., for éXrouvdunv, éXovouv, édoverOo. 


VERBS IN -l. 


§ 80. — The verbs in -w differ from those in -w only in 
the present, imperfect, and the 2 aorist active and middle. 
— They are formed, for the most part, from monosyllabic 
stems in a, e¢, and o, by lengthening the stem-vowel (a e 
into y, o into @), suffixing ms, and prefixing the redupli- 
cation. 


The reduplication, in verbs in -w, consists in repeating 
the first consonant with 4, when the stem begins with a 
simple consonant or a mute and liquid; but when the stem 


f VERBS IN -p. : 85 


begins with ot, 7, or an aspirated vowel, « only with the 
rough breathing is prefixed. Thus, 


STA-, Gorn-ws, to place. @E-, r/-On-p, to put. 
ILAA-, wi-p-aAn-pt, to fill. ‘E-, i-n-pt, to send. 
XPA-, ciHypn-pt, to lend. AO-, di-da-p1, to give. 


Note 1.—Some verbs, before appending the syllable mw, annex vvv or vi 

to the stem ;— vv¥, when the stem ends in a vowel, vv when it ends in a 
consonant. These verbs have no reduplication, nor do they lengthen the 
stem-vowel, the vowel o excepted, which becomes w. — Thus, AEIK-, delk- 
vu-ut, to show. 

ZEYT-, Eevy-vi-u, to join. 

ZKEAA-, cxedd-vvv-m, to scatter. 

KOPE-, xopé-vvi-u1, to satisfy. 

ZTPO-, crpw-vvi-uw, to spread. 


Nore 2. — Verbs in tu have no 2 aorist, the verb oBé-vvi-m, to Genes 
excepted, which has 2 aorist @oBnv (§ 90).- 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 


§ 81.— The PRESENT mid. or pass. is formed from the 
present active by changing mw into wae and resuming the 
short stem-vowel. 


The IMPERFECT, both act. and mid. or pass., is formed 
by changing mw into », ee into pny, and prenee the 
augment. 


The 2 AoRISsT is formed —in the indicative from the 
imperfect, in the remaining moods from the present, — by 
dropping the reduplication. 


Norst. — The lengthening of the stem-vowel (a e into 7, and o into w) 
extends in the present and imperfect act. only to the singular of the 
indicative, but in the 2 aorist also to the dual and plural of the indicative, 
and even to the imperative and infinitive. 


ger The verbs rlOnu, tyr, and df5wu resume in the 2 aorist the short 
stem-vowel, but lengthen in the infinitive of that tense e into « and o into 
ov, aS, Det-vat, ef-vat, dod-vac. 















































3 GREEK GRAMMAR. 
§ 82. PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -pe. 
Tenses ACTIVE. 
and 
Moods =TA- OE- A-O . AEIK- 
S. tory ps, I place} rl-0y-pu, I put) dt-dw-m, I give | delx-vv-,'I show 
i-oT7-S Tl-On-s dl-dw-s delk-vUs 
2 e i-ory-o1(v) tl-On-c1(v) | 5l-dw-o1(y) delk-vv-or(v)4 
Aa) «i 
3 L-OTG-Tov ,| -Je-Tov 6l-do0-rov delk-vt-Tov 
o 7 xy v 
| bora-rop rh beror 5l-d0-Tov delk-vv-Tov 
a | P. f-ord-wev T (-0e-wev 6l-d0-wev delk-vU-wev 
= 
i-oTQ-TE ri\be-re 5l-50-Te delk-v0-TE 
i-ord-o1(v) r-éo1(7) §1-66-dor(v) deck-vU-dau(v) 
(from iord-dov) jand ri-Getou(v)| and d:-dovor(v)| and decx-vior(v) 
| S. -ord TL-0@ 5450 deck-vv-w1 
é i-or7-s Tt-O7n-s 51-5G-s Secx-vv-ys 
$| borg ri-Of 5-5@ etc. 
1D, . ‘ 
= i-oT7H-Tov Tl-07-TOV dgoieror 
= l-orij-rov TL-07}-T0 y dG @-Tov 
3 | P. i-or@-pev Tt-0a-MEV 54-5 @-Uev 
a i-cT H-Te Tt-Of-Te 51-0 @-Te 
= i-or &-o1( vr) TL-O0G-01(v) | 5t-5G-or(v) 
a S. Lortt-ny Tt-Oel-nv 6.-dol-nyv Secx-vd-o1pt - 
a i-or&t-ns Ti-Gel-ns . | 6t-dol-ns Seck-vv-ors 
= 3 i-ordl-7 Tt-Oel-n d1-dol-7 etc. 
> |D. 
3 i-ork<rov2 Ti-Oei-rov? 5.-do0-Tov? 
8, i-ortt-r ny Ti-Gel-r nv dt-dol-T nv 
© | P.t-ordt-wev T t- Pet-wev d1-dot-pev 
i-oT di-TE Ti-Oel-T € 5t-dot-Te 
i-o7 df-ev Tt-Oel-ev 5-Sot-ev 
S. torn? rl-ber8 5l-dou delx-vu 8 
2 i-oTa-TYw Tt-0€-Tw 5t-66-Tw deck-vU-Tw 
-s | D.forda-rov Tl-Oe-Tov df-d0-Tov delk-vU-TOV 
S i-oTa-Twy T1-0€-T WY 51-06-Twv Seuk-v-Twy 
&,| P. tord-re Tl-0e-Te 6l-d0-TE OelK-vU-TE 
A i-ord-Twoay Ti-0é-Twoav | 6t-56-Twoav detk-vU-Twoap 
and t-ordvrwy | and ri-Sévrwv| and d:-dévTwv | and decx-vivrwy 
iE i-oTd-vat Tt-Gé-vat 61-dd-var Seck-vv-var 
= i-ords, Goa, dv |ri-Gels, etoa, év| 51-dovs, ofa, dv| Seck-vis, doa, vy 
S G. latavros G. -€vTOS G. -dvTos G. -UrvTOS 
IMPERFECT. 
t-orn-y é-7 l-Oyv é-5f-dour4 é-delx-vov 1} 
i-oT n-s é-rl-Oers 4 €-5l-Sous é-Selx-vus 
i-oTn é-7 (-Bet é-df-dov é-delx-vu 
i-oTa-Tov é-7l-Oe-Tov é-5£-50-Tov é-delk-vi-Tov 
i-oTd-Tyv é-7-0é-T ny €-51-06-T Hv €-Serk-vU-T HY 
i-oTa-pev é-7 [-Oe-wev €-5/-d0-wev €-delk-vt-wev 
i-oTa-Te é-ri-Oe-Te é€-5l-do0-Te é-delk-vi-Te 
i-oTd-cav é-rl-Oe-cav é-5l-50-cav 














é-delk-vi-cav 








VERBS IN -pe. 


87 
























































PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -pe. 
MIDDLE. 
ZT A- OE- AG- AETK- 

i-oTd-wat T l-Be-war 6l-do-pat delk-v0-wat 

t-oTa-oae Tb-Je-cat 6l-d0-cat Oelx-vi-car 

i-oTa-TaL 7 l-Oe-Tat 6l-50-T at Oelx-vi-Tat 

‘-o7 d-ue0ov T-0é-webov 51-56-yeOov decx-vU-ue0ov 

t-sTa-oOov T l-Oe-c Bov 6l-d0-cbov delk-vt-o Cov 

i-ord-oOov Tl-Je-cOov 6l-d0-cbov delk-vt-c ov 

i-ord-ueba T i-0é-e0a 61-dd-ueba deck-v-yeba 

i-cTa-ce tl-Oe-c be dl-d0-c be delx-vu-o be 

i-oTA-VTaL Tl-Oe-vT at 6l-do-vr au Oelk-vu-vT ar 

i-oT@-wat TL-O@-Wae 61-6 @-war deck-vU-wyar 

i-oT7 Tt-O7 51-6@ dek-vv-7 

i-oTH-TaL Ti-OH-TaL 01-6 @-T at etc. 

i-oT W-webov Tt-0W-webov 61-5 w-peOov 

i-oT7H-c0ov T.-07-0 Bov 61-5 @-c Bov 

i-oTH-o ov T-07-0 ov 61-0 @-o Bov 

i-or w-peda TL-Ow-eba 61-0 0- we0a, 

i-orj-o0e Tt-07-0e 01-6-0 Oe 

i-oT@-vTat Tt-O@-vT at 61-6 O-vT at 

i-oral-uny Tt-Ool-uny® 6.-dol-unv decx-vi-olunv 

i-crat-o Tt-Oot-o 5t-dot-o deuk-vv-010 

i-cTat-To T-Oot-TO 6-d0t-To etc. 

i-cral-webov Tt-Ool-peov 61-dol-pebov 

i-crat-cOov T-Oot-o Gov 6t-dot-o Oov 

i-ctal-cOnv .- Tt-Ool-c Onv 61-dol-c Onv 

i-oTal-ueba Ti-Gol-ueba 6t-dot-yeba 

i-cTat-o0e Tt-Out-o be 61-dot-o be 

i-oTat-vTo Tt-Qot-vTo 61-d0t-vTo 

i-oTd-oo OF ioTw Ti-fe-co Or Tifov| di-do-coor dldou| delx-vi-co 

i-oTd-cOw Ti-0é-c Ow 61-06-c Ow derx-vt-o Ow 

i-cTra-cOov Tl-Oe-cbov 6l-d0-c Bor delk-vu-o ov 

i-ord-cOwy Tt-0é-c Ow | 51-56-c wy deck-vU-cOwv 

i-cTa-o0e 7 l-e-o Be dl-d0-0 be .6elk-vu-o Be 

i-oTd-cOwoay — Ti-0€é-cOwo ay . 6t-66-c Owoav deux-vi-c wo av 

or t-ord-cOwy or Tt-0é-cOwy or 61-66-c Ow or detk-vd-cOwy 
t-ora-c0au Tl-Oe-cOat 6l-do0-c Oar delk-vi-cOat 
i-ord-pevos, n, ov| Tt-O0é-uevos,n,ov| 51-54-pevos, n, ov Seuk-vv-wevos 
IMPERFECT. 

i-¢Ta&-pnv é-71-0é-unv - €-61-66-unv é-Serk-vU-unv 

i-cra-oo or lorw é-7 l-Oe-c0 é-5!-d0-c0 é-delx-vv-o0 

i-oTa-TO é-7l-e-To - €-5l-0-To é-delk-vv-TO 

i-ord-pelov é-71-0é-ueBov é-5:-06-ue0ov é-Seck-vU-wedov 

i-oTa-o Oop é-7 {-Je- Bov é-6[-50-c bov é-delx-vu-cbov 

i-ord-oOnv é-7 1-0-0 Onv é-51-d6-c Onv é-Secx-v-o Onv 

i-ord-ueba é-ri-0é-ueba é-51-56-nwea é-Seck-vu- nea, 
 t-ora-cbe é-7 l-Oe-o be é-5l-d0-0 e é-delk-vu-o0e 

i-cTa-vTo é-rl-e-vTo é-6l-d0-vTo é-delk-vu-vTo 





88 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -p. 
























































ACTIVE. 
=TA- OE- AO- AEIK- 
S. é-orn-v (€-On-v*) ) .: (€-5w-v4) 
e-oT N-S (€-On-s) +} | (€-dw-s) +S 
© e-oTN (é-0n) = | (€6dw) m4 
3 |D. 
§ €-oT n-TOV €-Oe-Tov é-50-Tov wanting. 
Ss €-0TH-T HV €-0é-Tyv . €-56-T nv 
=} v v 4 
me | P. é-orn-yev é-fe-wev €-do-wev 
€-oT n-TE é-Oe-Te €-50-Te 
€-oT n-oav €-Je-cav é-d0-cav 
S. 07d 08 5d 
; oT h-s O7n-s 5@s 
d os A S 
fo oTy on dw 
© | D. 
=| OTH-TOV 07-Tov 6@-Tov 
> oTH-TOV 07-Tov 0@-Tov 
HP. ord-pev 00-uev 50-uev 
OTH-TE 07-Te 0@-TeE 
| oT @-o1(v) 0@-o1(r) 5@-o1(v) 
fo S. oral-nv Gel-nv dol-nv 
) oral-ns Gel-ns dol-ns 
ee oral-n Gel-n dol-n 
m2 | D. 
ww 
g oral-nrov2 Gel-nrov2 5ol-nrov2 
5 OTAL-HT HY Oei-nT HV do.-AT HV 
P.  oral-nuev Gel-nwev dol-nuev 
oTal-nre Gel-nre dol-nTre 
oTal-ev Oet-ev dot-ev 
.| SS. orF-008 bés (0€01)8 5és (560)8 
= OTh-TW 6é-Tw 56-Tw 
3 oTH-TOV 6é-rov 66-Tov 
mn OTH-T wy 6é-rwy 66-Twy 
=) P. orf-re 6é-re 56-Te 
= OT H-TWOAV 6é-Trwoav 66-Twoay 
and ordytTwy and déyrwy and éé6rvTwy 
3 OTH-vat Oet-var dov-vat 
s oTds, -doa, -av | els, -eica, -év | Sovs, -otca, -dv 
ai G. oTGYTOS G. Oévros G. ddvros 
Future oTnow Ojow bwow delEw 
1 Aorist | é-crnoa €-Onxa® é-Swxa €-devEa 
Perfect | &ornka™ ré-Beika™ 6é-SwKa 5é-dexa 
Plpft. é-0T HKELY é-re-Oelkery é-Se-d Ker é-5e-dely Evy 
Fut.-pf. | é-crntmw, old Att. wanting. wanting. wanting. 
PASSIVE. 
1 Aorist | @-ordOqy é-r €Onv® é-5b0nv é-delx Onv 








VERBS IN -pe. 


- PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -pe. 















































MIDDLE. 
=TA- OE- AO-. AEIK- 
(The 2 Aor. Mid. of | é-0é-unv é-66-unv 
ioT ne (€-Oe-c0) €Oov (€-50-c0) €5ou 
does not occur) é-0e-To é-d0-To : 
but: €-0é-webov €-56-uedov 
é-1T4-UNv é-0e-o Bov €-do0-a ov wanting. 
é-1 pid-unv €-0é-c Ony €-56-cOnv 
é-0€-weba €-56-ne0a 
é-0e-o Oe é-50-00e 
€-0e-vTo €-d0-vTo 
™ plw- mat O@-pae 0@-uwar 
amply 07 OY) 
mw pln-Tat O7-TaL 00-TaL 
etc. 0w-webov 6wW-uebov 
04-c0ov 6@-cOov 
07-c Bor . 6@-a0ov 
0w-uweba 0wW-ueba 
07-0 0e 00-o0€ 
O0@-vTar 6@-vrat 
am pral- ny Gol-unv® dol-unv 
am plat-o Bot-o dot-o 
m plat-To Got-ro dot-To 
etc. Gol-uebov dol-uebov 
Got-o Bov dot-c boy 
Gol-cOnv dol-c Any 
Goi-weba dol-ueba 
bot-o be dot-cbe 
Oot-vTo d0t-vTo 
mpla-co (rplw) 600 (for 0é-c0)| dot (for 54-00) 
1 pid-o ba 6é-c Ow 50-0 Ow 
etc. 6é-c ov 50-c0ov 
6é-cOwy 50-cOwy 
0é-c Be 50-00 
0é-cOwoav- 50-cOwoay 
and 0é-cOwy and 6d6-cOwy 
 pla-o Oat 0é-c Bat 50-c0ar 
T pid-LEVOS. 0é-uwevos, n, ov 5d-wevos, 4, ov 
oTHTOMAL Ojncomat dwoouar — « OeiEouan 
éoTnodunv (€0nkadunv)® (€dwrdpunv)® dered unv 
Era mar TéOetpar™ dédouar - O€dery uae 
éoTaunv éredetunv €deddunv ededelyunv 
EoTHtouar — wanting. wanting. wanting. 
PASSIVE. 
| 1 Fut. oTadncopat | TeOjoopar® | Sodjcouar decxOnoomat 








a0 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


REMARKS ON THE PARADIGMS. 


§ 88. —1. Verbs in -vju form the subjunctive and optative like verns in 
ww. — The yorms in -vw often also occur in the present and imperfect active 
(édeixvu-ov, -es, -e, etc.), esp. in the 3 pers. plur. (decvdover) and in the pres- 
unt partic. (deuxvdwv, -ovea, -ov). 

2. In the duai and plural present optat. (very rarely in the 2 aorist opt., 
the 3 pers. plur. excepted), Attic writers commonly drop 7; as, ioratrop, 
israire, etc., icrainrov, icralnre, etc. — The forms d:dgnv and d@nv also 
nccur. 


3. The imperatives torn, Tle, St50v, and delxvv stand for tora, rlOe-H, 
5l50-6:, and delxvi-G, the syllable 6 being dropped, and the final da, e, o, 
and ¢ lengthened into 7, ec, ov, and v respectively. 

In the imperative of the 2 aorist act., the verbs rlOnuc, tym, and dldwm 
change the final @ into s; as, 0és, és, 56s, for 0€-01, €-01, 56-0. 

The imperatives o770 and 674 (from Balyw) are in composition often 
shortened into ora and Ba; as, dwéora, xaTrdBa, for dréornh, card Bn. 


4. In place of the imperfect forms érl@ns, érlOn, édldwv, édldws, é5ldw, the 
forms érifes, érider, édi5ourv, etc. (contr. from érl@e-es, ériGe-e; édl50-or, 
é5ldo-es, é6(50-e) are generally used. 

In the singular of the 2 aorist indic. act., the 1 aorist forms 26yxa, jxKa, 
and @dwxa, are used instead of €@nv, jv (from tinue), and dw». 


5. The middle optative forms with o., of stems in e, are preferred by 
Attic writers to those with e.; hence, rifolunv, Polunv, tolunv, instead of 
ridelunv, Oeluny, ielunv. 


6. The future, 1 aorist, and perfect are formed regularly on the stem. 
(To find the stem of verbs in -vy., drop the syllables -vvv and -vv.) 

The verbs riOnuc, tnut, and didwmu change in the 1 aorist act. and mid. 
the o of the future into x; as, 2@nxa, nKa, €5wxa, etc. — These forms, how- 
ever, are used for the most part only in the singular of the indicative ; in 
the dual and plural, and in the remaining moods of that tense, the forms 
of the 2 aorist are used by the Attic writers. 

The forms é@nxduny, jidunv, and édwxdunr, of the 1 aorist mid. are like- 
wise supplied by those of the 2 aorist mid. (é0éuny, efunv, and éd6unv). 


7. In the perfect and pluperfect act., mid., and pass., the verbs rl@nuu 
and ¢mu change the stem-vowel e into e.; as, TéOecxa, efxa ; TéOeuar, efwar. 
— The verb dé has dé5wxa, but dédouac (with o). 

"Iornue has éornxa, éorhKev (also eiorhxev); mid. or pass., &rapas, 
éotdunv —all with the rough breathing. 

As to the meaning of torn, it must be observed that some of its tenses 
have a transitive and some an intransitive meaning. 





Transitive. Intransitive. 
Pres. tornm, I place. Perf. éornxa, sto. 
Impf. tcrnv, I was placing. Plpf. éorjxev, stabam. 
Fut. orjow, I shall place. F.-pf. éornéw, or -ouar, stabo. 
1 Aor. éornoa, I placed. 2 Aor. éorynp, steti. 


a 


wer The perfect éornxa is usually syncopated throughout, except in the 
sing. of the indicative: dual, éordrov, éordrov, plur. éordyev, Eordre, 
éorao.(v); 8 pers. pl. plupf. éerdcav; subj. éo7&, 7s, 7, etc. (the imper, 
ford, etc., and the opt. ésralyny, 3 p. pl. éoratev, are poet. only); inf- 
Acravar; part. dorms, éoTGaa, cords (ZEN. Gros, waons, CtC. 5. 


VERBS IN -p. 91 
8. The forms éré0nv and reOhooua stand for é6é0nv and 6eOjoopuat (§ 4, 3). 


§ 84. — Pnyi (stem DA-), to say. 



































| Ludicative. | Subjunct. | Optative. | Imper. Infin. | Partic. 
: PRESENT. 

S. dnul oo galny pavar gods 
pHs ons galys past? paca 
paol(r) on paly pare pay 

D. pirdy prov galnrov! | parov G. 
pardv pTov pant ny paTwv pavros 

P. dduév paper palynuev 
paré PATE palnre pare 
pasl(v) peo.(v) patev garwoarv and pavrwy 

IMPERFECT. 
S. épnv P. épapev 
épys, uSU. Epyoba éparov épare 
eon eparny epacay 





1) and gatrov, paiuev, paire; 7) or pdh.— Fut. djow, aor. @pnoa, perf. 
imper. repdcbw, let it be said. 


ger The middle forms égavro, PdcOa, and pdapuevos (affirming), but rarely 









































occur. 
§ 85. — Eiw (stem ’I-), to go. 
Indicative. | Subjunct. | Optative. | Imper. | Infin. | Partic. 
PRESENT. 

S. ei tw Yoru. and iévar iby 
ei or eis Uns Yors [lolnr| Yc lotca 
eioi(v) Un You irw lov 

D. trov tnrov Yo.rov trov G. 
irov tnrov loirny trwy idvros 

P. tuev twpev Youwev 
ITE inre Youre tre 
tac(v) twor(r) Yovev trwoay or lévTwv 

IMPERFECT. 





S. qe or fa 
” a ” ol 
nes OY newwba netrov OY nTov 
net nelrnv or ATH 


P. jeer or nuev 
ww ge 
necre OY 7TE 
jeoav 











Norr.—In Attic prose, the present indic. (efuc) is generally used in the 
sense of the future, I shall go or come. Hence the present indic. is sup- 
plied by Zpxouar.— The infin. and partic. (iéva:, dév) have likewise a future 
(eoxoetimes a present) meaning. 


ay GREEK GRAMMAR. 


. 86. —"Inus (stem ‘E-), to send. 
n 


The verb tym is throughout inflected like ri0nu. Many of its fornis, 
however, are found only in composition. It is inflected as follows: 
































| Indicative. | Subjunet. | Optative. | Imiperat. | Infin. | l artic. 
ACTIVE, 
S. inue id ielny i€vac iels 
ins ins | belns veut | ietra 
= inor(v) in ieln iérw iév 
& | D. teroy intov ietrov leTov G. 
a ierov ifrov ielrny iérwv iévros 
a ee lewev iduev —|_beZuev 
ieTe inre ietre 2 leTE | 
idou(v) } i@or(v) | beter iérwoav and iévrwy 
Imperfect: s. tovy,® tes, tex; —D. terov, iérnv; — P. tewev, tere, teoav. 
S. 7Ka® w | etnv evar els 
KAS qs eins és (for @6:) eloa 
; nKe(V) rl ein érw éy 
5 | D. efrov TOV elroy érov G. 
om eit nv qTOV elt nv fT wy &vros 
N | P. eluer (LEV elev 
ere NTE elTe ere 
eloay wot(v) elev érwoav and évtwy 
MIDDLE. 
S. veuar i@uat ieluny vet Oat iéuevos 
ter at hig: teTo teoo or fou: 
cS ierat -—-.. | ifrar- .,ietro - - |.iéoOw 
Z | D. iéuebov ia@pueOov ieluedov 
a vec ov ijabov ietaOov vec Oov 
f tes Bov ijo Gov ielo Any iécOwy 
~ P. iéueba lopeba ielueda : 
teoBe inode ieta Oe tea Oe 
tevT at idvrac ietvro iésOwoav 











Imperfect: iéunyv, lero, ieTo —iéueOov, teaBov, iéoOnv— iéueba, tecbe, ievro.. 



































S. elunv @ mat olunv es éxOat éuevos 
elo 7 oto ov 
elTo-— | nrae otro Er Ow 
3 | D. etuedov w meOov otnebov 
y elo Bov noOov ola bov &xOov : 
n_ eto Onv jobov ola Onv Ec Owy Ph 
P. elueba wueba oiueba 
ela Oe noe ola be éobe : ! 
elvTO Gyrat | olvTo Ec Owoav 
Future. 1 Aorist. ‘Terfeet. ~ | Pluperf. 
ACTIVE. now nKa (§ 83, 6.) elka (§ 85,7.) | elke 
MIDDLE. Noomat nkdunv (§ 83, 6.) eiuat elunv | 
PASSIVE. | €07jcouae elOnv, int. é0Avac eiwat eluny | 

















1) The usual Attic form instead of i€aou (Ion. letor); 2) ddloure, Plat : 
3) dploev, Xen.; *) for tec, § 83,3; *) contr. from teov, tees, tee, § 83, 4 ; 
5) see § 83,4; 7) Att. ioluny, etc., § 83, 5. 


* 


. VERBS IN -uwe. © 93 


§ 87. — Oida (stem ’EIA-), to. know. 



































Indicative. | Subjunct. | Optative. — | Imperat. | Infin. | Partic. 
PERFECT. 

. oda 6ld@ eldeinv eldévar eldws 
oic0al eld7s eldelns to eldvia 
oide(v) (bn eidein voTw eldds 

D. ioropv eld7TOV eldelnrov | torov G. 
 torov elOHRTOov | eldecntnyv | toTwv -€lddTos 
P. topev eld @uev eldeinuev 
tore elOnTE | eldelnre. tore 
ioao.(v) eld Gou(¥) eldelev toTwoav 
PLUPERFECT. 
S. qdev : : s : P. Fdequev (jouer) 
— -Qoes and 7be0a noeirov (joTOoV) noere (nore) 
noe(v) ; noeirny (HoTnv) noecav (noav) 
Fut. efrouac (Lon. eldjow), I shall know. (L have known is rendered by 
éyvwxa; I knew, by éyvwv). The forms in parenthesis: yoroy, etc., 
are poetical. tae . 











1) The forms oidas, o Sarov, oldapmer, otdare, otdaci(v), rarely occur in the 
Attic writers. : : : 


"Eotxa (stem -EIK-), I am like, I seem. 


§ 88. — Besides the indicative, the Greek writers used the infinitive 
éo.uxévat, the partic. éovxas, -véa, -ds, in the sense of ‘‘like,’’ and the pluper- 
fect é@xecv. he tet 

The phrases as Zoe, as it seems, probably, and as eixds (for éockds) 
sc. éorl), as is natural, are of frequent occurrence. 


§ 9 ye agree Keiuar, jaceo, and “Haz, sedeo. 











Indicative. | Subjunct. | Optative, | Imperat. | Infin, | Partie. 
_ PERFECT. 
S. Kefuat, jaceo| Kéwmar | Keolunv Keto Oat kelwevos 
Keloat Kén K€é0L0 Keto 
KELT aL KénTat | kéoLToO KeloOw — 
etc. ete. ete. etc. 

















Plupf. éxelunv, Zxeuo, %xevro; éxelueOov, ExecOor, éxeloOnv; éxelueda, etc. 


PERFECT, 





S. Toate, sedeo Kad Guat Kkadolunv i noOat NLeEvos 
NoaL Kady kaoto noo 
HoT aL KabArac Kabotro no Ow 
etc. etc. etc. etc. 











Plupf. nunv, joo, HoT0; nucOov, HoOov, noOnv; Huela, jade, HvTo. 

Nore.— Kanwar, which in prose is commonly used instead of the simple 
(jua), has the 3d pers. sing. without ¢ (=xd@ynrac). In the pluperfect, it 
either takes the augment (éxaOjuny, etc.) or omits it (xaPjunr, etc.): in the 
former case the 3d pers. sing. is always éxd@nro; in the latter, xadjorTo, 
The rest is supplied by kadéfouar or kaOlfouat, 








= 





94 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


90.— YNhe verbs Galvw, to go; cBérvupn, to quench ; yiyveokw, to know; 
dw, to enter, and a few others, form a 2d aorist active, analogous to that 
of verbs in -uw. The remaining forms of these verbs are like those of 
























































verbs in w. 
SECOND AORIST. 
Indicative. | Subjunct. | Optative. | Imperative. | Infinitive. Partie. 
(Stem BA-). 
éBnv, Lament Bo Balny | Bihva Bas 
éBns Bis Batns BHA? Baca 
eBn Bi Baty Bite Bay 
€Byrov Birov Bainrov® | Barov G. 
éBnT ny Barov Banrny ByTwY Bavros 
€Bnuev Bapev Bainuev 
eBynre Bare Bainre Bare 
éBnoav Bdot(v) Batev Byrwoav and Bavrwy 
(Stem ZBE-). 
éaBnv, I ceased | cB a Belnv oBhvac o Beis 
éoBns [to burn | oBijs o Beins oBHO oBeica 
éoBn oBn o Bein o BAT w oBév 
éaBnrov oBATov aBelnrov® | sBHrov G 
éo BAT HY oBRrov oBenrnv | cBATwv oBévros 
éo Bnwev oBGuev o Belnuev 
éaBnre oBnre oBelnre oBre 
éaBnoav aBa@o.(v) | oBetev oBjTwoav and oBévrwv 
(Stem I'NO-). 
éyvwv, IT knew | ye yroinv yvavat yvous 
éyvws yv@s ‘yvoins yvabe yvotca 
eyvw yv@ yvoin YvarTw yvév 
éyvwrov yverov yvoinrov® | yv@rov G. 
eyvwornv Yyva@rov yvonrnvy | yrorwv yvbvTos 
ey vwwev yvGmev yvoinuev 
ey VTE yv@re yvoinre YV@Te 
éyvwoart yva@ou(v) | yvotev yveorwoay and yvévTwv 
(Stem AT-). 
éduv, IT went dbw : divac dus 
édus [under | duns 500 Sica 
édu dun duTwW Suv 
édurov Sunrov 5drov G. 
édur nv dunrov — SUTwy duvTos 
édumev JUw Mev 
édute dunre ddre 
édtcav} dvwor(v) dUTwoav and Sbvtwy 























1) €Bay, €yvwy, €5vv, poet.—?) the compounds shorten 674 into Ba; e.g., 
éuBa, advdf8a, Att. for €uBnh, advdBn.—*) and Batrov, etc., oPetror, etc., 
yvotrov, etc. 

A similar second aorist active occurs in the following verbs, for each of 
which see § 95. 

aricxoua, be taken. 
Bidw, live. 
kalw, burn (trans.). 


pbave, anticipate. 
piw, produce. 
xalpw, rejoice. 


mwérouat, fly. 
péw, flow. 
oKé\dw, Ary. 


DEPONENTS. 95 


DEPONENT VERBS. 


§ 91. — Deponent verbs are such as are used only in 
the middle voice. They are either deponent-middle, or 
deponent-passive. 

Those verbs are called deponent-middle, which have a 
middle form for their aorist and future; e.g., yapiCouat, 
L gratify; aor. éyaptoaduny, fut. yaprodpar (Att. ). 

Those verbs are called deponent-passive, which have a 
passive form for their aorist, but commonly a middle form 
for their future; e.g., év@vudowa, I reflect; aor. éveOupHOnv, 
I reflected (& active icc repeal fut. UAGCORS I shall 
reflect. 


The following are the principal deponent-passives : 


&yaua:, wonder. BovXouar, will, wish. émipedéouar, take care. 
aldéouar, reverence. Bpuvxdopat, bellow. éricTrapat, know. . 
a\douat, roam about. Sdéouar, want. etraBéouar, beware of. 
dutAAdouar, contend: diaréyoua, converse. olouar, suppose. 
arovoéouat, despair. dvvauat, be able. wpoOuuéouat, desire. 
dpvéouat, deny. évayTidouat, oppose.  mpovodoua, foresee. 


dx Pouat, be displeased. évvoéouat, consider.  céBoua, reverence. 


Norte 1. — Of several of these verbs (aldéouwar, dxOouar, Siadéyoua, and 
ériuedéouar) the future has besides the middle form sometimes also the 
passive. — Of several (amAdouat, dpvéouat, Bpvxdouat, Siadréyouar), the 
aorist, besides the passive form, has sometimes (though rarely, or only in 
later writers) the middle form. 


Nore 2. — The verb ydoua, rejoice, has always fut. #cOjcoua, and aor. 
noOnv. -- Aéxoua, receive, has aor. éde¢éunv, in the sense of J received, and 
ééx Onv, in the sense of I was received. Thus Bidfoua, force, aor. éBiacd 
unv, I forced ; but éBidcOnv, I was forced. 


ACTIVE VERBS WITH MIDDLE FUTURE. 


§ 92.— The following verbs are most in use with a mid 
dle future : 
dxovw, hear. amravrdw, meet, Balvw, go. 


ahardafw, shout. drohavw, enjoy. Bodw, cry out. 
auaprdvw, miss. Badifw, go. yerdw, laugh. 


96 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


yiyvwookw, know. 
daxvw, bite. 
dapbdvw, sleep. 
detoar, fear. 
didpdoKw, run away. 
éoBiw, eat. 

béw, TUN. 
Oyyavw, touch. 
OvjcKw, die. 
OpwoKw, leap. 
Kauvw, coil. 
kNalw, weep. 
kwuacw, revel. 
AayxXadvw, obtain. 
AauBadvw, take. 


ALxpmaw, lick. 
pavOdvw, learn. 
véw, swim. 
vevw, nod. 
oida, know. 
oluwew, lament. 
ddorAvew, howl. 
Suvupe, swear. 
opdw, see. 
maliw, sport. 
waoxw, suffer. 
wndaw, leap. 
wlyw, drink. 
wirrw, fall. 
wréw, sail. 


mvéw, blow. 

mviyw, strangle. 
wo0éw, desire. 

™ poskuvéw, reverence. 
péw, flow. 

aiyaw, be silent. 
c.wwrdw, be silent. 
otrovddtw, be zealous. 
cupitrw, whistle. 
TpPEXW, TUN. 

TPWYW, GNAW. 
Tuyxavw, obtain. 
pevyw, flee. 

Ppbdvw, anticipate. 
XdoKw, gape. 


¢ 33.— The followiug have both the active and middle 
fo..a for the future ; buat the middle form is preferred : 


ddw, sing. 

adowagvw, seize. 
Bww, live. 

Brn wv, See. 

ynpaw, grow old. 
anpdonw, row oid. 


didkw, pursue. 


éeykwuidtw, praise. 


émaivéw, praise. 


Oavudiw, wonder. 


Onpaw, hune. 
Onpetw, hunt. 


KAértTw, steal. 
Ko\afw, punish. 
popéw, gulp down. 
oxwonrrTw, mock. 
tlkrw, bring forth. 
xwpéw, withdraw. 


VERBAL ADJEUVTIVES., 


§-94.— The verba: adjectives arv formed by suffixing 
-ros and -réos to the stem. Those in -rds correspond to the 
Latin perfect partic. in -us; those in -téo2, to the participle 
in -dus: the former usually denote the idea of possibility, 
and are rendered in English by adjectives in -tle; ¢.¢., 
Av-ros, that may be loosed, soluble; opa-rds, that may be 


seen, visible; aipe-ros, desirable, etc. 


ga Most verbal adjectives follow the analogy of the 1 aorist passive. 


ayardw, love, 
kivéw, Move, 
dnrbw, explain, 
ypapw, write, 


A€yw, say, gather, 


avuTa, fulfil, 


ayata-~ 
KLve- 

dn do- 
ypagp- 
dey- 


avuT- 


ayarn-rbs, -Téos. 
kivn-T 6s, -Té0s. 
OnAw-T éos. 
ypat-ros, -Téos. 
Aex-Tds, -TéoS. 
avuo-Tbs, -7T éos- 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 97 


eTéd\Xw, send, oTeA- oTan-7Td6s, -Téos, 
relvw, stretch, TEv- Ta-Tds, -Téos. 
Travw, stop (trans.), rav- mwav-o-Tbs, -Téos. 
Xpdoua, Use, xX pa- xpn-o-T 6s, -Téos. 
TlOnu, put, OE- Oe-r bs, -Téoss’ 
tor nut, place, 2a A- ora-Tés, -réos. 
elu, go, T- i-réos. 

ag-inut, let go, ‘E- dg-e-76s, -réos. 


§ 95. — List oF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


"Ayana, wonder, F. aydcoua; A. nyaoOnvy (Dem. nya: 
oauny ). 

iiy-vu-wt, break, F. d&w; A. éa€éa (inf. afar); 2 Pf. éaya, 
Iam broken; A. m. €a€dunv; A. p. eaynv. 

ayo, lead, 2 A. nyayov (inf. ayayeiv); 2 A. m. nyayounv ; 
Pf. jya (later aynoya); Pf. p. Ayac; 1 A. p. nyOnv. 

aipéw, seize, F. aipnow; Pf. npnea; 2 A. efdov (inf. édeiv); 
A. p. 9pé@nv; F. p. aipeOnoowar. — Mid., choose, 2 A. 
etAounv; F. aipnoowar; Pf. m. or p. npnmat. 


atcO-dv-opat, perceive, F. aic@ncouar; Pf. noOnmar; A. 7oO- 
dunv (inf. aicO-éc8ar). 


axovo, hear, F. axovcowaes Pf. ax-jnxoa (later jxovea); 
Plpf. nx-nxoev (sometimes ax-nxdev); Pf. m. or p. 
neovopat; A. p. nKxovc#ny. 


anr-icx-onat, am taken (in this sense used as the passive of 
aipéw), 2 A. (stem ‘AAO-) jAov and édrov (AXA, -@s, 
-@, etc., droinv, adaviu, adrovs, see § 90), I was taken; 
Pf. 7A@Ka and ea absen ; F. tet — The active is 
supplied by aipéw 


auapt-dv-w, miss, F. dpaprhcopar ; Pf. mmapThKa 5 Pf. P 
nuaptnuat; A. p. maaprnOny 5 2 A. juaprov (later 1 
A. npaptnea). 

audte-vvvut, clothe, Impf. without augm.; F. audidcw, Att. 
— appa; A. nudieoa; Pf. a. wanting; Pf. m. or P. 


nuplierpat; F. m. audidcomuar. 
u 


58 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


avar-iox-w, consume, F. avakoocw; A. avidooa and avarwoa; 
P£. avndoxa and avadrwxa; Pi. m. or p. avyr@pmae and 
avadrdopar; A. avnroOnv and avarebnv; F. avadroby- 
coma. 

avoiyw, open, Impf. avéwyov; F. avolfo; A. avép&a (inf. 
avoiEar); Pi. avépya, I have opened; 2 Pf. avéwya, J 
stand open; Impf. m. avemydunv; A. p. avepy@nv (int. 
avoryOjvat ). 

ameyO-av-opat, become hateful, A. amrny@-ounv; F. amex6- 
noomat; Pf. amnyO-nuat, I am hated. 

andypn, it suffices, 3 per. plur. indic. droypaou(y), inf. 
amoxpHy, part. amoxypav, -oaa, -ov; Impf. améypyn; F. 
atoypnoe; A. amréypnoe(r). 

apécxo, please, F. apéow; A. npeca; Pf. m. npecwar; A. 
p. npéaOnv. | 

apow, plough, F. apéow; A. npooa; Pf. m. or p. apypopar ; 
A. p. npo@nv. : 

avé-dv-w, increase, F. av&jnow; A. ni—noa; Pf. nvEnxa; 
Pf. m. or p. nvEnwar; F. avEnoouat and avénOnoopmat ; 
A. nv&nOnv. 

ayOopuat, am vexed, F. ayOécouat, usu. (in prose) ayGecOn- 
couar; A. nyOécOnv. 


Baiva, go (stem BA-), Fut. Byoopwar; Pf. BéBnxa; 2 A. 
éBnv (§ 90); Pf. p. in comp. -BéBamar; A. -eBa@nv. 

GiBpdcKke, eat (F. Att. &ouae from éoOlw, 2 A. &payov), — 
Pf. BéBpaxa; Pf. m. or p. BéBpwpar; F. p. and A. p. 
supphed from éc0io. 

8.0m, live, 2 A. éBiwv (§ 90), subj. Bia, -@s, -@, opt. Biany, 
inf. Bi@vat, part. Brovs (but the cases of Prods are 
supplied by the 1 Aor. partic. Biwcas). Instead of 
the present and imperfect of Bidw, the Attics generally 
employed the pres. and imperf. of Caw, which, vice 
versa, borrowed its remaining tenses from Bicw. F. 
BSi@couat (more rarely Gjow); Pf. BeBioxa; Pf. m. 
or p. BeBlorar. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 99 


Braot-dv-w, sprout, A. éBraotov (later éBrAaorynoa); F. 
Braotncw; Pf. é8rdornKxa and BeBAaotyKa. 


Bookww, feed, KF. Booxnow, A. éBocoxnoa. Mid. feed (in- 
trans. ), eat. 


Sowa s wish, am willing, ¥. Bovrynoopat; Pf. BeBovrAnpar; 
A. éBovrAnOnv and nBovranOnv. 


Tapéw, uxorem duco, F. yapo; A. éynua (inf. yjuac), later, 
éydunoa; Pf. yeyaunca. Mid. nubo, F. yapovpar; 
A. éynpaunv; Pf. yeyapnuac. 

ynGéw, rejoice (poet. ), Pf. yéyn@a;. F. ynOnoo. 

ynpacKk@ (or ynpaw), grow old, F. ynpacomar; A. éynpaca . 
(inf. ynpacat and ynpavar); Pt. yeynpaxa, I am old. 

ylyvouat, become, am (stem TEN-), A. éyevounv (later, 
éyevnOnv); VK. yevnoopar; Pi. yeyevnuwar; 2 Pf. yéyova, 
I am. \ 

yiyvooKkm, know (stem TNO-), F. yea opat 5 2 A. éyvov 
(see § 90); Pf. éyraxa; Pi. m. or p. éyvwopat; A. p. 
éyvacOnv; F. p. yuao@noopat. 


Adxveo, bite, A. axov; F. dn€oua, Pf. dénya; Pf. m. or 
p. dédnywar; A. m. édn€dynv; A. p. ednyOnv; F. 
dnyOnoopat. 

Saale, tame, F. daptow; A. édauaca; Pf. dddunka 5 Pf. 
n.. or p. dédunuar; A. p. édunOnv and édaunp. 


dap0-dv-m (usu. xaTad.), sleep, A. édapGov; F. dapOncopa ; 
Pf. dedapOnxa. 


deidw, fear, F. detoouar; A. Geroa; Pf. dédocuna and dédia 
(plur. and dual syncop. dédirov, dédipuev, dédite, Se- 
diaou(v); imper. 66701, -tre, inf. dediévar, part. dedies ). 


déw, bind, F. dyom, A. énoa, m. édnodunv; Pf. dédexa ; 
Pf. m. or p. dédewac; A. éd€0nv; F.-pf. dedjoopuas, 
commonly used for de@ncopat. 
H 2 


100 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Séw, want, usu. impers. Se7, oportet (subj. dén, opt. déou, inf. 
deiv, part. déov); Imperf. ée; VF. dejo; A. edé€noe(v) ; 
Pf. dedénwe. Mid. déopar, need, F. Senoouar; A. éden@nv; 
Pf. dedénuac. | 

dudpdcKe, run away, F. dpacouar; Pf. dédpaxa; 2 A. spar, 
-as, -a, etc. (subj. 690, -as, -a, -@pev, -aTe, -Ho1(V), Opt. 
dpainv, imper. dpa, -dtw, inf. dpavat, part. dpas, -aoa, 
-av, see § 90).— This verb is used only in compounds. 

dSoxéw, seem, think, F. d0&@ (doxnow, poet.); A. édo€a; Pf. 
m. or p. dédoypat. 3 3 

dvvayat, possum, am able, 2 pers. dbvacat (subj. divepat, 
opt. dvvaiunv, imp.. ddvaco, inf. divacOat, part. duva- 
pevos); Imperf. édvrdunv and yndvvauny, 2 pers. €dvve; 
F. duvncopar; A. édvvnOnv, ndvvnOnv, and édvvacOnp ; 
Pf. dedvvnpac. . 


Evyeipw, wake up (trans.), F. éyepo; A. nyepa; Pb. 
éynyepxa; Pi. p. éynyepuat; 2 Pf. éypnyopa, with pres- 
ent signific. J awake (intrans.); 2 A. nypounv, L awoke. 

€Oérw and Gére, will, Impf. 7@erXov and EGerov; F. eernow 
and Oexnow; A. n0érAnoa and €6érAnoa; PE. 70éAnKa. 

eldw, see (see opdw). 

eizrov, I said (see dnc). 

ci popat (the present not in use), ask, inquire, F. épjoopar; 
A. npounv (épmpat, epoluny, €pov, épécbat, apopeney): 
The rest supplied by épwraw. 

édavvo, drive, F. ékdow (Att. €X@, -as, -a, etc., inf. édXav); 
A. naaoa; Pf. édnrdea; Pi. m. or p. eAnrduwar; A. 
nrabnv. — Mid. drive from me, A. nracapnp. 

éxxw, draw, F. €\Em (preferred to érAxtow); A. eirAKvoa; 
Pf. eiAxtea; Pf. m. or p. efrAxvopar; A. etAxvaOnp ; 
F. édcvaOyncopat.— Mid. draw myself, éAxvcopas ; 
A. etXKvoapnp. 

érriméhowat (and émiperovpmar), take care, F. éripedrnoopar 
(also érripernOnoowar); PE. éripenérXnpar; A. érre 
MernOny. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. | 101 


éricrapat (like torapac), now's Thbh rvrrdwny C. Say. 
usu. nrioTw); F. emia Tigo iat’ A. Artur Ory A> 


Epayat, love, A. npacOnv, IT loved ; F, epacOicouat, I shall 
_ love. | 

éppw, go forth, F. éppnow; A. nppnoa; Pf. nppnxa. 

épuyy-av-w, belch, A. npvyov; F. épevEouar. 

épxouat, go, come (the indic. excepted, all the other moods 
of the present are borrowed from ety; thus, épyouar, 
tw, torus, Ur, evar, tov); Impf. npyounv (usu. nev and 
na); F. eiue (§ 85, NOTE), I shall go (io, T shall come); 
Pf. eAmrvda; VF. édevoopar (poet., and in later prose) ; 
A. Gov (€Ow, EXOoupw, EXOE, EAOeiv, EAP WY). 


éaOiw, eat, F. éouar; Pf. édndoxca; A. ébadyov; Pf. m. or 
p. €dnderuar; A. ndéaOnv. 

evpioxm, find, A. evpov; F. evpnow; Pf. evpnea; Pf. m. or 
p. evpnuar; A. etpéOnv; F. p. evpnO@nooua.— Mid., 
obtain; A. evpdunv. 

exo, have, hold, Impf. eityov; A. éryov (cx, -78, -7 3 exoCnV 
{in comp. oyxoiue], oxés [in comp. also oyxé], cxeiv, 
oxov); F. &wand oxynow; Pf. grynea; A. m. éoxounr; 
F. m. €€owar and cynoowar; Pf. m. or p. éoxynpuar; 
A. p. éoyéOnv. 

évrw, cook, F. expjoopar; A. &pnoa; A. p. yWwyOnv; Pf. p. 
or m. AYnpat. 

Zé-vvv-ut, boil (trans.), F. Sow; A. @feoa; Pf. m. or p. 
éCeouar; A. p. éFéaOnp. 

Cevry-vu-ut, Join, 2 A. p. efirynv (more rarely eed xOnv)- ie 
The rest from feta. 


Ca-vvv-wt, gird, F. faow; Pf. éfwxa; A. Aree éSwoa ny ; 
Pf. m. or p. wopar. 


Odw, run, F. Pevoouat or Oevooduat (later Oevcw>. The rest 
wanting. See tpéyo. 
Piyydvw, touch, F. OlGowar; A. eOiyov. 


102 -.., GREEK GRAMMAR. 


OvjcKke, dis 5 Clie @AN- 5 ae amélavov; F. atro8avodpat; 
Ff. rOimite’ ( ‘phar. syncop.: TéOvapev, TéOvaTE, TeOVacL, 
opt. TeOvainy, | imp. TéOvaO1, inf. reOvdvan, part. TeOvnKkeds, 
-via, or TeOvews, -doa, 0s; Plpf. 3 p. plur. éréOva- 
cav); K.-pf. reOvnEw, and later teOvnEowa, I shall be 
dead. 


Opocke, leap, F. Gopoduar; A. €0opov; Pf. réBopa. 


"Ix-vé-opat, come, usu. adixvéouat, F. aptEowatr; A. adixounr; 
Pf. adiypat. 

itdoKopuat, propitiate, F. ikdocopwar; A. thacdpnv; A. p. 
indo Onv. 


Kad if, seat, make to sit, Impf. éka@ifov; F. xaha ; deeming: 
— Mid. F. ca®ifnoopa; A. éxabtcapnv.— But Kcabéo- 
pat, I seat myself, Impf. éxabeSounv; F. cabedodpuar. 


cabevow, sleep, F. xafevdnow. Perfect wanting. 


caiw, set on fire, F. xatow; A. éxavoa; Pf. céeavea; Pf. m. 
or p. cécavpatr; A. p. éxavOnv; F. p. cavOnoopar; 2 A. 
act. éxanv, I burned (intrans.), part. xaeis, from stem 
KAE-, see § 90. 


Kkanréw, call, F. caréow, Att. carod; A. éxareoa; Pf. xékrXnka; 
Pf. m. or p. KeékAnpat, I am called (opt. xexrAnunv, -jo, 
nto, etc.); A. p. ekrAnOnv; F. p. KrAnOjooua; F. m. 
Kanrovpar; A. m. éxadecadpn. 

kapveo, toil, F. capovuar; Pf. cékunea; A. éxdmor. 

Kepa-vvu-ut, mix, F. cepiow, Att. Kepe, -as, -a; A. éxépaca ; 
Pf. xéepaxa; Pf. m. or p. Kkékpawar; A. p. éxpabnv 
and éxepacOnv. 

kiypnut, lend (XPA-), inf. ceypavar; F. ypnow; A. éypnoa. 
. — Mid., borrow, F. ypjoopat. 


Kralw, weep, F. cravoouat and Kravoovpa (rarely KAainow 
or KAanow); A. ékravoa; Pf. xékrXavwar and later 
KekKXNaVo Mal. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 103 


copé-vvu-ut, satiate, F. xkopéow, Att. copa; A. éxdpeca, m. 
éxopecdunv; Pf. xexopeca; P. m. or p. Kexdperpuas ; 
A. p. éxopécOnv; F. p. xopecOnoowar 

xpaco, cry out, F. cexpa&oua ; A. éxpayov ; Pf. (with present 
signific.) cécpaya (1 p. pl. céxpaypev, imper. céxpayAc). 

Kpéuapat, hang, intrans. (subj. xcpéu@pmat, opt. Kpenaiunr, 
part. xpewapevos); Impf. éxpeuaunv; A. éxpeudo@np ; 
EF. p. xpeuacOnoopar, I shall be hung; F. m. Kxpepn- 
comat, L shall hang (pendebo). 

Kpeud-vvv-ut, hang, trans., F. cpewaow, Att. Kpeua, -as, -a ; 
A. éxpéudoa. Mid. or Pass. cpewavvvpar, hang myself, 
or am hung; A. p. éxpewacOnv; F. p. cpeuacOnoopua. 

«Tdopat, obtain, F. erncouar; Pf. céxtnwat, I possess (subj. 
KEKT@OULAL, -N, TAL, OPt. KEKTHMNV, -NO, -NTO, OF KEKT@UND, 
“@0, -@TO). 


Aayy-av-w, obtain by lot, A. €rdyov; F. AnEopwar; Pf. e’rAnya 
(rarely X€Aoyya); Pf. m. or p. d@Anywar; A. p. EAnyVOnr. 

AauP-av-w, take, A. é\aBov; F. AnWoua; Pf. etirAnda; 
Pf. m. or p. etAnupar; A. m. éXaBounv; A. p. €rn- 
pOnv; F. p. AnhOjoopar. : 

av0-av-w, am concealed, A. éra0ov; F. rAjow; PE. AfANOa, 
Iam concealed. — Mid., forget, F. Xnoowat; Pf. Xé€AHo- 
wae; A. érabounv; F.-pf. AeAncopmar. 


Mav0-cav-o, learn, A. ud0ov; F. wabnoouat; Pf. weuaOnxa. 

payouat, fight, F. pwayodua (late prose waynoouar); A. 
éuayecdunv; Pf. weudynuwar; A. p. éuayéoOnp, late. 

petpomat, obtain, Pf. etuaprat, it is fated. | 

Here pot, it concerns me, F. werynoe; A. éuérnoe(v); Pi. 
pemeANKE(V). | 

LéAw, intend, am about to. . ., Impf. éwedAAov and HueddAor; 

FB. pedrrnow; A. nudédAAnoa. 

wiy-vv-p, mix, F. wim; A. guiEa; Pf. wéuiya; Pf. m. or p. 
méweypwat; A. p. éulyO@nv and éuiynv; F. p. mexO@noouar; 
I’.-pf. weuiEouat. 


104 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


pipvnoKe, remind, F. uynow; A. éuvnoa.— Mid., remember, 
mention, Pf. wéurnuat, T remember (subj. weyvapmat, -7, 
rau, opt. eles -0, 70, OF MELV@UNV, -W0, -OTO, 
imp. wéuvnoo); F.-pf. pweuvnoopa, I shall remember ; 
A. éuvnaOnv, I remembered ; F. uvna@ncopa, I shail 
remember. 


Néw, swim, F. vedocouat or -odpat; A. évevoa; Pf. vévevxa. 
Eupéw, shave, Mid. Evpowar; A. éEvpdpnv; Pf. é&ipnuar. 


"Ow, smell (intwans.), F. ofjow; A. wlnoa; Pf. ddmba, 
with present signification. 

ologat or otmat, think, Impf. dcuny or @unv; F. oincopac ; 
A. @nOnv; Pf. wanting. 

olyowat, have gone (opp. to nxw, have come), Impf. @younp ; 
F. ofynoopat; Pf. @ynuas and (esp. in Her.) otyoxa. 

dc O-dv-w, slip, A. @ducOov; F. drducOjow; Pf. wrLcOnKka 
(1 A. eric Onoa, later). 

orArAvML, destroy (perdo), Impf. orAAvWY; F. orAdow and oro ; 
A. @deca; Pf. drA-wrexa. — Mid., perish, F. odovpar ; 
2 A. mrAdunv; 2 Pf. Ad-wda (perii). 

du-vu-wt, swear, Impf. wp: F. ewovpar; A. @pooa, m 
@poodunv; Pf. du-opora; Pf. m. or p. ouepopat 
(pepotat, but déuopo-o-pevos ) ; A. p. @pocOny (and 
@poOnv) ; F. p. opoc@ncopat. 


duopy-vu-u1, wipe off, F. oudpEw; A oopéa, m. pias ce 
A. p. wpopxOnv. 

ow iv AL, benefit (inf. ovwavat), Impf. wanting; F. OVnTw. 
A. wvnoa; F.m. dvicopar; A. @vjuyy, -noo,-nTo (opt. 
ovaiunv, imp. dvnoo, int. dvacOar); A. p. avyOnv. — 
The rest supplied by wdenreiv. 

opaw, see, Impf. éwpwv; Pf. émpaxa; A. ear (ide, LO0t Me, 
idé, ideiv, idov); F. dyrouac; Pf. m. or p. ewpames or 
@Gupar (inf. @POar); A. m. eidduny (idéoGa. dox. bit 
idov = ecce); A. p. @POnv; F. p. apPiacopes 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 105 


do pp-alv-opat, smell, A. dadpdunv; F. ooppyoopat (later A. 
aodpnodunyv and oodpavOjvar). 

opeirAw, owe, ought, must, F. oferrnow; A. wadeirnoa; Pf. 
apeiAnxa; 2 A. wdedov, ~es, -e (1 and 2 pers. plur. 
not used) means utenam ! “ would that !” 


opr-tcKx-av-w, tmeur, bring on myself, A. @pdAov (later 
wprnoa); F. ofbrnow; Pf. w@ddrAnea; Pf. m. or p. 
oprn-at. 7 


TlaiGw, sport, F. maiEowat and rrarkotwar: A. ératoa; PE. 
Témaicpat (ératka, mérarya, rérratypat, érraixOnv are 
later forms). 


wdacyo, suffer (stem ITA@-); A. érafov; F. refcouat (from 
TmévOcopuat, see § 15, 2); Pf. wérovOa (stem ILEN®-). 


TeTa-vvv-uu, spread out, F. weraow, Att. mera, -as, -a; A. 
éréraoa; Pf. m. or p. mémrrayat (Luc- weréracuat): 
A. éretdaOnv. 


wérouat, fly, F. mrjcouat; A. émtéunv (more rarely 
eTTAaUNv; ETTHY, TTA, TTainv, mTHvat, ras [see § 90] 
are later forms). 


any-vo-ut, fasten, F. rnfo; A. érnéa; Pf. wémnya; 2 PE. 
rérnya, I stand fast, am frozen; A. p. érayny (more 
rarely érny@nv); 2 F. p. mayjoopas. 


wi-u-rAn-mt, fill (stem ILAA-), inf. woprdavac; Impf. 
ériumrAnv; F. wanow; Pf. mérrAnwa; A. érrAnca. — 
Mid. wiurrapat; F. wrAnoopar; A. érAnoapnv; Pf. 
m. or p. mémAnopat; A. p. érArAnoOnv; F. p. mAno- 
O@ncouat. (In composition, when mw comes before 7, 
the « before wA is dropped, as éurimAnue; but it 
returns with the augment, as éveriumAaunv). 


wi-u-mpn-mt, burn (trans.), throughout like mwiwadAnme: 
Tpnow, TémpynKka, Témpynopat, erpynaOnyv, mpnoOncopat, 
mempnoouat. —In composition the same remark holds 
good as in the foregoing. 


106 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


wive, drink, F. miouar (later muodwar); 2 A. ércov (imp. 
wi0t); Pf. réroxa; Pf. m. or p. méroua; A. érdOny ; 
KF. p. mo@nocopat. 

mimpacke, sell, Pf. mémpaxa; Pf. m. or p. mémpapar; A. 
érpabnv ; F.-pf. wempdoopat, in the sense of tne simple 
F. wpaOjoouat, which but rarely occurs. ‘The I. and 
A. act. are usually expressed by amod@copa: and 
aATresOmNv. 

winto, fall, 2 A. érecov; F. recotpar; Pf. wértoxa. 

mréw, sail, F. wrevocowat or -ovpar; A. érrevoa; Po. 
mérrevea; Pf. m. or p. wérrevopar; A. érredaOnv. 

avéw, blow, F. mvetcowar and odpar; A. érvevoa; Pf. ré- 
mvevea; A. p. érvevoOnv (Pf. wérviat, poet. ). 

mpiac Gat, to buy, only 2 A. em piduny @ pers. empleo, subj. 
Tpiwpalt, opt. mpiaiunv, imp. mpiaco or Tpio,: part. 
T pla [LeVvos ). | 

muv0-av-owat, inquire, 2 A. émv@ounv; Pi. mwémrvopa; F. 
_ TWevoopal, 


‘Péw, flow, FB. pevoopar ; A. éppevoa (in Att. more usu. F. 
punoopar; A. eppuny, eg Puce from stem ‘PTE-, see 
§ 90): Pt. éppunxa. 

pyy-vu-pt, rend, I. pnEw; A. éppnEa; 2 Pf. éppwya, [am rent, 
A. m. éppnEdunv; A. p. éppaynv; 2 F. p. paynoopmat. 

po-vvu-ut, strengthen, F. pwoow; A. éppwoa; Pf. m. or p. 
éppwopat (imp. éppwao, vale, farewell); A. éppwoacOnp ; 
F. p. pocdncopat. 


>Bévvv-uw, extinguish, F. cBéow: ecBeoa (trans.); 2 A. 
éaBnv ($ 90), I ceased to burn; Pf. érBnwa, + have 
ceased to burn; F.m.o8noopa; Pf.m. or p. éoBecpar; 
A. p. écBécOnv; F. p. cBecO@noomat. 

oxeda-vvv-ut, scatter, F. oxedaco, Att. oxeda, -as, -a; A. 
éoxédaca; Pf. éoxéddxa; Pf. m. or p. éoxédacpat ; 
A. p. éoxeddcOnv; F. p. cxedac@jcopat. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 107 


oxérXro, dry, A. éoxAnv (inf. cxrAjvat, opt. cxrainv (§ 90), 
intrans., to wither); Pf. éoxAnwa; F. m. sedrjoopar. 

oTrrévdo, pour libations, F. omeiow (for orévdca, § 15, 2); 
éoTreloa, éoTrelKa, €oTreto pat, etc. 

atepiaxw, deprive of; F. aotepnow; éotépnoa, éotépynxa, 
éaotépnmat, eotepnOnv, otepjoowac (more rarely otepy- 
—Onoopat). : 

otopé-vvu-m, spread out, F. oropéow (Att. ctop@); A. éoro- 
peoa. The rest from orpovvupe. 

oTpe-vvu-ut, spread out, F. otpwow, éotpwoa, éotpwxa, 
éoTpwpat, coTpoOnv, oTpwljcopmat. 


Téuva, cut, F. treuo; A. érevov (more rarely érapov); Pf. 
térunka; Pf. m. or p. Térunuar; A. p. érunOnv; A. 
m. éreuounv; F.-pf. tretunoopar (Plat.). 

tixto, bring forth, F. réEowar; A. érexov; Pf. réroxa. 

tivo, expiate, F. tiaw; érica, tétixa, TéTICMat, eric Onv. 

TiTpaw, bore, F. tpnaw; A. étpnoa.— More usu. tetpaivo, 
F, rerpavo; A. érétpnva; Pf. rétpnka, Térpnpar. 

TitpocKke, wound, F. tpdcm; étpwoa, TéTpapat, éTpwOny, 
tTpwOncopat and Tpacopmat. 

TAHmL, endure (Pres. and Impf. supplied by wtropeva, av- 
éyouat); A. étAnv (TA, TAAMNY, TAHOL, TAHVAL, TAAS) ; 
F. tAjcouat; P. tétAnKa (plur. syncop. térA ayer, -aTe, 
-dow(v), imp. TérAaM, -dtw, subj. wanting, opt. TerAainy, 
inf. rerXavat, part. TeTANK@S ). 

tpéyo, run, F. dpapotuar; A. edpduov; Pf. dedpaunca ; 
Pf. m. or p. émidedpadunua (F. OpéEouar, rare). 

tuyx-av-o, happen, A. ériyov; F. tev€ouar; Pf. rervynea. 


‘Tricy-véouat, promise, A. trecy-ounv (imp. vrecxov); 
BF. trrocynoopar; Pf. tréoynpac. 


DacKkw, say, Impf. ébackov; F. dyncw; A. ddnaa 


108 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


> 

dépw, bear, F. oiaw; 2 A. Hveyxov (plur. -oper, -ere, -ov, 
and -apev, -aTe, -av), opt. évéyxotme (rarer -atpi), imp. 
éveyxe, -€Tw, etc., and -aTw, etc., inf. éveyxetv, part. 
éveyxav (rarer évéyxas); Pf. évyvoya.— Mid., carry 
off, win, F. otcoua. Pf. m. or p. evjveypar (-yEat, 
~yeTat, or -extat); A. nveyxaunv; A. p. nvéy@nv; F. - 
éveyOnoouat (more rarely otcAjcopat), 
.yer The 1 Aor. qveyxa is preferred to the 2d Aor. in those forms of 


the imper. that begin with a, and also in the first pers. sing. 
indic., when the next word begins with a consonant. 


hetryo, flee, F. pevEowat and -oduar; A. edvyov; Pf. wrépevya. 

dnt, say (§ 84), 2 A. elrrov (elitr, etrroim, eiré [the rest 
usu. -dTw, -aToV, -aTwv, etc. |, eimretv, eiTr@v); 1 A. eirra 
(2 pers. eizras, frequent, pl. e’7rare. very frequent). 
The rest of the 1 Aor., the imperative forms begin- 
ning with a excepted, is wanting in the Attic writers. 
—F. épw; Pf. epnxa; Pf. m. or p. eipnuar; A. p. 
(stem ‘PE-) éppnOnv; F. pnOncopar and eipnoopan. 

Pbdvo, anticipate, F. dOjcouat (more rarely POdow); A. 
ép0dca; 2 A. EdOnv (f00, hOainv, POAva, b0as, 
§ 90); Pf. €p@dxa. 

dio, produce, 2 A. épov intrans., am born, am naturally (subj. 
diw, opt. wanting among the Attics, dovar, dus, § 90); 
F. dicw; A. édvoa, trans. — Pf. répv«a, intrans., am 
born, am so and so by nature ;— qdunoopar and édinv 
(hunvat, duels) are later forms for ducopat and éduv. 


Xaipw, refoice, F. yatpnow; A. éyapny (stem XAPE-), opt. 
yvapeinv, part. yapels, § 90; Pf. ceyapnna; (xeydpnuat, 
Iam glad, poet.); F. yapyjoopa: belongs to later prose. 

xvavddve, contain (of vessels), A. €yadov; F. yeioowar; Pf. 
xéyavoa, with present meaning. 

yack, gape (later yaivw); A. éyavov; F. yavopyar; Pt. 
kéynva, I stand open. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 109 


yew, pour out, F. yéw, F. m. xeopa (both like the present); 
A. exea (subj. xXew, pnp. yvéov, -aTw, inf. xe): A. m. 
évedunv ; Pf. xéyixa’; Pf. m. or p. céyipar; A. éxbOnv 
(later also éyé@nv). 
xpy, oportet, 2 2 necessary (subj. vpn, opt. ypetn, inf. 
xphvat, part. To ypewv [only nom. and acc.]); Impf. 
— eypny or “piv; I. yphora. 
ypo-vvu-ut, color, F. ypwow; A. éypwoa; Pf. m. or p. 
Kéxpwopat; A. éypwoaOnv. 


"O.0é@, push, Impf. éoGovv; F. dow and @@yow; A. woa 
(inf. @car); Pf. gwxa; F.m. aoopar; A. éwodpnr; 
Pf. m. or p. éwouar; A. p. ewaOnv; F. dc Pnoomas. 


110 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


CHAPTER VI. 
PARTICLES. 
1. ADVERBS. 


§ 96. — Most adverbs of manner are formed from adjec: 
tives, by changing the final v of the genitive plural into s; 
as, 


sopss, wise, G. pl. cop-dp, adv. cod-és. 

xaples, graceful, XaprévT-wy, Xaprévr-ws. 
Taxvs, swift, Tax é-wy, TAX é-Ws. 

cwHppwv, prudent, cwppbv-wy, owppdy-ws. 

mwas, all, TAVT-WV, TAVT-WS. 

péyas, great, peyad-wy, pmeyar-ws. 

evvous, kind, evy-wy, eVy-ws. 

capys, clear, cap-Or, cap-Os. af 


COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 


§ 97. — The comparative of adverbs of manner is gener- 
ally expressed by the neuter sing. of the comparative 
adjective; and the superlative, by the neuter plur. of the 
superlative. Thus, 


copes, wisely, TOoPwrepor, copwrara. ; 
xaptévtws, kindly, ~ Xapiéorepor, Xapiéorara. 
capos, clearly, capéorepor, capécrara. 
Taxéws, swiftly, darrov, TAX LOT. 


te Most primitive adverbs, especially those in w, have the ending w 
in the comparative and superlative ; as, 


dvw, above, dvwrépw, dvwTarw. 

KaTw, below, KAaTWTrépw,” KATWTATW. 
éxas, far off, éxaorépw, éxaoTaTw. 
TnrOov, far, TNAOT Epw, TNAOTATW. 
éyyus, near, éyyuTépw, éyyuT atu 


&yav, very much. 
del, always. 


a&AAaxov, elsewhere. 


&AdrAohk, elsewhere. 
&AAws, otherwise. 
drat, once, semel. 
avOs, again. 
avjprov, to-morrow. 
avurixa, directly. 
avrov, there. 

Bia, by force. 
Snuoola, publicly. 
elra, afterwards. 
ért, as yet, still. 
ev0ds, forthwith. 
Hon, already. 
qvixa, When. 

idiws, privately. 
ixava@s, enough. 


ADVERBS. 


List of Adverbs. 


tows, perhaps. 
Kabdrep, like as. 
Kkatw, below. 
KpvBSnv, secretly. 
Alay, very. 

pdAa, very. 
baAAov, rather. 
pddcora, Chiefly. 


MeTavpioy, perendie. 


morAts, scarcely. 
vov, NOW. 
oto, at home. 


émriow, backwards. 


ovdauov, nowhere. 


ovdauas, in no wise. 
_ovmrore, never. 


ovmw, not yet. 


_obTws, thus. 


wddat, formerly. 


111 


é6ua@s, likewise. 

6pé, late, sero. 

mdvu, Very. 

mavTehos, entirely. 
rapaxphua, forthwith. 
modAdxis, often. 
twocdks, how often ? 
mwoTé, ONCE. 

mplv, before. 

mpdow, forwards. 
mpdxGes, nudius tertius. 
mpwt, mane. 

ofuepov, to-day. 

Tote, then. 

xaual, humi. 
Xauadey, humo. 

x9és, yesterday. 

as, domep, as. 
woTavTws, JUSt SO.° 


§ 98. — ADVERBIAL CORRELATIVES. 








INTERROGATIVE, INDEFINITE, DEMONSTRATIVE, RELATIVE. 
631 ; ws Pas ‘yradda, hi : 
se pd: \ ubi ? rob, alicubi. errant a, hic. ov, ubi. 
Sirov, €xet, ibl. : 
wb6ev ; \ unde? | rodév, alicunde. | ©” hine. 8ev, unde. 
omdfev, : éxetfev, illine. 
oF A v ° 
nerd \ quo ? rol, aliquo. detpo, hue of, quo. 
trot, éxeioe, illuc. 





wire} \ quando ? 


ordre, 


TOs ; 
brrws, 
myvika; ) quo tem- 
oryvika,) pore? 








mworé, aliquando. 


\ quomodo ?| was, aliquomodo. 





mwére, tum. 


oUTWS, Woe, Sic. 


rnvxdde Yhoctem-| #vlka, quo tem- 


TNHVLKAUTA 


8re, quando. 


as, quomodo. 


pore. pore. 











1) The interrogatives beginning with m are used in direct questions ; 


those beginning with 6 


in indirect. 


112 _ GREEK GRAMMAR. 


II. PREPOSITIONS. 


§ 99. — Some prepositions govern only one case; others 
two cases; and others again, three. 


GENITIVE. 
ayvt{, for (= in place of, in exchange for). 
amd, ab, from; ag’ éautov, of his own accord. 
éx (€f), out of; é« waliwy, from very childhood. 
apd, for (=in behalf of), before (= in front of, in preference to). 


DATIVE. 
év (rest where ?), in, upon; among, ©.g., év avOpdmoas. 
atv, cum, with. 

ACCUSATIVE. 


avd (more frequent in poetry), up to, throughout. 
eis (Motion whither ?), into; against ; till (of time). 
&s, ad, to (only of persons ; €.g., méumew ws Baciréa). 


GENITIVE and ACCUSATIVE. 


ia per, through, during (of time and place). 


did Acc. ob, propter, on account of. 


4 Bors down to or under ; against, €.g., Aéyew . Tivos. 
KaT . ° ° 
: acc. according to, opposite to, during. 


4 GEN. among, with, by means of. 
ai tee post, after, neat to (of time and order). 


nye GEN. above (where?) ; for (= for the good of). 
nel pes over (whither ?); beyond (of time, measure, number). 


GENITIVE, DATIVE, ACCUSATIVE. 


DAT. at, near, by (of place) ; in the power of (penes). 


GEN. upon, at (of place) ; in, during (of time). 
emt 
ACC. motion upon, as avaBalvew ép’ trmor. 


DAT. apud, with, near by, @.g., elvar mr. TY Bacirei. 


GEN. ab, from near a person, with verbs of going and coming. 
mapa 
acc. ad, to (w..ither?); against, e.g., w. Sétav, pia, etc. 


DAT. for, esp. with verbs of fearing (timere alicui). 


- (GEN. about, concerning, for (= on account of). - 
rept 
acc. circa, around ; about (of time and number). 





1) In poetry also with the dative, in sense of among, with, where in 
prose éy and ovv are used. 
2‘. Used mostly with reference to persons. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 113 


GENITIVS, DATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, — continued. 


DAT. Near, &.g., zpds TH wéAes; mpds ToUTY, besides. 


GEN. from, by (with passive verbs, in place of 1d). 
mpos 
ace. to (with verbs of motion), towards, against. 


DAT, under (rest, subjection), at the foot (of mountains). 


GEN. under (rest), du (with pass. verbs), from, for (prae). 
ind 
ee under (motion), towards (of time, e.g., trd vinra). 


Nore 1,—The preposition au¢i, around, on both sides, agrees in its 
use with rep{, around, on all sides» Hut the use of api is much rarer 
then that of wept. 


Norr 2. — Besides the above-mentioned prepositions, there are several 
adverbs and nouns that are sometimes construed with either the genitive 
or dative and are, therefore, called improper prepositions. The following 
are construed with the genitive : 


" wéoav, Across. 
wAhy, except. 
npse0ev, before. 
xap-v. for the sake of. 
xepia without. 


eveka, On account of. 
tiw, out of. 

meraku, between. 
mexpi(s), up to, until. 
bmibe(v), behind. 


&Ais, enough. 
tivev, without. 
dienv, instar. 
eyyts, near. 
éxds, Jar from. 


“Aua, together with, and rAnctoy, near, are construed with the dative ; ~ 
méAas, near; és and épetfs, next to, with both the dative #n/ genitive. 


III. ConsuNctions. 


§ 100. — The following are some of the Conjuvestions 
most in use: 


aAAd, but. éws, while, till. bre, when. 

ydp, for. R, or, than. b71, because. 

yoor, therefore. tva, that (ut). ob unv GAAd, tamen. 
dé, but. ralrep, although. evde-ovd¢, neither, ne~ 
didi, because. kairo, and yet. obv, therefore. 

édv, if. kay, even if. was &y, utinam ! 

éav wh, unless. méevros, yet, however. re (enclit.), and. 

ei, if. bh, not (ne). rovydp, therefore. 

e(Oe, utinam | unde, nor. Tovyapouv, wherefore. 


efre-elre, sive-Ssive. 


émel, since. 
éreidh, since. 
I 


duws, nevertheless. 
brws, that (ut). 
dtav, whenever. 


tolvuy, therefore. 


as, in order that. 


éore, so that. 


114 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


SYNTAX. 


—-oe— 
CHAPTER I 


THE Four CONCORDS: 


I. OF THE FINITE VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 


Ev €yo. 


§ 101. — Every finite verb agrees with its nominative in 
number and person; as, J am well. 


A wicked man is unhappy. "Avip tovnpds Sustux el. 
The Athenians fought bravely. | Of ’A@nvato. kad@s éuaxéoarTo. 


Nore 1.— A collective noun sometimes takes a verb in the plural; e.g., 
The multitude brought assistance; 7d wAj00s éereBohOnoavy. The army 
withdrew; 7d orpardredov avexwpour. 


Norr 2.— Two nouns in the singular, as well as a nominative in the 
dual, frequently have a verb in the plural, instead of the dual; e.g., A fox 
and a he-goat, impelled by thirst, went down into a well; ara@mnt rat tpa- 
yos Supavres eis ppéap xaréBynoay. The two armies withdrew ; dtw orpara 
avexapnoar. 


Nore 3.— A nominative in the neuter plural is generafly joined to a 
verb in the singular; as. Animals run; +a Q@a tpéxet. The chariots fled ; 
Ta dpudra tpevye. How is this to end? rés radra matoerat. 


Nore 4.— When there are several nominatives singular, the verb is 
generally put in the plurai; and when the nominatives are of different 
persons, the verb agrees with the first person rather than the second, and 
with the second rather taan the third; e.g., A lion, an ass, and a fox, 
went out hunting; A€ewv nal dvos Kal GrAdmnk EFHAPov mpds &ypav. You and 
I were writing: eye nal ob éypdpomer. 


THRE FOUR CONCORDS. 115 


Il. OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH ITS SUBSTANTIVE. 
"Avynp ayabds. 
§ 102. — Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, 
agree with their substantives in gender, number, and 
case; e.g., A good man. 


We hate a blab. Kwtidov &vOpwmrov uiocodmer. 
The Greeks were very warlike. | Of “EAAnves woAcuikorarot hoav. 


Note 1.— When an adjective refers to an infinitive or a whole clause, 
it is put in the neuter singular, and not unfrequently in the neuter plural, 
especially when it is a verbal adjective in -rés or -réos; e.g., Friends are 
to be trusted; mord éoti Tuts pikas. It is impossible to escape death ; aév- 
vata €ort Toy OdvaTov aroguyety. 


Nore 2,— When an adjective or participle belongs to several substan- 
tives, the rules of concord are the same as in Latin; e.g., When he saw his 
Father and mother and his own wife made prisoners, he wept ; as «lie ratépa 
Te kal unrépa nal Thy éavrov yuvaika aixuadwrous yeyevnucvous, eddxpucer. 
Stones, bricks, timber, and clay, when thrown together confusedly, become 
useless ; AtOor Kal wAtvOor Kat EdAa Kal Képapos atdxTws eppiyupméva, ovdey xpT- 
od €oTLy. 


Norr 3.— When a general idea or statement is expressed, the adjective 
is put in the neuter singular, the word zpayua (‘‘thing’’) being under- 
stood ; e.g., Virtue is something beautiful; kardbv 7H aperh. Changes are 
a sad thing ; ai weraBoAal Avanpdr. 


Notre 4.— When a demonstrative or interrogative pronoun is joined to 
a following substantive, by means of efva: or a verb of naming, deeming, 
seeming, it generally agrees with that substantive in gender, number, and 
case; e@.g., This is the source and origin of all evils (Lat. hic fons est atque 
origo omnium malorum) ; atryn éott mnyh Kart apxh mavTwv Tey kak@v (More 
rarely tovtTé éotw 7h wnyh, K.T.A.). 


Ill. OF THE RELATIVE WITH ITS ANTECEDENT. 
‘O avnp, ov eEldes. 

§ 103.—The relative agrees with its antecedent in 
gender, number, and person; but the case depends on the 
construction of its own clause; e.g., The man whom you 
saw. 

Che soldiers against whom we | Of orpati@ra ois éuaxeoducda, 


fought, were very brave. avipedrato. hoav. 
12 


116 | GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Note 1.— When the relative by means of civa: or a verb of naming, 
deeming, seeming, is joined to a substantive of a different gender from 
that of its antecedent, it may agree with either; e.g., The constellation 
which is called the Goat; 1d &orpov hv (Or d) Alya nadovtow; Lat. Sidus 
quam (or quod) Capram vocant. 


Nore 2.— The antecedent is often put in the relative clause in the same 
case with the relative; as, This is the man whom you saw ; obrbs éoriw dp 
eldes &vdpa. Ihave no friend whom I can trust; od xw Stim mictredoa: 
ay Suvatuny olrw. 


IV. OF ONE SUBSTANTIVE WITH ANOTHER. 
Ktpos, 0 Bacawdevs. 


§ 104.— A noun used to explain a preceding noun or 
pronoun and designating the same person or thing, is put, 
by apposition, in the same case; e.g., Cyrus, the king. 


Cyrus marches to Colossi, a | Kipos éfeAatve: cis Kodoccots, 
populous and large city. TOALY Oikovuerny Kal meydAny. 


THE ARTICLE. 117 


CHAPTER II. 


I. THe ARTICLE. 


‘O avOpwrros. 


§ 105. — The article is used when a substantive repre- 
sents an object as a definite one, or when it represents 
a whole class, or is contrasted with another substantive. 
K.g., The C.e., a certain, particular) man. 


Man is mortal. ‘O &vOpwros Ovnrds eoriv. 
Terra jida est, mare infidum. Tordy 7 yn, &wiorov 7 OdAarra. 


Dépe To BiBrrov. 


§ 106. — The article is often used in place of a possessive 
pronoun, and also when the speaker points to an object ; 
e.9., Bring (me) the (i.e., THAT) book. 


Cyrus put on his breast-plate. Kipos rov Odpaka évédv. 
Parents love their children. Oi yoveis ra Téxva orépyouct. 


LwKparns edn. 


§ 107.— The names of nations and countries are used 
both with and without the article. — The names of persons 
usually stand without the article; but when they have 
been already mentioned and are afterwards referred to, 
or when they are to be designated as well-known and dis- 
tinguished, they take the article. E.g., Socrates satd. 


Alexander conquered the Per- | *AAégavdpos évixnoe rots Mépcas. 
sians. 

The Thebans defeated the | ’Evlxnoay @nBatoi Aaxedasmovious. 
Lacedzmonians. 


118 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Otros 6 avyp, and 6 avyp obros. 

§ 108. — When adros (self), odTos, 65, exeivos, ddos, Tas 
(whole), dupw and apdotepos (both), are joined to a sub- 
stantive, the latter regularly takes the article, the words 
autos, etc., being then piaced either before or after the 
article and its substantive; e.g., This man. | 


This opinion. | “Hoe h yvdun OY 7 youn Hoe. 
Both hands. “Aupw Tw XEMpe OF TH X. Kuo. 


Norte 1.—Tlas, in the sense of each, every, pl. all, takes no article ; as, 
was &vOpwros, eVery MAN; wava w5dis, every City ; wdvres &vOpwres, all men. 
—JIn the sense of whole, it takes the article, when the whole is considere& 
in opposition to its parts (ads, in this case, is emphatic) : as, 9 méou méAcs 
or réAis  waoa, the whole city. Maca % wéAus OF 7 WdAIS Tage, MEAT»; 
simply ‘‘the whole city,’? without emphasis, — and this is the more usual 
construction. 

Ids, without the article, when joined to a numeral, marks an exact 
number: as, évvéa rdrres, nine in full (no less). With the article added | 
to a numeral, it denotes the English in all, altogether ; e.g., He reigned 
in all twenty years; éBaciAevce Ta mdvta elxoow Eryn. ‘They captured tn 
all 200 triremes; rprfpes efAov tas wdoas Siakoclas. They sent a thousand 
infantry in all; freuay xAlous tobs mavtas émAiras. 


Norr 2.—Avrés preceded by the article means ‘‘the same’’ (idem) ; 
as, dards avip, the same man; 6 adtds Baoideds, the same king (but aids 
6 Brotreys OF 6 Bactreds adtds = the king himself ). 

“AXAos Without the article means another; with the article (of @Adoz), 
the rest. Thus, &AAn xép2, another country ; but 7 &AAn xHpa, the rest of 
ihe country ; 4 &\An “EdAas, the rest of Greece. —TloAAoi means many; of 
wodAol, the multitude, populace. 


» 
Oi rote avOpwrrou. 


~§ 109. — The article is often prefixed to adverbs of time 
and place, which thus acquire an adjective or substantive 
meaning; e.g., Zhe men of that time. 


The excessive joy. ‘H &yav xapd. 
‘The reigning king. ‘O viv Bacireds. 


Thus, 7 ave modus, the upper city ; of wadat cohol, the 
wise of old; ai wéAas xOmat, the neighboring villages ; 


THE ARTICLE. 115 


0 wetaév romos, the intervening place; ot évOdde avéopes, 
the men of this place. — The article sometimes stands alone 
without a substantive, and sometimes with participles; as, 
of vov (sc. avOpwrot dvtTes), our contemporaries; ot év 
adore, the people in the city; ot ctv Bactrel, the king’s 
suite; of wept IAdtwvos, Plato with his scholars; ta tov 
Tmatowv, the customs of boys ;— ot éyovrtes, the wealthy ; ot 
Aeyortes, the speakers; 0 mpatT@y Ta THS méehews, one who 
conducts the affairs of the state, a statesman. 


‘O ayabos avy p or oO avn p O aryabos. 

§ 110.—1. When an attributive (i.e., an adjective, an 
adjective pronoun, a noun in the genitive, an adverb, or a 
preposition with its case) is added to a substantive having 
the article, so as to form but one idea with it, the attribu- 
tive either stands between the article and the substan- 
tive, or is placed after the substantive with the article 
repeated when the attributive is to be made prominent. 
The emphasis, in this case, is on the attributive. E.g., 
Lhe GOOD man (in opposition to the BAD man). | 


The age of the boy. ‘H Tov maidds HAikia OY H HAtkla 
N TOU TaLdds. 

The men of our time. Oi viv &vOpwroa OY of avOpwra 
oi vuv. 

The Persian war. ‘O mpbs rovs TMeépoas méAepuos 
or 6 méAeuos 6 mpds Tous 
Tl€poas. 





2. But when the emphasis is on the governing substan- 
tive, or when the accompanying adjective is to be regarded 
‘as the predicate of an abridged subordinate clause, the 
attributive without the article is placed either after or 
before the article and its substantive. E.g., A good man is 
happy, i.e., a man who is (because or inasmuch as he is, 
if he is) good ; 6 avnp ayabds or ayabos o avnp. 


120 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


The age of the boy. "H HAikia TOW waldd. OY TOU mM 
dds » NAtkla. 
The Athenian people. ‘O Bjuos “AOnvatwy OL ’AOnvalwy 
6 djmos. 
The Persian war. ‘O mwéAcuos mpds Tlépoas OY mpds 





Tlépoas 5 wéAcuos. 


IJ. THe NEGATIVE PARTICLES Ove AND M7. 
Ovx oida. 


§ 111.— Od (as well as its compounds ovd¢, ove, ovdess, 
ovdauas, ovdézrore, etc.) denies absolutely ; e.g., I know not. 


Is not, what is good, also fair? | Ov nal Kaddy éori 7d dyaddv ; 
That may not happen. Tavra ovk by yiyvoiro. 


Nore. Ov stands (1.) in all direct statements whether expressed by 
the indicative or optative ;— (2.) in clauses with 67: and ds (that), after 
verbs sentiendi and declarandi ; — (3.) in clauses denoting the time, cause 
or consequence of a state or action, with such conjunctions as dre, é7el, 
éredh, etc., when, after; 871, didri, wel, etc., because since, and &sre, so 
that, with either the indicative or optative ;— (4.) in relative clauses, in 
which the relative does not include any accessory idea of condition or pur- 
pose ; — (5.) in simple direct questions, which require the answer yes ; e.g., 
You will do this, will you not ? od Spaces TovTo; OF ap’ ov Spdceis TodTO; 


> a > ‘A ‘ vA 
Ovx Gy evdaimovoins py Kaper. 


§ 112.— M7» (as well as its compounds pnd, wAre, undeis, 
endapas, undérote, etc.) denies conditionally; e.g., You 
will not prosper without (=if you do not . . . .) toiling. 


May this not happen ! | M) TrovTo yévorro ! 
Raise no tumult, friends. My SopuBhanre, &vdpes. 


Norre.— M7 stands (1.) in clauses expressing a command, entreaty, warn 
ing, wish, or exhortation ; — (2.) in conditional clauses with ¢i, édy, dray, etc., 
€.2., ef uy ypdpers OF édy uh ypdons ; —(3.) in clauses expressing a purpose with 
Iva, etc. (also dws with the fut. indic.), or a consequence with ésre and the 
infinitive ;— (4.) in participial and relative clauses, when they imply a 
condition or purpose ; — (5.) in clauses denoting a repeated state or action 


THE CONJUNCTION “ THAT.”’ 121 


c* whenever,” “as often as”) whether introduced by «i édv, etc., or the rela- 
tive, or a temporal conjunction ; — (6.) in clauses that can be resolved by 
is gui with the subjunctive (=talis ut, ita comparatus ut) ;——(7.) in simple 
direct questions, which expect the answer no ; e.g., You will not do this, 
will you ? wh Spdceis TovTo OY dpa wy 8. r.; — (8.) M7 regularly stands with 
the infinitive. But after the verbs gyul, axotw, doxéw, vout(w, ofoua, and 
broAauBdvw (more rarely after other verbs of thinking and saying), ov is 
commonly used: yet when these verbs are in the imperative, uj must 
stand ; e.g., Know that in human affairs nothing is stable; vduice under 
elva: Tov avOpwrivwv BéBaov. 


Ovx €otw ovder. | 
§ 113.— Two or more negatives strengthen the nega- 


tion, if they belong to the same verb; e.g., There is 
nothing (= there is not anything). 


No one has ever done this. Ovrn érolnoe TovTO ovdéroTe ovdels 
He will never doanything noble. | Ovdév uéya ovdémore Spaces. 


He cannot either speak well of, | Od d¥vara ot’ eb Adyew, ott 
or benefit anybody in any way. ed moiety ovdauas ovdéva. 





Note 1.— When in an English negative sentence such indefinite pro- 
nouns and adverbs as any one, anywhere, ever, etc., occur, they must 
be rendered by their corresponding negatives. 


Nore 2.— Ov uy, used interrogatively with the 2 pers. of the future 
indic., is equivalent to a strong prohibition ; e.g., ob uh cxdWers; don’t scoff, 
T tell you (iit. will you not-scoff ?).— Od uh Anphoes ; don’t talk nonsense. 

But without interrogation, with any person of the future, and more com- 
monly of the aorist subj., od u7 denotes a strong denial; e.g., robs rovnpods 
ov unmote BeATtiovs roinoets, — nO, never will you make the wicked better. Ov 
uy -yéevnta rovTo, this certainly will not happen, Lat. non (vereor) ne hoc fiat. 


III. THe ENGLISH CONJUNCTION “ THAT.” 


§ 114.— The English conjunction THAT is variously 
rendered in Greek, as by iva, é1ras, ws, @ste, 67. — Often, 
THAT is not expressed at all, and then the accusative with 
the infinitive is used, as in Latin. 


Podde Ons. 
§ 115. —1. “Iva, draws, and ws (“in order that”), are 
used when a purpose is expressed. They stand with the 


122 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


subjunctive when a principal tense precedes, and with the 
optative (but never the optative future+), when an histor- 
ical tense precedes. E.g., I write that you may come. — 
(I wrote that you might come ; éypawa iv’ &Gois.) 


He explored the whole country, 
that no one might escape. 


You have come at the right 
time to hear the trial. 





Ainpevvfoaro 5& wagay Thy x@&- 
pay, va wndels dropiyo.. 


Eis xaipby Hees Srws rhs Blens 
akovons. 


2. “Orrws (67rws pn) is used esp. after verbs signifying 
to beg, to care, to exhort, to advise, to consider, to incite, to 
strive, to effect. It stands with the subj. or opt., accord- 
ingly; and very often with the future indic., after histor- 
ical as well as principal tenses. — The verb before 67a; 
must sometimes be supplied; e.g., Take care lest you be 
beaten to death; dirws arode pwactiyovmevos, supply dpa or 
rovto mparre before d7ras. 

Show yourselves worthy of 
liberty. 


They endeavored to obtain 
help. 


“Orws eAevbeplas tw Ereade. 


"Emparrov drws BohOerd Tis Hiet. 


3. “Oste (so that) is used when a consequence is expressed. 
It stands most frequently with the infinitive, but also with 
the indicative, when the consequence is to be represented 
as a fact, as something actually accomplished. E.g¢g., 


He was very courageous, so as 
to hazard everything. 


"Avdpedraros hv sre mdvra 


nivduvevoa. 
He did not return the next day, 


so that the Greeks began to 
be anxious. 


Kal eis wey thy torepalay ody 
hrev, 0 of “EAAnves édpdv: 
rior. 





Nore. — When it is stated that the consequence would take place under 
@ certain condition (§ 155, 2), the indicative of the historical tenses is used 
with ay; but when the subordinate clause expresses a mere conditioned 
supposition (§ 155, 4), the optative with ay is used. 





1) We read, however, in Xen. Cyr. 8. 1, 43: éwewedciro & Onws Mare 
&ovrot, uhre Grorol wore Ecowro. 


THE CONJUNCTION “ THAT.” . 123 


4. “Or and ws (that) are used after verbs of feeling and 
declaring. They stand with the indicative, when the sub- 
ordinate clause is to be represented as something certain, 
as a fact (particularly after a preceding pres., perf. or 
fut.), and with the optative, when the statement of the 
subordinate clause is to be viewed as the opinion not of the 
writer, but of the person spoken of. — E.¢., Jt was announced 
that Megara revolted ; nyyéXOn ott Méyapa adéornxer. 


They said that bears had de- | Of 8 @arcyov Sr tera mor- 





stroyed many that had ap- Ao’s Hdn mAnoidoavras bie- 
proached them. POeipar. 

Coeratades said that he was | Koiparddns @reyev Sri éromos etn 
prepared to conduct them. nyetcOat avrois. 

Tissaphernes brought an accu- | Ticapépyns SiaBddAde (histor. 
sation against Cyrus before present) roy Kipov mpds rdv 
his brother, (saying) that he aderApdr, @s éwiBovAevot 

was plotting against him. avrg. 


5. My (in the sense of that) and mu ov (in the sense of 
that not) are used after verbs of fearing with either the 
subjunctive or optative, according as a principal or an 
historical tense precedes. The subjunctive, however, not 
unfrequently stands even after historical tenses; e.g., The 
Athenians were afraid lest the allies should revolt; oi 
"A@nvaiot tovs Evppayous ededieray wn atrocTacwy. 


I fear (that) they will revolt. Agdoika wy arocraov, 
I feared lest they should revolt. | ’Ededolxew uh arocratev. 


I fear he will not come. PoBovuar uh ovK ErOn. 
I was afraid he would not come. | ’E@oBovunv uh od tAOou. 





Note 1. — When a completed action is referred to, uh and py od take 
the perfect indicative: as, I fear he is dead, dédoKna wh réOvnnev. I fear 
we have failed in everything, poBodua ph mdvtwy jnuapthKapey. 


Nore 2.— Verbs signifying to fear, to be anxious or uncertain, to doubt, 
to distrust, to deny, to hinder, to forbid, to oppose, to prohibit, are gener- 
ally followed by the infinitive with 47, and when a negative, or any word 
equivalent to a negative, precedes, by the infinitive with wy od. — MA and 
zy ov are then not expressed in English. Thus, 


24 


I forbid you to do this. 
Nothing prevents you from do- 
ing this. 


- You will not deny that you are 
my brother. 


Socrates dissuaded the Athe- 
nians from doing anything 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


KwAvw oe wy TavTa To-iy 
Obdev KwAver oe Mu} OV T. 7. 


Ovx by ekapvos yévoio ph ovK 
euds adeAdds elvan. 


Swkparns jvavTiw0n "AOnvatous 
endey movety mapa Tovs vouous. 





against the laws. 


lV. THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE INFINITIVE. 


§ 116.— The conjunction THAT is often left untrans. 
lated, as in Latin, and then the construction of the accusa- 
tive with the infinitive takes place. 

Olver nuas apapretv. 

The accusative with the infinitive is used: 

1) After verbs sentiendi and declarand: ; 

2) After the impersonals 6e?, must, ought ; mpézet, mpos. 
niet, it ts becoming ; Soxei, it seems; e&earwv, it is allowed, 
it 7s possible; cvpBaive, it happens; réyerat, it is said ; 
ayyérreTat, it ts announced; omoroyetra, it is granted ; 
emruekés (Kader, dixaiov, Kaxov) éotw, it is fair, it is Just, 
etce.; e.g., You think (that) we have erred ; putas nos errasse. 


I believe that the good are | Noul(w rods ayabo’s edSamo- 





happy. VEIV. 

They say that the earth is a | bao) rhy yijv opaipay eiva. 
sphere. 

They announced that Cyrus | "HyyeAav tov Kipov uxjoa. 
conquered. 

It happened that the king was | suvéBn roy BaciAéa wapelvas. 
present. 


Norte 1.— The impersonals Aéyera:, ayyéAAeral, Swodoyeirat, SoKe?, cuu- 
Balver, dixaudy (&&idv, duvardy, etc.) éori, and rogovTou Set With the infinitive 
followed by ésre with either the infinitive or indicative (tantum abest ut — 
ut), are often construed personally. E.g., ayyéAAovras of *AOnvato: wuKjoa 
Or ayyéAAeTau TOUS ’AOnvatouvs vikoat.— Alkaidv éorl we TovVTO A€yewv OF Sixaids 
cit TOVTO A€yew.—’Emldotdv éort Sti Td avTd weisducba OY éwidotdsv eort Huas 
T) avTd weicecOat OF eridokol éouev Td adTd TeicecOu, it is probable that we 
shall suffer the same. — Tocovrou Séovow dOupeiv, Sste kal waddAov xalpovary, 
so far are they from desponding that they rather rejoice. 


QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS. 125 


Notr 2.— When the subject of the subordinate clause is the same as that 
of the leading clause, the accusative of the personal pronoun is generally 
omitted. E.g., ofouar auaprety, credo (me) errasse ; ote: auapteiv, putas (te) 
errasse ; olovtat auapreiv, putant (se) errasse. ‘O’AdAétavdpos pacev eivat 
Ads vids, Alexander dicebat (se) esse Jovis filium. Kpotoos évduiCev etvas 
mdvtwy dABimratos, Croesus (se) omnium foriunatissimum esse putabat. 

The accusative of the personal pronoun, however, is expressed, when 
there is any special emphasis or contrast; e.g., Kpoicos évduiCev éaurdv 
elvat mavtTwy dABiOTaToY. 


sar After verbs sentiendi and declarandi, instead of the acc. with the 
inf., the conjunctions 67: and ws are frequently used (§ 115. 4). 


V. QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS. 


§ 117. — There are two kinds of questions: simple and 
double. 

A simple question is one that consists of one member 
only; e.g., Did I do right ? 

A double question is one that consists of two or more 
members connected disjunctively by or; e.g., Did Ido right 
or wrong 2 

Both simple and double questions are either direct or 
endurect. 

A question is said to be direct, when it asks positively, 
that is, when it does not depend on any word or phrase 
going before; as, Did I do right? Did Ido right or wrong ? 

A question is said to be indirect, when it depends on 
some preceding word or phrase, such as to ask, to doubt, to 
see, to consider, to know, to try, it matters, rt ts uncertain, 
and the like; e.g., J dowbt whether I did right. J know 
not whether I did right or wrong. 

In both direct and indirect questions, the indicative is 
used. — But when a question asks doubtingly, the sub- 
junctive or optative is used, according as a principal or 
historical tense precedes. ‘The English language, in this 
case, generally employs the auxiliaries may, can, shall, 
should, ete. E.g., What can we do? ti rot@pev ; — Shall 
we speak or be silent ? etrr@pev 7) ory@pev ; 

Nescio quo me vertam. | Obn Exw bro Tpdrapa. 
Nesciebam quo me verterem. Ovn elxov bro TpaToluny. 


126 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


(Simple Questions.) 
Ila@s exes ; 


§ 118. — Simple questions, both direct and indirect, are 
introduced : 

a) By the interrogative pronouns and adverbs ris, quis? 
wrotos, qualis? mdcos, quantus? oats, quotus? mroTepos, 
uter? mndikos, how old? srodédazes, of what country ? 7s, 
ay, how ? rod, where ? voi, whither ? wé@ev, whence ? sére, 
when? cood«is, how often? ré, dua ri, why? ri yap, what 
then? (tz In indirect questions, the forms beginning with 
0, aS OSTLs, OTrOLOS, OTFdGOS, 7rws, etc., are generally used); 

b) By the interrogative particles 7, 7 yap, apa, apa ye 
pov, etc. —E.g., How are you? 

Do you not admire Socrates ? 7Ap’ ov Saud (ers Toy Swxpdry ; 
Did you plant any of these ? 7H yap od TovT@y Ti épurevoas ; 


I wonder how this happened. @avud(w bmws TovTo éyéveTo. 
I know not who has done this. | Ovn ofda Sstis Tatra Empatev. 





Note 1.—’*Apa, like the Latin ne, simply asks for information; e.g., 
Would you tell me? apd wor €eAhoas &v eireiv (SC. ef ve epwrg ny) ; 

*Ap’ ov is the Latin nonne and expects the answer YES. "Apa uf, on the 
contrary, always expects the answer NO; €.g., dpa uh voces; you are not 
sick, are you ? NO. 

‘In simple indirect questions od stands with e/, whether ; eg., Say whether 
you erred not in telling this; Aé€tov ei ody Huaptes Tada A€gas. 

The particles od and uf are often used as interrogatives without dpa, 
the former expecting the answer yes, the latter the answer no; e.g., Do 
you not wesh to go ? (Ans. yes) ob e0éreis igvar;— You will not punish 
me, will you ? (Ans. NO) uh me Koddon; 


age The interrogative uf often occurs in indirect questions in the sense 
of whether not, after expressions of fear and anziety, of inquiring and 
considering ; °.g., I am considering whether it be not best for me to be 
silent ; ppavtilw wh xpatiotoy F moe ovyav. 


NoTE 2. — Méy (the Latin num) always leads one to expect a negative 
answer, especially in connection with wf. But when od is added to it 
(uév ov), the question is affirmative (= nonne ?). 

In indirect questions the simple relatives (§ 39) are sometimes used 
instead of the indirect interrogatives. Thus és for dsris, ofos for doios, 
daos for éréaos, etc. 


QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS. 127 


Nore 3.—”AAAo tm % (properly &AAo re orw 4H, ‘‘does anything else 
happen than’’), or simply &AAo r: (without #), stands for nonne; e.g., 
Will they not suffer hunger ? taro tt } rewvhoovow; Do not the avaricious 
love gain? Ado Tt odv of ye pidoKepdeis pirodar Td Képdos ; 

In Attic, questions are frequently introduced by ri uaédéy and rf waddv, 
in the sense of why ? €.g., rl wabav rovro éroincas; what reason had you 
for acting thus (more lit., ‘* where could you have learnt to do so’’) ? — 
tl ra0dvtes TOUTO eroimoare; What came upon you that you did this (what 
tempted you to do this) ? 


(Double Questions.) 
, ¥ 3 a SA e ? 
Ilorepov akwv ove 1H EKov ; 


§ 119.— In double questions, both direct and indirect, 
the first member is introduced by aérepov (also n. pl. 
morepa), the second by 7. (IIdrepov in the first member 
is sometimes omitted.) — E.g., Is he doing wt willingly or 
unwillingly 2 


Do you doubt whether these | Tatra amopeis mérepov ribxns 
things are the result of H yvduns Epya éorty; 
chance or of reason ? 


Can he please nobody or are | Idrepa 5é ovder! dpécas Sévarat, 
there some whom he does } tarw ofs apéonn; 
please ? 





Norts. — Double questions, if direct, are sometimes introduced by dpa 
—4; if indirect, by ei — # or efre — efre. 

The English or not, in the second member of indirect double questions, 
is expressed by # od as well as by 9 pf. 


"H dépas tov yépovra ; — ‘Opa. 


§ 120. —The answers YES and NO are variously ex- 
pressed. 

The anywer YES: 1) By vai, vy Tov Ata, kai pevour, 
Tau, éywye, TAS yap ov ;—2) by repeating the emphatic 
word. 


128 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


The answer NO: 1) By oi, od dnpl, ovdK eyo, ovdapuas, ot 
pa Ata, etc.; —2) by repeating the emphatic word with a 
negative placed before it. — E.g., Do you see the old man? 
— TI do. 


Are these men enemies, grand- | *H ofto1, & mame, roA€utol eict; 
father ? — Yes, certainly. — TloAgmiot meévro.. 


You do not wish to become an | *Apa py apxiréxtwy BovAer yeve- 
architect, do you ? — No. Oat; — OdK &ywrye. 





Norr. — The interrogative particle is often wholly omitted, the em- 
phatic word being then placed first, especially if it be a negative. Some- 
times, vice versa, there are in the same sentence two or even more 
interrogatives without being connected by «al; e.g., ris Tivos atrids éori; 
who is guilty and (guilty) of what ?—’Ek« riihe tls éyévero; Who is he and 
trom whom descended ? 


SUBSTANTIVES. 128 


CHAPTER III. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


Ta tov “Ayidd\éws Oma. 


§ 121.— Any substantive which answers to the question 
whose? or of whom or what? asked in connection with 
another substantive, is put in the genitive; e.g., The arms 


of Achilles. 


Initium sapientiae timor Do- | ’Apxyh coptas péBos Kuplov. 
I admire the wisdom of Soc- | @avud(w Swxpdrovus thy codtar. 
rates. 


IIdcov d.dacKe ; 


§ 222.—A substantive denoting the price of a thing, — 
the material of which a thing is made,—or the part by 
which something is seized, is put in the genitive; as, What 
are his terms (lit., how much does he teach for)?—A pillar 
made of brass, oTnrAn YadrkKov TreTrolnuevn. 


The gods sell all things for | Of @c0l trav mévev mdvta mwdA- 


toil. ovow. 
He caught the pigeon by the | Mrépiyos thy mepitepay eAa- 
wing. Bev. 


Aw@ arreBave. 
§ 123.—A substantive denoting the cause, manner, or 


instrument of an action, is put in the dative; e.g., He died 
of hunger. 


He beat the ass with a stick. ‘PdBdw Toy voy émdratev. 
All was done with great care. MeydAn onovdh mavta empatrerto. 
* | 


{30 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Lvpos THY TaTpioa. 


§ 124.—A substantive limiting the meaning of another 
substantive (verb, or adjective) to some particular part or 
circumstance, is usually put in the accusative, more rarely 
in the dative; e.g., A Syrian by birth Clit. as to his country). 


The youth is sound in mind. Neavlas tas ppévas byiaiver. 
Hercules was large in person. ‘HpakaAjjs 7d cGpa peyas Hv. 


Aéxa oradtous QTE EL. 


§ 125.—A substantive denoting measure or distance, is 
put in the accusative; e.g., He is ten stadia distant. 


"Ameixe Tpi@y nuepav Oddv. 
Aéka mé5as GAAHAwY Sietxov. 


He was three days’ journey off. 
They stood ten feet from one 
another. 





Notr. — The extent of space how long, how wide, how high, how deep, 
is usually expressed by the substantives pijxos, edpos, mdxos, twos, Bdbos, 
with efva: and the genitive of the extent, or with éyw and the accusative ; 
e.g., The garden is three stadia long ; rod xhmov rd uAKos éor) (amounts 
$0) rpi@v otadlwy, OY’ 6 KAmos Td uAKos (in Or as to) éor) tpidv oradiwy, OF 
5 Khwos Exe Tpets oTadlovs (also n. tpla orddia) Td wAKos. 


Hapyy tH tpirn nuEpe. 
§ 126.—A substantive denoting the time when, if definite, 
is put in the dative; if indefinite, in the genitive; e.g., 
fe arrived on the third day. 


The next day they called the | Tf torepala rhy Bovartp éxddrour. 
council. 

They hunt both summer and | Kat Oépous nal xemadvos Onpaawv. 
winter. 


Notre 1.— The time how long is usually put in the accusative ; ¢.g., 
There he remained a long time (five days— three months —two years — 
during the whole of that day) ; évrat@a mapéuewe wordy xpdvov (wévte ic 
pas—tpeis ufvas— dio érmy—rabrny Thy juepav). Ge Tadbrns THs hucpas 
would signify indefinitely ‘‘some time in the course of that day ;’”’ and 
TavTy TH Huepa, definitely, ‘‘on that particular day.’’ 


SUBSTANTIVES. 181 


Nore 2.— The English old is expressed either by eiva: with the genitive 
of the years, or by yéyova with the accusative, or by a numeral adjective 
in ns; €.g., He died thirty years old, or at the age of thirty ; érav rpidkovra 
dy éredevta, — OY yeyovws etn TpidxovTa éreAevTa (natus triginta annos), — 
or Tpiaxovtaérns (Att. contr. rpiaxovrodrns) éreActra. 


"Ev ‘Pay. 


§ 127.— The place where is put in the dative with é; 
the place whither, in the accusative with eis; and the place 
whence, in the genitive with é«; e.g., At Rome. 


This happened at Sparta. "Ev Srdptn Tovro éyévero. 
He fled from Persia into Greece. | ’Ex Tepofdos eis “EAAdSa Epvyev. 


Norsr. — The place where is often expressed by adverbs in 6:, a6 ovpa- 
vdh, in heaven ; the place whither, by adverbs in de, ¢e, and ce, as "AOhvace, 
to or towards Athens ; and the place whence, by adverbs in dev, as OfBnber, 
trom Thebes. 


Tns abdXtas modews ! 


§ 128.— In exclamations of wonder and grief, the name 
of the object wondered at, etc., is usually put in the at 
tive; e.g., O the wretched city! 


O the acuteness of his wit ! Tis Aewrérnros tay ppevar ! 
Q the misfortune to be called | Tis rixns, 1d Cue KAnOjva 
hither ! Seipo | 


K2 


1382 . GREEK GRAMMAR. 


GCHAPTER .4¥; 
ADJECTIVES. 


GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 


"A€ios émaivov. 


§ 129.— Adjectives denoting knowledge, remembrance, 
worth, power, participation, fulness, and their contraries, 
govern the genitive of the thing, of which one is worthy, 
mindful, etc.; e.g., Worthy of praise. 


Life is full of cares. | Meoréy éoti 7d (hv ppovTliwr. 
Be abletocontrol your passions. | Téy émiOuuidy eyxpaths tot. 


Norsr. — To these adjectives belong also those signifying to be deprived 
of, free from, inferior to, —also many compounds of « privative, and ad- 
jectives in -1cos (derived from verbs transitive), which denote skill, fitness. 
Thus, eAevOepos pdBov, free from fear; oddevds Sevrepos Or totepos, inferior 
to no one; amratdevtos wovoixhs, ignorant of music; edxis Sicatas ovK avh- 
Koos 0eds, God is not deaf to a just prayer ; otpatnyos ropiotinds TOY émiTH- 
Selwv, a general capable of providing provisions. 


Ovdels “EAAHvov. 
§ 130.— Partitives govern the genitive of the whole; 
e.g., Wot one of the Greeks. 


Each animal has some weapon. | ‘Exdorw tov (éwv Omdov Ti éott 
Impudence is the greatest of | ‘H weylorn tav véowv avaldaa. 
maladies. 


"Opouos *AxtAdel. 


 § 1381.— Adjectives denoting usefulness, pleasantness, 
fitness, likeness, readiness, nearness, equality, facility, and 
their contraries, govern the dative; e.g., Like Achilles. 


ADJECTIVES. 133 


Good men are dear to one | ‘O dyabbs TG dyabG oiros. 


another. 
Demosthenes was useful to his | Anuoobévns xphomos jv TH ma- 
country. Tplou. 


Nore. — Here belong many adjectives compounded with ody and éyod, 
and also 6 avrds, the same; as, dudyAwtro tots Kapal, speaking the same 
language as the Carians ; wrAiwpévos rots adtots TH Kip draas, furnished 
with the same arms as Cyrus. 

Kowds, common, and taos, equal, like, measly. take the dative, but the 
genitive is found also. 


ec “ l4 3 : 4 
Hpw todeuntéov €oriv. 


§ 132.— Verbal adjectives in -réos (Lat. -dus) govern 
the dative of the agent; e.g., We must fight, Lat. nobis 
pugnandum est. 


Boni vobis imitandi sunt. Miunréo eloty buiv of aryabot. 
Tibi virtus colenda est. ’"Aoknréa éotl cor H apern. 
Mihi epistolae scribendae erant. | Tpawréa: hodv por émoroaal. 


Notes. — Verbal adjectives in -réos, derived from verbs transitive, admit 
both the personal and impersonal construction. In the impersonal con- 
struction, the object is put in the accusative, the verbal adjective in the 
neuter sing. or plur., and the verb eiui in the 3d ‘pers. Sing. 3 ; as pape éov 
éotly iuiv Tovs dyabovs, — doxytéov (or -réa) éoti co mee dpeThv, — ypawtéov 
(or -réa) Hv moe émvaroAds. 

But those derived from intransitive verbs (e.g., émOuunrtéos from émBu- 
bety Tivos, etc.) admit the impersonal construction only, and retain the 
case of the verb from which they are derived ; e.g., All must desire verre, 
mwaciw ériuunréoy (Or -téa) éorl THs dperijs. 


USE OF THE COMPARATIVE. 


Meilwv tov adeddov. 


§ 133.— When two objects are compared by 7, they are 
both put in the same 0380; -6:8., He is taller than his 
brother, welfwv éotiv i o aderpos. But when they are com- 
pared without 7, the “latter is put in the genitive. 


(34 WREEK GRAMMAR. 





A good friend is better than | Xpnudrwv xpelrrwy laos aya- 
wealth. — Ods. 

Nothing is grander than virtue. | ’Aperfs od5tv xriua cepuvd- 

TEpov. 

Alter altero capite major est. “Erepos €tépov Th Kepary mel (wv. 

Gold is better than a myriad | Xpuods xpeirrwr puplav Adyww. 
of words. 


Norr 1.— The measure by which one thing exceeds or falls short of 
another, is put in the dative ; as, Older by a year, évmavt@ mpecBbrepos ; — 
a head taller, ri xepady meifwv. — Such datives are: moadAg, much; darlye 
or uixpq@, little; tocovTe, so much; dow, how much; 8c0~—rosorrg, the — 
the (quo — eo, or quanto — tanto). Sometimes the accusatives uéya, dal- 
yov, ToAv, dgov, TocovTO, are used in the same sense. 


Nore 2. — After the comparatives mAéov, ZAarrov, uweiov, When joined to 
numerals, # can be omitted without change of construction; e.g., more 
than ten days, mAéov } déxa nucpar OY mAgov déxa Hucpat, — also mAclous } 
Séxa Huépar OY mAclous deka Tuepav. 

The particle + sometimes stands between two comparatives ; e.g., cele- 
rius quam prudentius hoc fecit ; 0arrov ) copérepov Tovro érolycer. 


Nortr 3. —The particle 7 followed by xard or mpés with an accusative, 
corresponds to the Latin guam pro with the ablative, and is rendered by 
‘*too e.g. great many... for,’’ or **in proportion to’’; e.g., More arms 
were taken than the number of dead would lead to expect, rAa rAciw } 
KaTd TOUS vEeKpoUs eANPIN. — Superhuman or above human natene, metCov 2) 
Kat’ &vOpwror. 

When followed by an infinitive with or without sre (as) before it, it 
is rendered by ‘‘ too e.g. great . .”’? with the infinitive ; as véanua petCorv 
) (sre) pépew, a sickness too great to endure or be endured. 


Norsr 4.—-The English one of the most .... is expressed by éy rots 
padAcora With the positive, or by év rots with the superlative. The rovs 
remains unchanged, whatever be the gender of the noun referred to; e.g., 
One of the greatest opponents to democracy, avyp év tots udAiwora évaytlos 
T@ dhug.— One of the most numerous fleets, év rots mAciorat viajes. 

To increase the meaning of the superlative, é71, as, door, #, are often 
added ; e.g., as soon as possible, as (or &r:) tdéxu0Ta. 


PRONOUNS 135 


CHAPTER V. 
PRONOUNS. 


1. Personal Pronouns. 


§ 134, — The nominatives of the personal pronouns (éya, 
ov, nels, etc.) as Well as the possessives are, in general, used 
only when emphases, contrast, Or persprcurty, peanitys it ; 


C.2., 


I shall go, do thou remain. "Ey pev Gren, ov bé¢ wéve. 
Parents love their children. Oi yovets orépyouc. Ta Téxva. 


Notre. —The English my (thy, his, her, aed your, their) own is thus 
xpnees s in Greek: 


My (thy, his, her) own. 

6 é“avToU (ceauvTov, éavTov OY éauTHs) warhp. 
H €uaurov (ceavrov, éavrod or éauThs) uATnp. 
Our (your, their) own. 

6 Huérepos adr ay (also 6 Huey a’T&v) martp. 


Ai 


H btperépa abrady (also 4 tudv adroy) unrnp. 
6 opérepos avt ov (better 6 éavray) ddeddpés. 


2. The Pronoun avrds. 


§ 135. — Concerning the use of the pronoun adres the 
following is to be observed : 


1) In the nominative, and when joined to a substantive 
or a personal pronoun of the first or second person, it 
means zpse, “self ;” as, avtos én, he himself said tt. 

2) In the oblique cases (not, however, at the beginning of 
a sentence, nor joined to a substantive) it is used instead 
of the simple pronoun of the third person, him, her, them. 

3) When. immediately preceded by the article, it means 
“the same” (idem); The same man, o avros avnp. 


136 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Even Socrates (Socrates him- | Adrds 6 Zwxpdrns Exdavoey. 


self) wept. 
I saw the king himself. Auréyv rov Baciréa eldov. 
They asked him to remain. "Eddéovro abrod mapamecvat. 


Norr.—Adrés is sometimes used with ordinals in the following manner: 
Aéxarns airés, he with nine others (lit., himself being the tenth).— Hevo- 
kheldes orparnyos hv wéumros avrés, Xenoclides was commander with four 
associates. 


3. The Relative Pronouns. 


§ 1386.— The relative is frequently put, by attraction, in 
the case of the antecedent, if the latter be either in the 
genitive or dative ; e.g., He remembers what he has done, 
péuryntat éxeivov Sc. Tpayuadtwov a érpakev, and by attrac- 
tion: péuvntar ov érpakev. 


I enjoy the goods I possess. "ATodatw ov éxw ayabav.} 
He set out with what force he | *Emopevero ody 7 elye Suvamet.? 
had. 


Nore 1.— This attraction takes place chiefly when the relative would 
otherwise be in the accusative, as in the foregoing examples. But with 
olos, as or such as; 8c0s and 7Xikos, as great as, the attraction takes place 
even when these relatives are in the nominative, provided the verb eiul 
occurs in the sentence. Thus the sentence: J favor such a man as you are, 
is rendered: yaplfoua dvipt rowodry ofos od ef, and by attraction (that is, 
by omitting the demonstrative ro.vrw together with the verb ef of the 
relative clause and putting ofos with the nominative ov in the case of the 
antecedent dvdpl)— xaplfouat dvipl ot col, and by transposition yapl{ouac 
oiw coi avdpl, or simply xapifoua: ofp cor. — In like manner: 


G. ép@ olov cot (dvipds), pl. olwy budy (dvdpdr). 
D. ricredw oly col (dvipl), pl. otos duty (dvdpdor). 
A. Ti ofbv ce (vipa), pl. olous duds (&vdpas). 


Sometimes an inverted attraction takes place, that is, the antecedent is 
attracted into the case of the relative, and not the relative into the case of 
the antecedent. This inverted attraction most frequently occurs with the 
phrase ovddels dsris ob (nemo non, i.e., ‘*every one’’) where écrl is omitted 





1 by transposition for drodatw dyabdv ov éxw, and this by attraction 
for drodabw dyabdv a xw.—* by transposition for éropedvero ody Suvdue G 
eixe, and this by attraction for ér. cdv Suvduec hy elxev. | 


PRONOUNS. 137 


after ovdels.— E.g., There is not one whom he did not oblige, that is, ‘‘he | 
obliged every one ;’’ ovdev! drw ovk éxaplfero, for ovdels éore btw ovK éxapl- 
gero.— Thus, 

Nom. ovdels dstis ovK older. 

Gen. ovdevds Srov ob KaTrayeng. 

Dat. ovdevt drw od Soxe?. 

Acc. ovdéva dvriva ov Nodoper. 


Notre 2.— The verb éori with wy, ofs, ovs, &, following, is equivalent to 
évlwy, éviows, évious, some. The éoré in this construction always remains in 
the 3d pers. sing. of the present indicative ; but when the relative is in the 
nominative, eiclv of is generally used instead of éorcr of. 


I remember some; éoriv wv (= éviwv) wéuvnuac. 
It seemed to some; éoruv ofs (= évious) €doker. 
He praises some; éoruv ovs (= évlous) émauve?. 


1388 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


CHAPTER VI. 


THE VERB. 
I. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
VERBS WITH TWO NOMINATIVES. 
"Ovopdlopar "ANéEavdpos. 

§ 187.— Verbs signifying to be, to become, to seem, to 
appear, to remain, and passive verbs signifying to be named, 
to be made or chosen, and to be deemed, take two nomina- 
tives, one of the subject, in answer to the question who or 
what ? placed ‘before the verb; the other of the predicate, 
in answer to the question what? placed after the verb. 
K.g., Lam called Alexander. 

Alcibiades was chosen com- | ’AAxkiBiddns npé0n orparnyss. 


mander. ‘O rorauds karetrar Evpparns. 
The river is called Euphrates. 


VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 
Méuvno ‘Opéorov. 

§ 138.—1. The genitive stands with verbs of remember- 
ing, abounding, admiring, caring, excelling ; and their con- 
traries,—also with verbs signifying to begin, to abstain, to 
be distant from, to deprive, to desvst, to desire, to despise, 


to differ from, to enjoy, to free from, to miss, and to rule. 
E.g., Remember Orestes. 


Darius reigned over Persia. Aapetos éBaclhevce r&v Tepo Gv. 
We all have missed the way, Ildvres rhs 6500 nuaprhKaper. 
Take care of the public good. Tod xowvod dyabot émripmedetobe. 
Sparta was deprived of its | Zardprn ris duvduews éorepHon. 
power. 
He made him cease his inso- | T¥s uBpews adrov eave. 
lence. 


Ket us begin all things with | Ildyrwyv egpywr adv Oew dpxw- 
God. peOa. 





eat eet 


THE VERB. 189 


Notr. — Mo0éw, to desire, and xkparéw, in the sense of to conquer, take 
the accusative. — @avud{w, to admire, is thus construed: (1) davud¢e Kd- 
pov, (2) 0 rhv copiav, (3) rhy Tod Kipou coplav, (4) & Kipoy ris copias or 
mr) rh copia, and (5) 6. Kupou ris coplas (rarely). 


Kakovpyou €oTiv. 


2. The genitive stands with eas and yiyvec@at, when 
they denote origin or possession, —and with eivar, moreover, 
in the sense of “it is a sign (the part, the duty) of,” “it 
shows, it betrays,” etc. E.g., Jt ts the characteristic of a 
eruminal. 


This becomes a wise man. Tovro éatly avipds copod. 
Messene belonged to the Lo- | Mecotyn trav Aoxpay éyévero. 
crians, 


Cyrus was the son of Mandane. | Kipos unrpds éyévero Mavdavns. 


@Povov pevyet. 


38. The genitive stands with verbs signifying to accuse, 
condemn, and acquit; to participate, to touch, to border on, 
to acquire, to strive to acquire; e.g., He is charged with 
murder. 

Do not touch the dog, boys. My Olynre, watdes, Tod Kkuvés. 


Strive, youths, after virtue. ‘Opéyerde, veaviat, ris dperis. 
They accused Socr. of impiety. | Swxpdrny aceBelas éypdavto. 


Norte. — Meréxeiv, to share in; meradiddvai, to give a share; and koww- 
veiv, to have a share of, besides the genitive of the thing, take also a dative 
of the person (rivi rivos). 


‘Akovw YwKpatous A€yovros. 


4. The genitive stands with verbs signifying to pity 
(Tia Twos), to envy (Twi Twos), to spare, to deem worthy of, 
—and with verbs of sensation, as to hear, to smell, to per- 
ceive, to understand; e.g., I hear Socrates saying. 

Agesilaus did not spare his | ’AyeotAaos od xpnudtwr épeldero. 
wealth. 
Cimon perceived the plot. Kiuwy ris émiBovajs yoddvero. 


The horses got scent of the | Of tra: tTav KauhAwy Sopporto. 
camels, } , 





140 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Nore.—’Axotw, to hear, frequently takes the accusative of the thing, 
especially when accompanied by a genitive of the person; e.g., Hear the 
counsels of the old; axovere, véor, tas TOY yepdvTwy TupBovAds. 


e a“ Q , 
Opodoyetrau Tapa TAVTWD. 


dD. The genitive dependent on td (also on apes and 
mapa), stands with passive verbs, to denote the Agent, or 
author of the passive state; e.g., Jt ts acknowledged by all. 


He was sent by the king. Tapa Tov Bacidéws enéupd9n. 
By whom was Hector slain ? ‘Yrd tivos “Extwp amr éBaver ; 


Notre. — When the Agent or cause is a thing, it is usually put in the dative 
without preposition ; e.g., The country is distressed by war and pestilence ; 
N X@pa woreum kal Aome@ méCerar. — The dative is often used even when the 
Agent is a person; e.g., It has been well said by you; xad@s A€AexTal cor. 
They managed the affairs of the state ; érpdrrero abrois Ta THs TéAEwS. 


Tov Kypiwv edpayor. 
6. The genitive may stand with any verb transitive, when 
the action does not affect the whole of a thing, but a part 


only ; e.g., They ate of the honey-combs.—Thus, to eat (of) 
flesh, éoOiew xpeav ; —to take a drink of wine, rie oivov. 


VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 


Barpayous Hv pay. 

§ 139.—1. The verb eivat in the sense of to have, takes 
the dative of the person who has, and the nominative of the 
thing which he has. Thus yiyvouas and trrdpyow. — E.¢., 
The frogs had a fight. 


Not all have the same mind. Od racw 6 adtds vovs eorw. 
My name is Alexander. "Ovoud pol éori ’AAkavdpos. 
They hadonehundredtriremes. | Tpifpers éxardy bwipxov adtois. 


, a 
TleiAov To vopo. 
t t 


2. The dative stands with verbs signifying to please, to 
Favor, to help, to trust, and their contraries,— te comand, 


Oe a eee ene ae 


THE VERB. 141 


to obey, to serve, to resist, to meet, to approach, to liken and 
compare, to threaten, and to be angry with. H.g., Obey the 
law. 
“Ouotov duolw aed meAaer. 
BonOetre, “AOnvaio, tTvis cvuupd- 

xX 01s. 


Toy Kipov ’AAetdvdpw duouor. 
Tlovesda@v €Bpimovto “Odvoce.. 


Like always draws to like. 
Aid your allies, Athenians ! 


He compares Cyrus with Alex. 
Neptune was angry with 
Ulysses. 





Nore. — The verbs aedcivy and dvvdvat, to be useful; Ocpamedew, to 
serve ; kodakevery, to flatter; BAdmrew, to hurt; adiucetv, to injure; bBpicer, 
to insult ; AwBac@a and AvuaiverOa:, to maltreat, take the accusative. 

TleiOec0a:, to obey, takes the dative; but mef@ew, to persuade, the 
accusative. 


¥ . “aA ~ 
Kvyov To Gew. 


3. The dative stands with verbs signifying to exhort, 
to reproach, to fight with, to befit, to assent to, to ayree with, 
to use, to pray to, to converse, to yield, to submit, to follow, 
to accompany. H.g., Pray to God.—It becomes a poor man, 
mpémet avopl wévytt. 


No wonder that the wicked as- 
sociate with the wicked. 


The Greeks fought bravely with 
the Persians. 





Ovdsev Oavuactdoy Td durAdety Tots 
wovnpots Tovs movnpous. 


Oi “EAAnves dvipelws rots Mép- 
gals €uaxéoayTo. 


Nore. — MéudeoOa, to blame, reproach, is thus construed: (1) tif re 
(e.g., mordt toAunplav),—(2) tiwd Tivos (maida toAunpias) —and (3) tivds 


ri (thy Tod maidbs ToAunplar). 


‘Opoupet Xupia Aiyvmro. 


4. The dative stands with pére oi tivos, I care for, and 
with many compounds of opod, cvv, and wera. E.g., Syria 


borders on Egypt. 


We care for the public good. 
God certainly will take care of 
_ this. 


What do we care for the opinion 
of the multitude ? 





‘Huty tod Kowod ayadov merci. 
~ A oq 7 
TavrTa mev ovv Oem meAToel. 


Tl huiv tis Tav wodAA@v ddéns 
mere; — 


142 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Norte I. — MéAe:, instead of the genitive of the thing,-sometimes takes 
the nominative, when it is expressed by the neuter of a pronoun. 


Norn 2. — The datives jol, coi, nuiv, and suiv, are sometimes redundant 
and serve merely for the purpose of indicating familiarity and liveliness 
of feeling (Cativus ethicus) ; €.g.,@ wirep, ws Kadds wo. 6 wammos! O mother, 
how beautiful is grandfather !—& réxvov, } BéEBnxev juiv 6 ~Eevos; O child, 
has the stranger left us ? 


Norte 3. — The verb eiui not unfrequently takes the dative of a personal 
pronoun with a participle (such as @éAwv, BovAduevos, ndduevos, axOduevos, 
mposdexduevos) agreeing with it. The verb from which the participle is 
derived, is then made the verb finite in English. E.g., ef cou 7d0uevw (or 
Bovaopevp) éori, if you please, if you are willing. ’Euol aopév etn, I should 
like. Tatrd wot rposdexoudvm jv, it was as I expected. 

Here belongs also the phrase as cuveAdyrs eimeiv, to say briefly or in a 
word (cuvedwy rA€yw, I say in a word). 


VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 


Tyv@Ou ceavrov. 


— § 140.—1. The accusative stands with transitive verbs 
in answer to the question whom? or what? placed after the 
verb; e.g., Know (know whom ? —) thyself. 

The Ausonians inhabited Italy. | Thy IraAlay @xnoav Aicoves. 


The Athenians killed Socrates. | ’A@nvato. amréxrewav thy Swxpdrny. 
Love ye, children, your parents. | Srépyere, waides, rovs yoveis. 


Nore. — Several transitive and intransitive verbs take an accusative of 
kindred signification, but mostly in connection with an adjective; as, to 
wage War, woreuetv wérAenov ; —to fight a battle, udxecOa udxynv ; —to run 
the risk, xvduvevew xivdovov ;—to hold an office, &pxew apxny, etc. —If the 
verb is transitive, it may at the same time take an accusative of a person ; 
as, to praise some one, éyrduiov eyrwmd ew tTivd; —to maim one’s self, éav- 
Tov AwBac0a AHBnv ; — to inflict blows on some one, TUwTew Tiva RANYdS 5 — 
to call some one by the worst name, nadrciv riva dvoua KdKLorop. 


Evepyére. tTHv tTrarpidoa. 


2. The accusative stands with verbs signifying to do good 
or evil to any one(by word or deed); to swear by, to conceal 
from, to run away from, to wait for,—and with Aoyav and 
evedpevery, to lie in wait for. E.g., Do good to your country. 


THE VERB. 148 


He swore by all the gods. Ildvras rovs Oeovs Suorev. 

The slave ran off from his | ‘O do0vA0s awédpa rov deandrny- 
master. 

Nothing escapes the notice of | Ovdev @edy AavOdve.. 
God. 





Norte. — Instead of ed and xaxés with the verbs Aéyei, roreiv, etc., the 
neuters ayabd, kadd, xaxd, are often used; e.g., He said many kind things 
if you; woddAd Te Kal Kadd eAeyey duas. He has done the state much ser- 
vice; moAAd ayada rhy réAw érolncer. 


AovAovs woXiras errotet. 


3. Verbs signifying to name, to make, to deem, take two 
accusatives, one of the object, the other of the predicate of 
the object. The former answers to the question whom? or 
what? the latter to the question what? placed after the 
verb. E.g., He made (made whom?) the slaves (made the 
slaves what?) cotezens. 

They called the island Sicily. | Thy vacov Xucertay exddovy. 
They regard you as their | 3é pidov kal owripa jyotvrai. 
saviour. 


They elected Nicias for their | Nixlay orparnydy éxeipordynoay. 
leader. 





Tov raida povoikny SidacKw. 


4. A double accusative stands, also, with verbs signifying 
to teaeh, to remind of (Twa Tt, and also tia Tivos), to entreat, 
to demand, to inquire, to divide into, to deprive, to put on or 
off, to surround with. E.g., “I teach the boy music;” 
Lat. puerum musicam doceo. 

Wedeprived them of theirarms. | “Exefvous ra 8rAa agnphueda. 
He divided the army into two | Srpardv dvo uépn naréveime. 
parts. 


They begged money of the | Tovs @nBalouvs xphuara fitnoar. 
Thebans. : Yale 





Norte 1. — Verbs of inquiring are construed, also, riva mepf Tivos, — and 
those of dividing sometimes take the preposition eis; e.g., He divided the 
Lydians into two parts, Avdobs eis Sto wolpas d:e7Aev, OY Without cis (making 
the word potpa depend directly on the verb, and putting the object divided 
in the genitive): 5%0 wolpas Avday dietAev (pass., d00 wotpa: Avddy Sif pnytar). 
— Srepéw and amocrepéw, to rob some one, are construed, also, rivd Tivos. 


144 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Norr 2. — The verbs of teaching, demanding, and clothing, retain in 
the passive construction the accusative of the thing ; as, d:dax@jvar téxvyv 
brd tivos, doceri artem; epwrnOivat tiv yreunr, rogari sententiam ; évSu- 
Onvat xiT@va, indui tunica. — Thus, dvoua caAnOjvar vid Tivos, to be called; 
wAnyas TUrTedOa, tu get blows. 

Sometimes the accusative of the thing is retained in the passive, even 
with verbs that take the dative of a person, the latter being then made 
the nominative to the verb; e.g., The administration of the state was 
entrusted (moreve tivi rt) to Lycurgus ; Avkovpyos rhv THs wéAews emipe- 
Actay ériotevOn bd Tov SHuov, instead of : Avkovpy nH THs wéAews émméaccie 
bd Tov Shuov émiorevOn. 


II. MOODS OF VERBS. 
SUBJUNCTIVE and OPTATIVE. 


1. In independent propositions. 
Wddev Bovrder apEwpar; 


§ 141.—The suBJUNCTIVE stands in independent sen- 
tences (1) in exhorting and encouraging ; —(2) in warning 
and prohibiting ; e.g., “Do not steal ;” ja) KAérre (in gen- 
eral) or wy) KAeWys (in a particular case), but neither p47 
KrAerTysS nor py KArA€Yov ;1— (3) in doubting questions, with 
or without Bovre or Oéras. E.g., Where do you want me 
to begin ? 


Friends, let us fight bravely. | Kad@s, pido &vdpes, uaxdueda. 
Do not praise yourself. ‘rtp ceavTod wh ppdons éyKoma. 


The OPTATIVE stands in independent sentences (1) usu- 
ally with dv, to express in a general manner a supposition, 
an undetermined possibility (a negation, in this case, is 
expressed by ov or ove); —(2) to express a wish, cither 
with or without e/@e, e¢ yap (utinam /);—(3) ae doubting 
questions, when reference is made to past time; e.g., Frzend, 
what could I have done? ri, diros, péEarp : «This might be, 





1) That is, the prohibitive uf stands either with the present imperative 
or the aorist subjunctive, but not with the present subjunctive, nor the 
aorist imperative. 


THE VERB. ; 145 


rovTo yévorro av.—TI would not say, otk av Aéyotws.— One 
would not find a better man, ovK« av tis evpor dvdpa Bertin. 


. What can I do for you? Ti yap by apedoiul ce; 
May he be happier than his | Tévo:ro rarpbs evruxéorepos ! 
father ! 


It is perhaps time to break up. | “Opa bv cvonevdlecbai: €%n. 
Where may the strangers be ? Tlod &y elev of Eévoi; 





Note 1.— A wish conceived as impossible, — which, we know, cannot 
or will not be realized, is expressed by the indicative of the historical 
tenses ; e.g., O that you had written! {0 @ypawas. O that this had been 
done! ci@e totto éyévero. Would that you were able to do this! ¢i@ jcba 
duvards moeivy rovro!—or by the 2d aorist Spero (-es, -e, from dela, ° 
which see § 95) with the infinitive; as, O that you had written, éperes 
ypdvar. O that Cyrus were still alive, Spere id Kipos (Hp. 


Norte 2. ate doubting questions are here meant interrogative sen- 
tences (of the Ist person sing. or plur. ), in which the speaker deliberates 
with himself what is best to do; e.g., What shall I say ? Whither shall 
we go? What could Ihave done? tae A negation is here expressed by uh. 


2. In temporal clauses. 


§ 142.—Temporal clauses are introduced by such con- 
junctions as OTE, omdre, nvika (when), eel, érreton (after); 
év ®y Ews (while); mpiv (before); &ws, MEXP ls este, etc. (until); 
€& ov, ad’ ov (since). 


> ‘\ yY > 4 4 
Eqmevav amavra QKOVONTE, KPLWaTeE. 


The SUBJUNCTIVE stands in temporal clauses after a 
principal tense (1) when the subordinate clause conveys 
the accessory idea of condition or purpose ; —(2) when an 
action of. frequent occurrence is to be denoted. In both 
cases, the particle av is united with the foregoing conjunc- 
tions, as 6rav, orrerav, nvix’ dv, érrdv, érreday, ést dv, Sas av, 
etc.—E.g., When you shall have heard everything, then 
pronounce judgment. | 

be 


146 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


We shall not cease, until we | Od mpérepov mavoducba, mply bv 





take the city. cAwmev THY modu. 
Aslongas theship can be saved, | “Ews &v od(ntra Td oKxdpos, xpi 
let all be on the alert. mdvtas mpoOvmous elvai. 
Whenever the barbarians en- | ‘Omdray orpatomedetwvrat oi Ba. 
camp, they entrench them- Bapot, tappov mepiBdAAovTa. 
selves. 3 ; 


The OPTATIVE stands in temporal clauses after an his- 
torical tense (1) when the subordinate clause conveys the 
accessory idea of condition or purpose ;— (2) when an action 
of frequent occurrence is to be denoted, in which case the 
principal or leading verb is usually in the imperfect. With 
the optative, the conjunctions 671, omdre, etc., are used 
without av. 


They begged him not to desert | ’Ed¢éovro wh amedOetv mplv anayd- 


them, until he had led off yo. T) OTpaTevma. 
the army. 
As soon as they had eaten | 'Eme:d4 te eupdyoev, avicravto 
something, they rose up and kal émopevovro. 
proceeded, 


As often as the Gr. attacked the | ‘Omdre of “EAAnves rots moAeutous 
enemy, the latter readily fled. erloev, padiws amépevyev. 





Nore 1. —M[piy is often construed with the aorist: infinitive, and when 
the infinitive has its own subject, the latter is put in the accusative; e.g., 
He mounted the summit before any of the enemy perceived him; ém) 7d 
&kpov avaBatver mpiv Tia aicbéoba TaY Todeulwr. 


Norr 2. — Whenever actual events — facts —are stated, and no acces, 
sory idea of condition or purpose is implied, the conjunctions ére, érdre, 
ere, etc., are construed with the indicative; e.g., When Cyrus came, Asty- 
ages rejoiced, bre 6 Kipos hAGe, “Aotudyns éxapn. They continued fighting 
until the Athenians sailed away, euaxovro méxpis of ’AOnvaior dvérAcvoar. 


3. In relative clauses. 
Ovs av (= édv twas) orépywper, Tovros yapiloucba. 


§ 143.—The sUBJUNCTIVE stands in relative clauses, after 
a principal tense, when the relative conveys the accessory 


THE VERB. 


147 


idea of condition. ‘The relative, in this case, stands with ay 


(ds av, dsTis av, etc. ), and is 
another pronoun. 


I shall honor whomsoever I see 
performing noble deeds. 


First weigh well in your mind, 
whatever you are about to 
say. 


The OPTATIVE stands in 


equivalent -to éav with tis or 


K.g., Whom we love, those we favor. 


Ovs av 6p Ta Kada& érirndevor- 
TAS, TOUTOUS TLULHTW. 


Ildv & re ay péddns Aévyecv, wpd- 
Tepoyv émiokdme: €v Yywuy. 





relative clauses (without dav), 


after an historical tense (1) when the relative is equivalent 
to e¢ with ris or another pronoun ;—(2) when an action of 
Frequent occurrence is spoken of. The principal verb, in the 


latter case, is usually in the 


They put to death as enemies 
all those whom they had 
taken. 


Whomsoever he saw marching 


imperfect. 


IIdvras dcovs (= el Tivas) Ad- 
Bovev, ws moreulovs diépOe- 
pov. 


Ovs wev Sor edrdxrws ildvras, 


in order, he inquired who olrives elev, Hpwra. 


they were. 





Norr.— The optative stands with é&y, after any tense, when the relative 
clause expresses a mere conditional supposition, an undetermined possi- 
bility; e.g., Jt is (was) necessary for him to converse with those from whom 
he may (might) receive a reward; dvayxatby éorw (hv) adT@ diadéyecdar 
wap wy av AdBor mwodr. 


4. In conditional clauses. 


§ 144.—There are four kinds of hypothetical, or condi- 
tional clauses. 


Et tovro éyeis, apapravers. 


1. Where both the condition and conclusion are con- 
sidered as facts, and hence as certain.—In this kind of 
conditional sentences the condition takes e¢ with the in- 
dicative, and the conclusion likewise the indicative. E.¢g.. 
“If you say this, you err;” s¢ hoe dicts, erras. 


Hi éBpévryce, cal Forpaper. 
Fl rodro MéEers, auaprhoy. 


Si tonuit, etiam fulsit. 
Si hoc dices, errabis. 
L2 


(48 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Ei rovro edeyes, Yudpraves av. 

2. Where it is affirmed that something would take (or 
have taken) place under a certain condition, — but did not, 
because the condition was not fulfilled. — In this kind of 
conditional sentences, the condition takes e¢ with the in- 
dicative of an historical tense, and the conclusion likewise 
the indicative of an historical tense with av. H.g., “Tf you 
said this, you would err ;” st hoe diceres, errares. 


Si quid haberet, daret. E? rc eixev, é5l50u av. 
Nisi jussisses, non fecissem. Ei uh éxéXevoas, ovx dv érolnca. 


‘Eav tovto héyns, apapTyoyn. 

3. Where the condition is represented as a mere sup- 
position, the realization of which, however, is regarded as 
' possible, and is even expected. — In this case, the condition 
takes éav with the subjunctive, and the conclusion the in- 
dicative of a principal tense, commonly the future.— E.¢., 
“Tf you say this, you will err;” sz hoe dicas, errabis. — 
“If we are victorious in that quarter, our object is fully 
accomplished ;” éav TovTo wK@pev, av’ nuiv tretroinrat. 


If thou art wise, all will be thy | '"Eav copds yévy, © rat, rdvres 
friends. go. plros €covra. 


Et rovro Aéyous, apaptavois av. 


4. Where both the condition and the conclusion are 
represented as a mere supposition, without determining 
whether the thing supposed be real or not real, possible or 
impossible.—In this case, the condition takes e« with the 
optative, and the conclusion the optative with av.— E.¢g., 
“Tf you should say this, you would err;” sz hoe dicas, erres. 


Si quid habeas, des. Et ri @xous, Solns av. 
Si hoc noveris, mireris. Ei rodro eldelns, Oavudoats Ap. 


Nore 1,— The optative with dv often stands alone, the conditional clause 
being either understood, or implied in a relative sentence. E.g., I would 
be happy (if... .); edruxns dv etnv.— Whoever (= if any one) should say 
this, he would err; os (= el ris) radra déyou, duaprdva dy, 


THE VERB. 149 

Norr 2.—The optative with ef often stands in the sense of ‘‘as often 
as,’? to denote actions of frequent occurrence, with reference to past 
time; e.g., as often as he thought any one indolent, he would beat him; 
el Tis adT@ Soxoln Braxevery, Eracev dv. 


Nore 3.—As in Latin the indicative stands in place of the subjunctive, 
in such phrases as longum est, aequum erat, fieri oportuit (*‘it would be 
tedious,’’ ‘‘it would have been fair’’), and the like, so in Greek the in- 
dicative of the historical tenses without &yv is used in such expressions as 
xpiiv, 25e, mposhxe(v), Kkawpds Hv, kaddv Hv, aloxpdov Hv, and with verbal 
adjectives in -réos. E.g., Jt would have been base to do this; aloxpov Rv 
TaUTa Wovecy, . 


INFINITIVE. 


1. The Infinitive without the article. 
§ 145.— The infinitive without the article stands: 


1. With verbs which do not express a complete idea by 
themselves, such as to wish, to dare, to begin, to be able, etc. ; 
€.2., 


I am afraid to stay. 
I dare face the danger. 


DoBotuar pévecv. 
Tor\u®d vrouévery tov klyduvov. 


We all wish to be happy. 
I am able to do this. 


IIdvres Boudépueba evruxetv. 
Oiés 7° elu rovety Tatra. 





2. With verbs of feeling and declaring; e.g., 


I think I have erred. Noul{w auaprety (§ 116, n. 2). 


He said he was a general. 


Never hope to remain hidden, 
when you have done any 
base action. 





"Egy eivac orparnyés. 


Mndérore under alaxpov roihoas 
édmife Ajoecv. 


3. With many verbs and adjectives which are construed 
in Latin with the subjunctive or the supine; e.g., ‘“ He 


happened to fall,” cvvéBn adr@ Teceiv. 


‘“T came to see,” 


nrOov ideiv, “ We are come to learn,” jeopev pavOaverv. 


I make you laugh. 
I advise you to flee. 


I beg you to come. 
I present myself to be ques- 
tioned. 





Tlo.® oe yerav. 
Ilaparve cou pevryerv. 


Adoual cou édOety. 
Tlapéxw éuavrdv épwrar. 


150 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Nore 1.— The infinitive act. or mid. often stands with certain verbs and 
adjectives where we might expect the infinitive pass.; easy to learn or to be 
learned, padiov uav0dvecr,— worthy to be admired, dios Oavudoat,—pleasant 
to hear or to be heard, 750 dxoverv,— capable of being understood, duvarés 
kaTavonoat,—a city difficult to be taken, rods xadewh AaPerv. 


Nore 2.—The infinitive without article stands also with the expressions 
olds 7’ elul, Tam able, and é¢’ @ or é¢’ @re (for éri rovT@ wste), On Condition 
that; e.g., I could not stay within, ovx olds te Evdov wéverv Hv. They were 
unable to aid, ovx ofol re Roav BonOjoa. They were chosen for the purpose 
of drawing up laws, npéOnoav ép’ Gre cvyypavat vouous. 


Norr 3.—When the infinitive is accompanied by a predicate-noun or 
adjective, the latter is put, by attraction, in the same case as the word to 
which it refers; e.g., 


He said that he was king. "Edn elvar Bacideds. 

I beg you to be zealous. Adoual cov mpobdpou eivat. 
I exhort you to be zealous. Tlapav& cot rpobtup evar. 
I bid you to be zealous. Kedevw oe mpddupov eivat. 


Instead of the genitive and dative of the predicate-noun or adjective, 
the accusative may also be used; as, déoual cov (or mapas oor) mpbOumov 
eivat. “Now you can show yourself a man,” viv oo &eoriv dvipt (or dvdpa) 
yevéo Bat. 


2. The Infinitive with the article. 


§ 146.— The infinitive, with the article prefixed, is used 
like a substantive. Thus, 


Nom. An honorable death is | Td xKad@s drodavety rod thr 





preferable to a disgrace- aloxp@s kpetrrév éotuv. 
ful life. 

Gen. Cyrusendured everything | ‘O Kéipos mdvra trdueve tov 
for the sake of being éraivetoOar Evexa. 
praised. 

Dat. Men make use of every | Of d&v@pwro mdvra unyavdvra 
means in order to be érl T@ evruxeElv. 
happy. 

Acc. Nothing was done because | Ovdév érpaxOn dia 7d éxetvov 
he was not there. Bn Twapecvac. 

Acc. Virtue is everywhere at | ‘H dpery ravraxot mdpeori 51d 

hand, because it is im-— TO eivat dOdvaros.} 

mortal. 





1) d0dvaros, instead of being in the accusative, is attracted into the cz 
of the nominative, dper7. 


PARTICIPLES. 151 


3. Conditioned Infinitive. 


§ 147.— The conditioned infinitive is expressed in the _ 
following manner : 


Prs. ypadewv av, seripturum esse. 

Prf. yeypadévar av, seripturum fuisse (rare). 
Aor. yparpat av, seripturum esse or fuisse.. 
Fut. ypayev av, seripturum fore (rare). 


E.g., Dixit se, se quid haberet, daturum esse; et ti eyou, 
ehn, Sobvar av.— Dixit se, si quid habuisset, daturum fuisse ; 
el TL ceiver, fy, Sodvat av. 


Norr.—The infinitive (esp. the infin. of eéut) is used in several phrases, 
without depending on any word. Such phrases are the following: os 
elrrety, so to speak ; éuol Soxeiv, as it seems to me ; ddlyou detv, nearly, almost ; 
7d vov eivar, for the present, ‘‘ according to the present state of things’’; 
~ 7d ohpepov eivat, for to-morrow ; 76 pev én’ éxelvors eivac, so far as it depends 
on them; 7d kata Totrov elvar, as far as he is concerned ; kata tobro eivar, 
in this respect ; EK@Y €ivat ichiony’) in negative sentences), as far as anenae 
on Me, &.g., TOBTO Exev elvar ov Toijow. 


PARTICIPLES. 


§ 148.—The participle is often used in Greek, where in 
English the infinitive, or a relative clause, or a subordinate 
clause with if, when, while, though, after, that, etc., is em- 
ployed; e.g., 


Ask those that are present. | ’Avepwra rods mapévras. 

Cyrus was admired when yet a | Kopos ére rats wy ébavpd sero. 
boy. ‘ 

He thinks he knows voreaentie Oleral re eldévar ovddév eldas. 
though... 

Water is cheapest, though it | Td vdwp edwvdratov, dpiorov by. 





is the best. 
The verbs which admit of an accompanying participle, - 
are chiefly the following : : | ' 


1. Verbs signifying to hear, to know, to. perceive, to re- 
member, to prove, to be evident ; e.g., 


152 


I once heard Socrates discours- 
ing about friends. 


It was evident that they ren- 
dered service to their country. 





GREEK GRAMMAR. 


“Hrovod more Zwxpdrovs rep) 
pirwy diadreyouevov. 


Pavepol éyévovtro rhyv mwarplia 
ed woljoavrTes. 


Thus, wéuvnco avOpwros wv, remember that thou art a 


man. 


Oida! Oynros wv (by attraction), L know that I am 


mortal; but, oida advOpwiov Ovnrov dvta, I know that man 


as mortal. 


Lvvoida evavT@ ev TolncaryTs (agreeing with 


€“avT@), OF ev Trolnoas (agreeing with the subject éyo), — 
Tam conscious of having done well. 


2. Verbs denoting an affection of the mind, as joy, grief, 


shame, regret; e.2., 


The Athenians repented of not 
having accepted their offers. 


The gods often rejoice to make 
the small great. 





Of *A@nvato: pmereuédovro ras 
orovdas ov Sekduevor. 


Oi Beol woAAdKis xalpovor rods 
MiKpovs perydAous mowvrTes. 


Thus, yatpouev cot éNOovts, we rejoice that you have come. 
Aicytvopat Tatra rNéywov" or A€Eas, [ am ashamed that I say 


or have said this. 


TlorAXdKts peteuérnoe wor HOeyEapdva, 
I often repented of having spoken. 


Tovs decpertas pere- 


uéXovro atrodedmxores, they were sorry for having surrendered 


the eaptives. 


3. Verbs signifying to permit (€aw excepted, which always 
takes the infinitive), to persemere, to be weary, to begin, to 
cease or cause to cease, to omit, to fail; e.g., 


We are weary of packing up, 
of walking and running. 


The passions never cease to 
torment the souls of men. 





"Arecphkapev® cucrevarduevo: kal 
RabdiCorres nal rpéxovres. 


Ai émcOplas ainiCsuevoe Tas Yuxas 
ovrete Afryouciv. 





—— — 





1) O7da takes the participle in the sense of t¢ know; the infinitive, in 


the sense of to be able, to know how to do something. 


2) Aigxivoua: A€éywr 


means I am ashamed that I say this; aicydvoun Aéyew, I am ashamed to 


say this and therefore do not say it. 


3) Perfect from areirov. 


PARTICIPLES. 153 


- Thus, wy cdpns pirov dvdpa evepyerav, do not grow weary 
of doing good toa friend. “Hp£avro! ta relyn xabeXovrtes, 
they began to destroy the walls. Wave ce adicodvra, I make 
you cease doing wrong; mavopai ce adixav, I cease doing 
‘wrong to you. Ov arepidyroual ce adicovpevor, I shall not 
permit you to be injured. 


4. Verbs signifying to do well or wrong, to endeavor to 
excel, it is fit (yood, useful, etc.),— mapackevalec Oa, to pre- 
pare (usu. with ws and the future partic.), and also the 
verb éyev, to denote a continued state of the action, similar 
to the Latin aliquid cognitum or perspectum habere, pecunias 
collocatas habere, and the like (éy@, in this case, is generally 
joined to an active or middle aorist participle, imparting 
to the aorist a perfect signification). E.g., 


You do wrong to begin war and | ’Adice?re woAguov &pxovres kat 
break the treaty. omovdas AvovTes. 


The Peloponnesians were pre- | Of MeAomrovyjoio mapeckevdovto 
paring to wage war. @S TOAEUNTOVYTES. 





Thus, ed éroinoas avaprnoas pe, you did well to remind 
te. ILavros mrepa® vwKav ev troav, endeavor to excel all in 
doing good. Upémre co. aya0@ dvr (or eivat), it becomes 
you to be good. Thy morw éye xataraBov, he took (and 
still holds) the city; Lat. urbem oceupavit = oceupatam 
tenet. 


5. The verbs tuyydvw, to happen; rAavOdve, to escape 
notice; Sidyo and dvaterXo, to continue; gaivopat, to be 
manifest ; P@dve, to be or come before; yaipw, to rejoice ; 
and otyouat, to go away. In English, these verbs are 
usually rendered by adverbs, and the accompanying parti- 
ciples made the principal verbs. E.g., 





1) That is, they were in the beginning of destroying the walls, — the 
destruction of the walls began; 4ptavro xafeAciy would simply signify 
that they began to do what they aiined at. viz., to destroy the walls. 


154 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Croesus unwittingly nourished | ‘O Kpoicos govéa rod matdds 
the murderer of his son. éAdvOave Béookwr. 


The Scythians arrived long be- | "E@@naav moAA@ of SxvOu rods 
fore the Persians (were before Mépoas apicduevor. 
the Persians in arriving). 





Thus, yalpovow ératvodvtes, they gladly praise. Xaipa 
diareyouevos viv, I gladly converse with you. ’*Edaiveto 
kraiwv, he evidently wept; épaivero kratew, he seemed to 
weep (but did not). "Eruyov xabevddortes, they were just then 
(or by chance) sleeping. ‘Os 6€ 7rAOov, Eruyev arrov, he just 
left, when I came. Tv etpnvnv dyovtes dvateXovdow, they are 
always at peace. “EnXa€ov eiseXOovtes, they entered secretly. 
"“Ouyeto dépov, he carried away; wyeto hevyov, he fled 
away. 

Le p0dva (opt.) with od« dy expresses an urgent command ; €.g., ov« 


hv POdvois Aéywr, axvAovday, etc., you could not be too quick in speaking, 
following, etc., = speak quickly, follow immediately. . 


CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 


§ 149.— The rules for the construction of participles are 
in Greek nearly the same as in Latin. The following two 
peculiarities deserve to be noticed : 

1. The Latin ablative absolute is rendered, in Greek, by 
the genitive absolute ; as, 


Cyro regnante hoc accidit. Kupov BaotAevovtos TovTo éyéveTo. 
Deo dante invidia nihil potest. | @cot Siddvros oddev ioxde: POdvos. 


All being silent, he said. Idvrwy ody owrdvrwy elev. 
Theenemy approaching, hefled. | Mposidvrwy moAeutwv Epuyev. 





2. The English perfect active is not expressed by the 
perfect. partic. pass., as in Latin, but by the partic. perfect 
or aorist active; e.g., Having let go the things visible, do 
not pursue the invisible, adels Ta havepa wn Siwxe Tapavy. 

The generals having heard this, | ’Axotoao. Tatra trots oTparnyois 
thought the device ingenious. 7d evOdunua xaplev eddKet. 


After the soldiers had taken the | Of orpari@ra rhy wéAw Kadeddv- 
city, they returned. TES aVEXWPNTGY, 





CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 155 


Nore 1. — Instead of the genitive absolute, the accusative is sometimes - 
used. This is the case especially with impersonal verbs, such as é&d» 
(from éfeor:), quum liceat or licerét; mposfxov (from mposhxe:), quum 
feceat or deceret ; déov (from Sez), guum opus sit or esset ; Soxody or ddtav 
avrois, gquum tpsis videatur, videretur, or visum esset ; SHAov ov, quum ap- 
pareat or appareret ; Suvardy bv, quum fiert possit or posset; e.g., Why do 
you remain when you are allowed to depart ? 51a ti wévers éfdv dariévar ; — 
When these things had been agreed upon, the army returned, ddtavra TadTa, 
Ta OTpaTevuaTa arnArAPor. 

When a neuter pronoun is joined to an impersonal verb, the genitive 
absolute is preferable, though the accusative is found also, as défay roiro 
and Sdééavros rodrov, — doédvtwy TovTwr. 


Norte 2.— The particle és is often joined to participles in the sense of 
though, as if, saying (or thinking) that, with the intention of. Thus, He 
told them to prepare themselves, saying, that there would be a battle, mapiy- 
yetdev avTois mapacKkevdlerOar ws udxns ecouevns. They fear death as if they 
well knew that it was the greatest of evils, dediaci Tov Odvarov ws eb ciddres 
bri méyiotov tTav Kaka@v éeotw. Fathers keep their sons from the wicked, 
knowing that such intercourse is the bane of virtue, oi marépes elpyouct Tovs 
vieis amd Tv Trovnpav avOpdrwy, as THY To’TwY dutAlav KaTdAvow ovoay THs 
aperns (accus. absol.). 

The genitive absolute with 4s often stands instead of the accus. with 
the infin., with verbs of thinking and knowing ; e.g., Know that I shall 
go wherever you go, ws éuod obv idvros, ban bv kal Suis, oftw Thy yvounv 
éxere, instead of éué iéva 


Nore 3.—*Aua, at the same time, is sometimes added to participles in the 
sense of while ; e.g., éudxovro &ua twopevduevor, they fought while marching. 

Meraté with a participle is equivalent to the Latin gerund in -dum with 
inter ; €.g., wetakd A€ywr, while speaking (inter loquendum) ; KAcirov werakd 
Seirvodvta épdvevoev, he killed Clitus while at supper (inter coenandum). 

The participle reAevrév often stands adverbially in the sense of jinally, 
at last; the aorist partic. aptduevos with ad rivos, in the sense of espe- 
cially, and the partic. @ywv, in the sense of with. E.g., rerevrayv cuvexd- 
pnoev, he finally agreed; redevta@rtes etéxauvoy, at last they got tired. 
Iidvres of wointal amd ‘Ounpov aptduevoi, all the poets, particularly Homer. 
Tas vais améoreiwvay €xovra ’AAkidav, they sent Alcides with the fleet. 


Notr 4.—The English in order to (esp. with verbs of going, coming, 
and sending) is often expressed by the future partic. act.; e.g., ‘O Kipos 
éreue Tov TwBhpvav émowduevov, Cyrus sent Gobryas in order to see. Aenad- 
fevor mapeouev, We are here to beg. ’Emopevovto xpnaduevoar, they went to 
consult the oracle. é ye Si8dtwy Spunua, I have hastened to inform you. 

The future partic. is sometimes used, also, to express the English can, 
be able; as, 7 xépa ayabh Hv ab évicay of épyacduevor, the land was fertile, 
and there were people to (= who could) cultivate it. 


156 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Norte 5.— With participies, the English not is regularly rendered by 
ov, AS ov morTedwy, One Who does not believe. But when a condition is 
implied, or when the subordinate clause expresses a mere conception or 
supposition and can be resolved by is, gui with the subjunctive (= ita 
comparatus ut), un must be used. Thus, 6 wh motedwv, one who (= if 
one) does not believe ; — od« by Bivary wh Kauov eddamovety, without toiling 
(= if you do not . .) you cannot be happy ; —6 wh Sapels &vOpwmros ov mai- 
Severar (= ds &v wh Sapn, § 148), @ person who (= if he) has not been 
Jlogged, is not educated ; — &vOpwmo (ToedTo1) of &v SHA Sou wh eirpeyov- 
Tes, men Who manifestly will not permit. 5 

Nore 6.— The Latin periphrastic form -urus sum is usually expressed 
by uéAdAw with the infinitive present or futare (more rarely perfect); e.g.: 
Vos in Asiam ducturus sum, wédArAw twas yew eis "Aclav. Ibi deversuri 
erant, @v0x €ueAAov Katadvoev. 


ACCENTS. 157 


APPENDIX I. 


ACCENTS. 


§ 150.—There are three accents in Greek : the acute (’), 
the grave (*), and the circumflex (" ). 

The acute denotes the sharp tone. It stands on one of 
the last three syllables, as woAeuos, yuépa, codes ; but on 
the antepenult only, when the last syllable is short, and 
when it is also not long by position. ‘Thus zreAeuos, but 
Tworéeu@, Kammado€. 

The grave denotes the heavy or falling tone. It stands 
on the final syllables of words in connected discourse. 

The circumflex denotes the prolonged tone. It stands 
on one of the last two syllables; but that syllable must 
always be long by nature; as, c@ua, mpayya, Kadov. — 
The circumflex stands on the penult only when the last 
syllable is short, or long only by position; as, Tetyos, atrAa€ 
(gen. -axos). The particle ci@e, utinam, is excepted. 


§ 151.—With regard to accents, words are called : 


Oxytones, (acute on the last) Onp, oryh, fepds. 
Par-oxytones, (acute on the penult) TiunTw, arwmneé. 
Pro-par-oxytones, (acute on the antepenult) &fi0s, d:ddoKaAos. 
Peri-spomena, (circumflex on the last) TAS, KAA@S, EvVHUas. 
Pro-peri-spomena, (circumflex on the penult) céua, idodvros. 
Barytones, (no accent on the last) TUNTW, TPaYUaTa. 


Change of the Accent by inflection. 


§ 152.—The accent is changed by inflection in two 
ways: (1) by lengthening the final syllable, and (2) by 
shortening the final syllable. 


(1) By lengthening the final syllable, 


Tas GREEK GRAMMAR. 


(a) A pro-par-oxytone becomes a par-oxytone ; as, 


meAooa tiyyedos oomarTa, Aéyotrov 
meAloons ay'yéAou _ CwudTwv Aevyolrnv 


(b) A pro-peri-spomenon becomes a par-oxytone ; as, 


povoa 5ovAos Sa@pov ouTos 
povons | dovAou d@pov atrn 


(2) By shortening the final syllable, 


(a) A dissyllabic par-oxytone becomes a_pro-peri- 
Spomenon ; as, 


Saluwy pevyw TpaTTw TptBw 
dazov pevye TPATTE TpiBe 


(b) A polysyllabic par-oxytone, whether the penult is 
long or short, becomes a pro-par-oxytone ; as, 


Swkparns evdaluwy ayyerAAw SimKkw 
Sanpares evdaimov hyyeAAe diwke 


Change of the Accent by contraction. 


§ 153.— A contracted syllable is accented only when one 
of the two syllables to be contracted, has the accent. 


1. When the contracted syllable is the penult or ante- 
penult, it takes the accent required by the general rule 5 
as, | 


Tiudouat TLYULNET OE éoradtos pireduevos 
TUG TLLNTTA EOT@TOS piAdovpevos 


2. When the contracted syllable is the last, it regularly 
takes the circumflex, and the acute only when the accent 
is on the second of the syllables to be contracted ; as, 


ayamdw piréer aTuxXewy éorads 
ayan@ pret aT uX av ésT OS 


ACCENTS. 159 


3. When neither of the syllables to be contracted has 
the accent, the contracted syllable also remains unaccented, 
and the syllable which had the accent previous to contrac- 
tion, still retains it. ‘Thus, 


relxea place avydmrae 5nrAoe 
Telxn pire ayaa ShAov 


Change of the Accent in composition. 


§ 154.— In composition, when a word receives a syllable 
or syllables at the beginning, the accent is generally thrown 
back as far as the quantity of the last syllable will permit ; 
as, 


vduos Adyos 666s Ouuds 
&vouos eAovyos atvodos mpddvjos 


Change of the Accent in Crasis and Elision. 


§ 155.—1. In Crasis, the word formed from the two, 
takes the accent of the second word, and when the second 
was a dissyllabic par-oxrytone with a short final, the acute 
is changed into the circumflex; as, 


Tayabd for Ta ayabd tobpyov for rd épyov 
6 


Onwepx ‘6 Th Tmepae TaAAG Ta &AAa 


2. In Hlision, the accent of the elided vowel goes back 
as an acute on the preceding syllable; as, 


wéAn exw for odAdrAd Exw érr joavy for éwra joav 
gnu eyo ‘* onl éyd bel’ En SS Sewwa Ex 


When the preceding word is either a preposition or one 
of the five words adda, ovde, unde, TLva, Trote, the accent of 
the elided vowel wholly disappears ; as, 


map €uod for mapa euod ovd’ éys for ovdé eyo 
a\r’ eyo ‘ GAAd eyed mor €deye *' more Aeye 


160 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


3. In continued discourse, the acute of oxytones is 
changed into the grave; e.g., Tov péev ayabov dvdpa Piro, 
rov dé Trovnpov devyw.— But the acute must stand before 
any mark of punctuation when a real division is made in 
the thought, and also at the end of a sentence; e.g., oi 
pev ayaboi, ot dé Kaxkol. 


ATONICS AND ENCLITICS. 


§ 156.-—-ATONICs are certain monosyllables that have no 
accent at all. These are the forms 0, 7, ot, ai, of the article; 
the prepositions eis, év, éx, ws; the conjunctions e, ws, and 
ov (OUK, ovy). 


te O# is accented in the sense of no, and at the end of a sentence. 


ENCLITICS are certain small words which throw back 
their accent on the last syllable of the preceding word. 
These are: (1) The pronouns pod, pol, ué; cov, col, o€; 
ov, of, €; spwiv, cpict;—(2) The whole present indice. of 
eiui and dni (the second pers. sing. ef and dys excepted) ; 
—(8) The indefinite pronoun tis, ri, through all the cases 
and numbers, together with the forms Tov and 7@, for tives 
and twit ;— (4) The indefinite adverbs (not interrogatives) 
TOS, TH, 17H, TOV, Toi, TOTE, TOOi, ToPdv ;—(5) The particles 
ré, Toi, yé, vov, wép, and the inseparable particle dé; as, ete, 
OUTE, WSTE, WSTrEp, GbE, HOE, TOTdSOE, etc. 3 


INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 


§ 157.—1. An oxytone followed by an enclitic, changes 
the grave accent into the acute. Thus, Op tis for Onp Tis, 
fuyabos éoriv for ayabos éotiv, 


kal ries _ for kal TWweés dAnbés rt for Andes 7) 
Kadds Te de Kadds Té moAdol pasw * moddol pacty 


2. A par-oxrytone followed by a monosyllabic enclitic 
remains unchanged, the enclitic simply losing its accent. 


ACCENTS. | 161 


out when the enclitic is a dissyllable, both the enclitie and 
the par-oxytone remain unchanged. ‘Thus, 


glaos wou for idos od 43 Néyos éotiv, A€wy wore 
brArdwy ye ‘S bAAwy ye 2 tdAwy Tay, ~—s_ nd Tes pacly 


3. A pro-par-oxytone and a pro-pert-spomenon followed by 
an enclitic, take the acute on the last syllable ; as, 


évdotds tis for evdogos rls | mpayud 7 for mpayua th 
BE Teves «= ** Eton TIVEs oaudaécrw = ** oaua ésripv 

4. A peri-spomenon followed by an enclitic, remains 
unchanged, the enclitic simply losing its accent; as, 
émaiver Tis for émavei Tis 
‘6 KaAOD TwWds 


ypavs tis for ypaus ths 
gas éaotiv ** gas early 





KaAov Tivos 


Nore 1. — Pro-peri-spomena in ~ and y do not admit the inclination of 
dissyllabic enclitics ; e.g., adAat éoriv, AaiAaw éativ. — The forms ofrwow, 
@vTivwy, are considered as separate words, like caA@v tivwy. 


Norr 2. — When several enclitics come together, each throws back its 
accent on the preceding, so that the last only is unaccented ; as, ce? rép ris 
gonol ore. 


ENCLITICS ACCENTED. 


§ 158.—1. The enclitic personal pronouns retain their 
accent : 


(a) When they stand after an accented preposition. In 
this case the long forms éyod, éuod, and éué, are used instead 
of the enclitic forms pov, wol, pé.- Thus, | . 


mept cov meta oé wep euovd kar’ éué 
mapa aol mpos col mpos éuol map éuov 


When the preposition is unaccented, there is an znclina- 
tion, and then the forms pod, pod, and ué, are used ; as, & 
wou, €v pol, els ae, Ex Gov, év cot, etc. 


(b) When they are emphatic. In this case, again, the 
forms éuecd, éwoi, and éué, are used instead of the forms 
pov, poi, ué. Thus, éuée cal o¢é,—év éuol, adrX’ ovk év aol. 

M 


162 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


When the emphasis is on the preposition, there is an 
inclination; e.g., against you rather than with you, émi ce 
}) oUV ool. : 


2. The forms of nui retain their accent when they 
stand at the beginning of a sentence, and when they are 
separated from the preceding word by a punctuation mark; 
as, €oTlv avnp ayabds, dymi. 


_ 8. The form éore is accented on the penult (éo7r): (1) at 
the beginning of a sentence; as, éote Oeds, Extiv ovTwS ; — 
(2) when joined to an infinitive, for é€eo71, e.g., ety éoruv, 
one can see, videre licet ;—(8) after the particles arr, et, 
OUK, @S, Ln, Kal, ev, OTL, TOV, and the pronoun TovT; as, 
ovK éoTLV, TOUT éoTLV, etc.,— and (4) in the formula éoriv 
av (éoTw ols, €or ovs, § 136. 2), in the middle as well as 
at the beginning of a sentence; as, KXedopzros THs mapa- 
Oaracciov éoti & édnwoe, Cleopompus plundered several 
maritime places. 

ye The remaining enclitic forms of eiuf, and those of the pronoun 7s, 


retain their accent when they stand at ws beginning of a sentence ; e.g., 
cio) Oeol, Tivés A€yovawy. 


4. An enclitic retains its accent when the preceding 
syllable is elided; as, cogds 8 éoriv, but coos dé éoruv ; 
modAol 8 etoiv, but modAol o€ eto. 


SPECIAT, RULES. 
ACCENT IN THE DECLENSIONS. 


§ 159.— Observations concerning the quantity of the 
final syllable. 


Final a of words in a (gen.-as) is generally long, as 
copia, ypela, Gipa.— But it is short: (1) in polysyllables in 
-o1a and -eld, as evvold, dudppoid, adrnOead, Bacired, queen, 
except abstracts from verbs in -evw, as traidela, Sovdela, 
Baotrela, kingdom, from tratdev@, SovrAevw, BacirAEvw ; — 


ACCENTS. 163 


(2, in wvia and in words in -pa with at, e, or 0 before 
it, as odaipa, wayaipa, Treipa, yépupa. 

Final oc and at, and final a of words in a (gen. -ns), are 
always short. 


Final a in the feminine of adjectives in os, a, ov, is always 
long; as, ayla, BeBata, édevOdpa, omovdaia (from ayios, 
BéBatos, éXevPepos, atrovdaios ). 


§ 160.—RuuE. The accent remains on the tone-syllable 
of the nominative, as long as the quantity of the final 
syllable permits. Thus, 


nNMéepa Adyos TOLLNY Képak 
NMepas Adyou TOLMEVOS Képakos 


(but according to § 152. 1) 


pméAtood tiryyeAos comara jvoua 
peAloons ayyéAou TWUAT@Y évéuaros 


Norses To THE I. AND II. DECLENSIONS. 


§ 161.—1. The genitive plural in oy of the 1 decl. is 
always circumflexed ; ¢.g., judpa, gen. pl. nucpodv. — But 
étnalalt, monsoons, and barytone adjectives ana participles 
in -os (as &évos, dixatoy, orrovdaios, édevOepos, etc.) are in the 
genitive plur. paroxytone; as, Edvwv, ducalwv, cmovdaior, 
etc. (m., fem., and n.). 


2. Oxytones of the 1 and 2 decl. take the circumflex in 
the genitive and dative of all numbers; as, Ti, -Hs, -7, -Ov, 
-ais, -aiv ; — 000s, -0v, -@, -@V, -ots, -otv. — But oxytones in 
as (Attic decl. ) retain the acute throughout. 


3. The words Seorrotns, lord, and aderdes, brother, have 
in the vocative ® déo7ota, ® aderde ! 


4. Contracts of the 1 decl., and all simple substantives 
and adjectives in -eos and -eov of the 2 decl., take the 


circumflex on the contracted syllable. ILXovs, vats, and 
M 2 


164 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


éctouv, however, have in the dual mA, vw, and oa7e, 
instead of rA@, vd, and ocT@; and compounds in -oos take 
throughout the acute on the penult; as, edvous, evvou, evvor 
(not ebvor), wepimXous, trepirdov, Treplrror, etc., from evvoos, 
aTepiT 00S. 


5. In Attic polysyllables in -ews and -ewy (see avayewr, 
{rews, §§ 8. 24) the endings ews, ewv, etc., are considered as 
monosyllables: hence the apparently irregular accentua- 
tion. 


Notres To THE II]. DECLENSION. 


§ 162.—1. Monosyllables of the 3 decl. are accented, in 
the genitive and dative of all numbers on the final syllable; 
as, Onp, Onpds, Onpi, Onpa, Onp ;— Onpes, Onpar, his Ojpas, 
etc. — Thus, 


S. sovs 1édes vot VORKTES pts pives 
odds T od@Y VUKTOS VUKTO@V puvds puvav 
moot moot(y) vurtl vi (v) perl pral(v) 
1éda wédas vOKTQ vUKTAS piva pivas 

D. wéde modotv vUKTE vUKTOLV pive puvoty 








Exc.— The following words are paroxytones in the 
genitive plur., and in the genitive and dative dual: mas 
(mavrwv, ravroww), all, every ; 

Sds (H), 5286s, torch. ods (7d), ards, ear. Tpds (6, 9), -wds, Trojan. 


Suds (6), -wds, slave. mais (6, 4), -d6s, child. ops (n), pydds, burning. 
Ads (6, H), 9wds, jackal. onhs (6), ceds, moth. pas (7d), pwrds, light. 


2. Anunrtnp, Ceres, has a varying accent: Anpntnp, Anun- 
tpos, Anpuntpt, Anuntépa, @ Anpntep. 
3. Feminines in @ contract da of the accus. into @ instead 


lal \ > , 
if M5 AS, ACC. THY NYO. 


4. Concerning the accent of the Attic genitive in eras 
and ewy (e.g., mdédews, Todewv) see § 161. ¢ 


ACCENTS. 165 


ACCENT IN VERBS. 


§ 163.— Observations concerning the quantity of the 
final syllable. 


The endings a and as of the indicative are short; as c{ 
the 1 aor. partic. act. is long, but av is short; as, Avaas, 
Uo av. 7 

The endings o¢ and az are short throughout, the optative 
form ot, and az of the 1 aorist optative active excepted. 


§ 164. — Ruz. Verbs, both simple and compound, throw 
the accent back as far as the quantity of the final syllable 
permits; in compounds, however, the accent cannot go 
back beyond that syllable of the word prefixed, which 
before composition had the accent, nor beyond the first in 
double compounds, nor beyond an existing augment. E.g., 


pepe o18a eiul 5ds 5ds hrov 
mpospepe cvvoda mdpecut amrodos ouvéxdos ™pOsTjKOV 


Thus, érioyes, tmapévOes, raphy, tiripxov, amHrOop, 
ZEjyov, mposeiyov, trapéayov, avedpe, adixrar (not émioyes, 
mapevles, mapnv, wmrnpyov, amndOov, eEnyov, mpdseryor, 
Tapeoxov, aveupe, afpixtar), etc. 


§ 165.—I. The accent is on the last syllable in the 
following forms: 

1) In all participles 2 aorist active; as, Avra@r, -ov; AaBov, 
éxOav, etTrov. | 

2) In all participles in @s and eés, and in those of the 
present and 2 aorist active of verbs in -ws, both simple 


and compound; as, AeAvKas, AVOeis, haves, toTas, Sidvvs, 
diacras, éxOels, etc. 


3) In the present participle of compounds of epi, to be, 
and emt, to go; as, Tape, Evvov; trapior, éEvov, etc. 

4) In the five imperatives edz, érdé, eipd, ra Be, dé (but 
in comp. &ed0e, eiside, amrdraBe, etc.). 


166 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


°) Jn the infinitive 2 aorist act. and the imperative 
2 aorist mid., as circumflex; as, dueiv, AaPeiv, ebpeir, 
eGeiv ;— éxBarod, aderod, adixov (but dual and plur. 
always é«Bareobe, yéverOe, etc.), and so in verbs in -pe, 
compounded with monosyllabic prepositions, as podod, 
évOod, apod, but those compounded with dissyllables become 

es : > , ’ , 

paroxytones, as a@mddov, catadGov (plur. and dual rpddoa6e, 
BA f. 
apeabe, catabecbe, etc.). 


II. The accent is on the penult in the following cases : 


1) In the infinitive of the perfect mid. or pass.; as, Teta: 
xX9at (a), TeTUpOas (Uv), KexdpOaL, TempayOat(a), TeTpipOat (C), 
retina Oat. 

2) In the infinitive of the 1 aorist act. and 2 aorist 
mid.; as, TaEat, TUYal, Tpixrat, TiuAoat; yevéoOat, ALTéc Oat, 
diaddcOar, 


3) In all infinitives in -vat; as, rerudévat, NeXoww evar ; — 
tupOjvat, tpiBhvar, havivat;—ioravar, diddvar, othvat, 


dovuval. 


4) {n the participle perfect mid. or pass.; as, Teruwpeévos. 
TETAYMEVOS, KEXAPLTMMEVOS. 


Nore 1.-— The following polysyllabic aorist forms are thus distinguished 
by the accent: 


Infin. 1 aor. act. Optat. 1 aor. act. Imper. 1 aor. mid. 
piAjoat piAjoar pianoat 
évt pia (i) évT plat évrpivat 


When the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the infin’: 
tive and optative 1 aorist active are alike, but the imperative 1 aorist mid. 
‘s proparoxytone ; as, 


puadéai(a) puadta pvaatar 


Nore 2.— The participles of the active voice retain in the nominative 
the accent on the same syllable through all the genders ; as, 


TiLhoas TiuLhoaca rijnoay 
pirhowv piAhoovea plAtjoov 
voulCwy voulCovca vou Cov 


BovAebwy BovaAevovca BovAevov 





pe NR ee eS ee eS eS 


DIALECTS. 167 


APPENDIX II. 


DIALECTS. 


§ 166. — The chief Greek Dialects are : 


The Arouic (Writers: Alcaeus, Sappho), used in Boe- 
otia, ‘Thessaly, and in the Aeolian colonies 
in Asia Minor. 


The Doric (Writers : Pindar, Theocritus), used through- 
out the Peloponnesus and in the Dorian 
colonies in Asia Minor, Italy, and Sicily. 


The lontc (Writers: older Ion. or Epic, Homer, Hesiod ; 
later Ion., the historian Herodotus), used 
especially in the Ionian colonies in Asia 
Minor. 


The Atrric (Writers: earlier Att., Aeschylus, Sophocles, 
Huripides, Aristophanes, Thucydides ; middle 
Att., Plato, Xenophon, Isocrates ; later Att., 
Demosthenes, Lysias, Aeschines), used in 
Attica. 


The Aeolic dialect is harsh and rough ; the Doric, strong 
and full-toned ; the Ionic, soft and delicate ; the Attic holds 
the middle place between the three, combining the harsh- 
ness of the two former with the softness of the latter. 


After the subjugation of Greece by Philip and Alexander of Macedon, 
the Attic dialect began by degrees to degenerate from its primitive purity, 
and thus arose the so-called common or Herientic language. This was 
used by Aristotle, Apollodorus, Diodorus, Plutarch, Polybius, Strabo, 
and others. 

At a still later period (the Roman period) there were several Greek 
writers, such as Lucian, Aelian, etc., who affected to retain scrupulously 


and imitate the ancient Attic forms. They were on that account called 


Atticists. 


168 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


THE DIGAMMA. 


§ 167.— The picamMa, or double Gamma (¢), belonged to the most 
ancient language and was longest retained by the Aecolians, whence the 
name ‘the Aeolic Digamma.’’ —It was called vau and pronounced like 
the Latin vy. ‘his character, however, very early disappeared, but its sound 
was softened sometimes, after a vowel, into v, as vais (vdfs), navis; Bois 
(8d¢s), bévs, bds; sometimes, at the beginning of a word, into a mere 
soft breathing, as olvos (fotvos), vinum; tap (Féap), ver; sometimes into 
a sharp breathing, as in éorepos, vesperus. In the middle of a word, be- 
tween two vowels, it was not indicated at all, as in dis (dfis), ovis; adv 
(wpév), ovum ; Bods (Bogds), bovis. 


THE Akouic DIALECT. 


§ 168. —1. The Aeolic writers put a for » and a for az, 
before a vowel; e for e before a liquid, the liquid being 
then doubled ; and uv for o (audos for codos). Thus, 


gdua for hun oneppw for g¢relpw 
dpxaos ‘* dpxatos @redAd ‘* = wreiah 
krevve ‘* = x«relyw yuna = *§ Ss BvOma 





2. They put 7 for e; av for ain mwédas and rddas and 
in the ace. pl. of the 1 decl.; and os for ov. Thus, 


66 


gaujoy for oneiov wéeAais for médAds 
ogjja se Ok eta ryusais = 8 Tues 


AaBny ae AaBeiv pote povea 
3. They interchange the labials (au7i, prA‘Bo, etc., for 
audi, OA(Bw); change € into od and w, & into or a CK. 


Thus, 


brmara for duuara ~ mécSwv for uel(wy 
mwedd ‘6 etd oméAAov §* = WeAALov 
mwéeune ‘* mnévre oxipos ‘*  §loos 


4. They double a consonant after a short vowel; drop « 
between two vowels, and replace the aspirate by the 
digamma or by 8 (before p). Thus, 


bAddea ‘* GAhOera Bpt(a 6 pla 


8ccov for cov | fedéva for ‘EAévn 
mddaos ‘*  madaids Bpddov ‘* = pd50v 


DIALECTS. 169 


THE Doric DIALECT. 


§ 169.1. The Doric writers put a for o, y, and a; 
ny tor e in words in evs, as Baoidjos for Bacidéos; also 7 
for et, as o&fa, cadny, for o€eta, Karey; and w for av and ov. 


Thus, 


pda, for  phun Tpa@ua for Tpatdua 
elkaTe -“ elkoot Maca ‘¢  povoa 
1 patos ‘¢  Tp@Tos 5@Ao0s ‘¢  BovAos 


2. They put 7 for o (as tv, té, Teds for av, a, ads), 
£ for o in the fut. and aor. of verbs in Gw, and transpose or 
drop p. Thus, 


elkatt for Yoo éSixkata for édixaca 
éretov ‘6 megov Bdpiiotos ‘* = Bpadioros 
Sindtw 66 Ouxdow oxamtéovy ‘*  oKirrpoy 


3. They sometimes put y for 8; often interchange « 
and 7, and put ¢ and y in place of @. Thus. 





yAépapa for BAé€dapa pnp tor On 
ToKd ‘6 ore pale 6 OAlBew 
THOS ‘¢ sKeivos dpvixos ‘¢ Opvibos 


4. They put 6 for %, o, and y; a6 for & but only in the 
middle of words; and v for A, before tr and @. Thus, 


Aevs for Zevs aupiaiw for cupilw 
65un ‘6 boph glytatos ‘' idraros 
da a: Sg Hv0ov ‘¢ HA Oov 


5. In the inflection of verbs they admit the following 
peculiarities : 


TUNTES for tdrres turtoiga for Timrovea 
TumToues ‘** rbrromev érimtev ‘** érimrov 

, be , SrewGa ** hiela: oh 
TUNTOLOL TUTTOVGL TUTT OMEedva TurToOuEva, CLC. 


THe Ionic DIALECT. 


$ 170. —1. The Ionic writers, ‘a general, omit the con- 
tractions, change in some words o before a liquid into ov 
(povvos, o'veua, kovpos, for pdvos, etc.), and av into wv in 


170 GkEKK GRAMMAR. 


Tpavwas and Gadpa, but into wu in the compounds of adrtos. 
Thus, : 


vos -—s« for _— vous tp@vya for Tpavua 
aod ‘6 Gif Owiudiw ** Bavudcw 
TUMT EL I ae) EwuToU ‘¢ éaurot 


2. They put » for e in the endings evos (of adj.) and eva 
(of nouns); contract eo and eov, ao, aov and oov (sometimes 
also oe and oo, as édccaiev for édicaioe) into ev. Thus, 


aAnonin for aAnOea prev for  qiAéov 
Bacirhios ‘* Bactreos eipwtevy = ** ~— eipw Tao 
mwAevves ‘+ wdéoves yeActoa ‘+ ~§=yeAdovoa 


3. They put e for e before.a liquid; e for e in yepds, 
yep, also in words in which the e becomes long by position, 
as péeCov, cpéoowv, and in adjectives in eos (fem. ea). 
Thus, 


elveka for  €vera TéEAEOS for réAeos 
Keds ‘6 wevds érithdeos ‘* énirhdecos 
cipwrdw = **— pwr dw wKéa ‘6 ela 


4. They avoid the aspirates, put da’ od, ov oolws, and 
the like for af’ od, ovy ociws, etc.; interchange a and x, 
and double a consonant in the middle of a word. Thus, 





avTis for ats koTé for moré 
KLO@y (6 x dy téaccov ‘¢  régov 
binds ‘¢ 6més béaooyv 66 wéoov 


5. They put 7 for a in the 1st decl.: codém, etc.; make 
the gen. pl. in éwv, the dat. in now for aioe (povedor, 
povonot); the gen. sing. of the 2d decl. in ovo, dat. pl. in 
otat (AdyoLo, Adyotot). —In verbs in dw they frequently put 
e for a (opéopev for opdopev); they sometimes omit the 
augment (AaBe for édaBe); put 

tunrreckov for é@rumrov tumtemev for  tbémrewv 


tUpackoy ** rua rumtemevar ** =-Ttomrew 
tumtolaro ‘* rbrrowro Turhmevar °° TumAvas 


wes eS 


DIALECTS. — 171 


THe Arric DIALECT. 


§ 171.—1. The Attic writers change o into & (old 
Att.), sometimes into p; oo into rT; and suffix ¢ to certain 


words. ‘Thus, 


Evy for avy OdAatta for OdAacca 
O.pjety  ** =~ Oaporety ovxl ‘6  obK 
mpatT@ ‘¢  rpioow obtoat ‘6 obtos 


2. ‘They sometimes drop ¢ in e and at; change in some 
verbs the augment € into 7, and make the optat. in ofnv for 
oj. ‘Thus, 


aA ¢ov for  mdAetoy huedAov for éEueddAov 
és he testa piroinv ‘6 ptAotut 
kAda ‘6 KAalw pavoinv ‘6 pavotut 


3. They usually make the 2d pers. sing. fut. in e instead 
of n, and the 3d pers. pl. imperat. in ovtwv, écGa@v, etc., for 
éTwaav, co0woar, etc. Thus, 


éoet for én Avévtwvy for Avérwoay 
Aurhoes (¢ Aumhon ém éoOwv - éréa0woav 
paver ‘6 part istdvtwy §* = igtdtwoar 


These and ‘several other Attic peculiarities have been 
noticed in the course of the Grammar. 


THe Epic or Homeric DIALECT. 
(Arranged from Kihner.) 


Change of ‘Vowels. 


§ 172.—1. The Homeric dialect frequently drops, 
changes, doubles, or inserts vowels. ‘Thus, 


érActo, pepre, TIP (= Thnre) for érédreTo, pépere, Throte 


BorAcrat, Erapos, Ketvos, pa ‘¢  BobAerat, Eratpos, éxetvos, tpa 
Nos, otprs, Ectvos, Owpnt for ws, dpos, tévos, Odpat 
éelxoal, HéALos, evnyerhs ‘6 elkogt, HAcos, evyevis. 


172 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


2. CRASIS but rarely, DIARESIS often occurs ; as, ovmos, 
WplaTos, wUTOS ; —1Tais, dis, ev. for o Euds, 0 ApLoTOS, 0 AUTOS ; 
—rais, ols, ev. 


3. ELISION and SYNIZESIS (= the contraction of the 
two vowels into one [in reading only, not in writing ]) 
are also of frequent occurrence. Thus, IInAniadew, Geox, 
drySoov, Todas, TEOvEdat, ey@ Ov, pI) ANXAOL. 

Ww A — 
The a is elided in the neut. pl.; acc. sing. 3d decl., and the 
particle dpa. 


The e, in the voc. 2d decl. ; dual 3d decl.; in éué, wé, oé; also in . 
verb-endings and particles. 


The ., in the dat. pl. 3d decl. ; in dum, tui, ogc; in e%xoor and 
verb-endings. 


The o, in ard, ird, 500; in the neuter of pronouns, and endings of 
verbs. 


The a, in the endings wa, tar, ca; and o in wo (to me), To. 


4. "Avda, kata, wapa, and the conj. dpa (rarely amd and 
vad) often drop final a before a consonant. ‘Thus, 


bu méAayos, auBddrdw, SBBdAAw, for ava wéAayos, aroBddAdAw, etc. 
KdAAtTov, Kad SUvapuly, KaK KEpadys ** KaTéAuroyv, KaTa 5., KATA K. 


5. Hiatus (=the concurrence of two vowels in two 
successive words) occurs in the Epic dialect in the follow- 
ing cases: 


a) When the first word has the apostrophe ; e.g., dévSpe’ €0adder ; 
b) When the second word has the digamma; e.g., ov-|5€ ods | 


maidas &|acKkev (= ovd€ fous) ; 

c) When a punctuation-mark separates the two words; e.g., a@Ad’ 
iva, ef weuovds ye ; 

d) When the final vowel does not admit elision ; e.g., maid) &uvver ; 


e) When the first word ends in a long vowel or diphthong which 
is either in the arsis or in the thesis. . In the latter case, the long 
vowei or diphthong is used short ; 


‘Huere-|p@ év) | ole, ev |”Apyet | rnAd0.| warps. Il. a. 30. 


THE HOMBPRIC DIALECT. 173 


- 


f) After the 1st and 4th foot of the verse, when a word and a foot 
end together ; e.g., 


éyxei | 1doue-| vijos &-|-yavod | AevxaAl-|da0. Il. wu. 117. 
g) In the feminine cesura, after the first short syllable in the 3d 
foot; e.g., 


tav oi | && eyé-| voto || é-| vi weyd-| poor ye-|veOAn. II. e. 270. 


Change of Consonants. 


§ 173.—1. The Homeric dialect inserts, doubles, drops, 
and transposes consonants. Thus, 


mTorts, &uBpotos, vévuuvos for wéAis, &Bporos, vadvupos; 


mpdaaw, dmmoios, eyéAacoa ‘* mpdow, dmoios, éyéAaca. 


"Axireds, drier, pdpuyos for *AxiAAEvs, dmicber, pdpvyyos. 
Kpadin, TéTpatos, @rpafov ‘* Kapdia, TéTapros, (fr. wép0w). 
2. The consonants 6 and @ often remain before pw; as, 
Kexdpv0 ual, Lower, for Kexdpva pat, topev. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 
The suffix u(r). 


§ 174.—The Homeric suffix ¢e(v) replaces the endings 
of the genitive and dative; as, 1 decl. Bin-du, by force 
(= Bia); 2d decl. Oeddir, of or from the gods (= Gear, 
Geois); 38d decl. dperdu, on the mountains (= dpect); am 
dyerduv, from the chariot (= dyav, oyéwv, dyeor). 


First Declension. 


§ 175.— The 7 is put for a throughout; as, Qvpn, -ns, -7, 
-nv ; veavins, -n, -nV. : 
z - os 
Exe. @ea, Adveias, ‘Epyetas, and a few other proper 
hames. 7 
Nom. sing. masc., & for ys; as, 6 immdrd, 6 aixunra, etc. 
GEN. sing. Masc., do, ew, w}3 aS, "Atpel5do, and -ew; ‘Epueiae and 
‘Epuelw. : | 
GEN. plur., dwy, éwy 3 aS, Oupdwy, Tacé@v, mvAdwy and murAéwy. 
Dar. plur., not or ns (as only in Beats), aS Odpnor, Odpns. 


174 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


' Second Declension. 


§ 176.—GEN. sing., ov and ovo, as Adyou, Aeyouo. 

Dart. plur., os and ovot(v), as Geots and Oeoior(r). 

GEN. and DAT. dual, owv (two syllables), as @pouv. 

Arric decl. GEN. sing., @o for @, as IInveredo (usu, 
IInverdovo) from Inveréas. 


Third Declension. 


§ 177.— Dat. plur., ot, oot, and eoou (rarely ect), as 
véxvot, veéKv-col, KUV-eool, Tddecot (USU. Todal), olect, 
velpect. 

GEN. and DAT. dual, ov, as rrodotuy. 


Contr. in os; gen. evs, dat. ef and eZ, aS yéveus, yéve? and yever. A 
few words in os lengthen the e into e« or n, aS axéus, gen. omelovs, 
dat. onji; gen. pl. cmelwy, dat. oméoor and omjecau. 


Contr. in ns. Proper names in -«caAjs take ny, aS ‘HpakAjs, -KAjos, 
-KARi, -KAja, VOC. ‘HpdkAess;—but adjectives in -ens (as edKAens, 
axdens, etc.) have es and y, as edxrctas (edxAdeas), axAneis (axA€eas). 


Contr. in cs retain « throughout, but sometimes take 7 instead of «. 
Thus, 


N. wérus modes, WOANES 

G. mddros, wéA€0s, wéANOS moAlwv 

D. wdat, rédci, wéAnt moAlecot 

A. wéAw méAias, wéAts, TOANaS 


Contr. in vs (-vos); nom. pl. always bés, as iyOvés, ixO@doo. and 
ixdtéoo:. The acc. sing. is sometimes iy@uda. 


Contr. in avs change a into y, as ypnis, dat. ypnt, voc. ypnd. Thus, 
vads, ship, 


vnvs, vnds, vnt, vino VES, VN@V, vyvol OY vherot, vnas 
veds ved véEes, VEY, and véeoot, véas 
Contr. in eds, aS Baoreds, have -fos, -Hi, -Ha, -ed 5 -fes, -edor, Has. 


The words avip, rarhp, etc., drop or retain ¢«, aS avipds and avépos, 
etc., but always avdpav and avipdor or avipéooi(v). 


Bois has pl. Ades, Bdéas, dat. Bdéeoou.. —Instead of ots (ards), ear, 
Homer uses otas, ovaros, pl. ovata 


THE HOMERIC DIALECT. LE 


The words yéAos, laughter; épas, love; and idpas, sweat 
(gen. -wtos), take also forms of the 2d Attic decl., as 
yerote and yér@, yédora and yéAwv or yédo. 


The neuters yovu, knee; ddpv, spear; and Kapa, head, 


have the following forms : 


youvaros and youvéds yowvata and yotva, yobywy, yobv-act ( *001) 
Sovparos and doupds Sovpata and dovpa, Sodvpwyv, Sovp-aci (~s701) 


S. N. xdpn 
G. Kdpynros, kapharos, kpatés 
D. «dpyti, xaphati, xpati 
A. Kdpn 


Pl. N. kdpa, xaphata, kapnva 


G. Kpdror, Kaphvet 
D. kpaci 
A. Kpdara Kdpnva. 


The gen. and dat. sing. have also the forms «pdaros, kpdatt. 


ADJECTIVES. 


§ 178. — Adjectives in vs make the feminine sometimes 
in ea or en, aS @kéa for Oxela ; Palle for BaGeia, gen. Ca- 


Jéns, ace. Babénv. 


Adjectives in -des, -deooa, -dev, contract oe into ev. — ~ if 
modus Homer has the following forms: 


S. N. woAdbs, movads and mordAds 
. jwod€os and moAAov 
TOAA@ 
. woAUY, TovAvY and mwoAAdy 


. ToAées, moAets aNd woAAol 

. TwoAewY and moAA@v 

» WOA-€gol, -€egol, -€o1, TOAAOTS 
. modéas (woAeis) and moAAods 


ae 
PUA bY 





Neut. wodAvd, rovad and moAAdy 


Neut. odd, movAd and modAAdv 


Neut. moAAd 


Neut. moAAd 


§ 179.—ComPaRIson. In the comparison of adjectives 
Homer, for the sake of the verse, sometimes uses -&repos, 
-oTatos, even when the preceding vowel is long. 

In those in -vs and -pos, he prefers the form in (op, toTos. 
He has, also, the following anomalous forms: 


&yabds, apelwy, Kdprioros; kakds, xepelwv, xepecdtepos, Heioros ; 
dAlyos, dAtCwyv; pntd.os, pntrepos, pytraros, and phioros ; 
Bpadvs, Bpdoowy, Bdpdiotos; wakods, udoowv; wmaxds, mdoowr. 


176 | GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 180.— NumMerRALS. 1. Instead of the feminine pia 
Homer uses the form ia (g. ifs, d. in, ace. fav); dat. neut. 
i@ for évi. 


2. dvw and dow (for all cases), also dor-0/, -al, -d; gen. 
-01$ ; acc. -ovs, -as, -d. 


3. tplratos for tpitos ; 4. wlovpes for réoodpes, TérpaTos ; 


9, elvaros for évvaTos or évaros. 


PRONOUNS. 


§ 181. — Personal Pronouns. 














S.N. reg. and éeydy reg. and rivn 

G. { éueo, éued, wed {en aed, oElo ae ed (ed) 

éueio, euedev ‘Te0l0, o€0ev cio, bev 

« D. reg. reg. rol, rely reg. €o7 

‘Ac.’ Teg. reg. reg. €é, ply 
P.N. reg. and &umes reg. and tupes 

G. juéwv, Huclwv Sucwy, duelwy chewy, cpa, spelwr 

D. reg. &uu reg. tuyr opi (ogi), shict 

A. tpéas, jas, dume jueas, tuas, dupe opéas, spas, ope 


The dat. and acc. plur. of éyé and oi have sometimes the accent on 
the first syllable, as juw, juas, etc., instead of juiv, etc. 


§ 182. — Possessive Pronouns. 


S. éuds, 4, dv (reg. ) ads; Teds, I, dv 
P. quérepos; duds, H, dv juérepos; buds, H, dv 
D. vwirepos, n, ov oTpwitepos, N, ov 


Eds, €h, Edv; 8s, H, Ov 
opérepos ; ods, 4, dv 








§ 183.— Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. 


The article which Homer frequently uses as a demon- 
strative, has, besides its regular forms, also the following 
Epic forms: 3 : 


roto. for rots 
Taiot, Tho, THS, for rats 
roisdeot, Toisdeoot for Totsde 


Toio and red for rod 
roi and rat for of and ai © 
rawyv for rev 





The relative: 6 for 6s; oto, dov for ob; &ns for 7 oe 5 Hot, 
ns for als. 


THE HOMERIC DIALZUGCT. Pit 


§ 184.— Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns. 


InDEF. Gen. réo, red for rivds Gen. téwy for tivdv 
Dat. réw, r¢@ for tii Dat. réoo. for Tici 


Neut. pl. aooa for rivd. 


InTER. Gen. réo, ted, for tivos. —Of dorts Homer has the following 


forms : 
a 
Nom. éris, neut. érre Neut. aooa 
Gen. érev, dtrreo, brTEV Gen. 6éTewy 
Dat. 8rew, dro Dat. éréoror 
Acc. O6tiva, neut. bre Acc. $8rivas, neut. gooa 


THE VERB. 
Augment. Reduplication. 


§ 185.—1. Homer frequently omits the augment, as 
Avoe, Ere, for éAUCE, Etre. 


2. He doubles the liquids and o after the augment, as 
éupador, €rraBov, éoceve. 


3. He prefixes the syllabic augment to verbs that have 
the digamma, as éavdave (also nvdave and even énvdare) 
from avddave, please. 


4. He puts épeEa for &ppeEa; the perfects pepumrapévos 
(purdw), éupopa (petpouar), Ecovpat (cevw), for éppuTa 
évos, wEe“opa, céovpat. 


5. He frequently prefixes the reduplication to the 24 
Aor. act. and mid., through all the moods, and sometimes 
inserts it in the middle of the verb. Thus, 


kexduw for kduw (subj. ) év-évirov (Att. red. fr. évirrw) 
AcAaBéoOa for AaBécbat qvi-wa-wev (from évirrw) 
memOdunv for émOdunv npt-ka-kov (from épixw) 


N 


378 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Personal endings. 


§ 186. —1. In the singular of the subjunctive and in the pluperiect, 
Homer uses the following endings: 


Subjunctive. 1 pers. ws; as, e0érAwm, THXwmL 
2 pers. 6a; as, é0éAnoba (also e0€Ano Oa) 
3 pers. a1; as, €0€Anor, Bddnor (also eeAnan, etc.) 


Pluperfect. 1 pers. ea; as, wewolOea for éwerwolOew 
2 pers. eas; as, éreOheas for éreOHmes 
3 pers. ce; as, eyeydvee for evyeydver 


%. In the dual of the historical tenses act. and mid., the endings top 
and «@ov are sometimes used instead of ryv and o6nv, and in the Ist pers. 
dual and plur. mid. o@ frequently instead of @. ‘Thus, 


Sidxerov for diwkérnv | BovaAduecOov for BovAduebov 
BovrAcabov ‘* BovdéoOnv ppatsuec0a ‘* ppatdueba 


3. The 2d pers. sing. mid. ends in ea: (na) or n, €0 Or ev, ao Orw The 
endings éea: and éeo, (of verbs in éw) are lengthened into eta: and eio, or 
one eis dropped. Thus, 


apiren: and adixn mwAreiat and réArAea 
épxeo and épxev © émwAeto and érdAco 


4. In the perf. and plperf. m. or p. the o is sometimes thrown out, as 
BéBArxu for BéBAnou. In the 3d pers. plur. perf. and plpf. indic. m. or p., 
and also in the optative mid., the endings ara: and aro are used for vrat 
and vro. Thus, 


kexalaras for KéxAcvrat éordAato for éoradvro 
BeBAhara ** BéBAnvrat yevolaro ‘* yévowTo 


5. In the subjunctive 7 and w are often shortened into e and o, and 
noav of the aorist passive, into ev. Thus Youey for toner; orpéperar for 
arpéepyntar; tpapev for erpapnoay. 


6. The infinitive ends in -éueva, -éuey, and -ew, aS Tupeuevar, Tupeuer, 
riverv. But verbs in dw and éw, and passive aorists have jueva. Thus, 


yohuevon from yodw Trurnuevar for rurpvas 
pirtpevar from piréw gavhuevar for pavivat 


Notice also the inf. pres. r10é-wevar Or ri0é-wev, iord-wevat, 5156-pevat, 
and 2d aor. 0é-uev, 5d-wevat, oT A-meEevau. 


THE HOMERIC DIALECT. 179 


7. To denote a repeated or continued action, Homer uses in the 
singular and 3d pers. plur. of the imperfect and 2d aor, indic. act. and 
mid. the forms -eaxoy, es, «, aNd -eox-dunv, ov (€0, ev), ero, but -acxoy and 
-atkduyy for the 1st aorist, usually without the augment, ‘Thus, 


OéA-eox-es for ecdres éAdo-ack-ov for fAaca 
guy-éox-ovto ** épvyovro pvno-don-ero ‘* éuviocaro 


Verbs in dw have decxov, acxov, and dackoy; verbs in éw, éecxov 
(seldom eoxoy), and elecxov. Verbs in dw want the iterative form. 
Thus, vin-dackov, Kad-éeoxe, mwA-gonero, for évixwy, exdrct, mwrdeirc. 


Notice, moreover, the forms ord-cxe for fern, wapaBd-one for 
mapeBn, dd-one for wre; dv-cxe for dv. 


Contract Verbs. 


§ 187.—Verbs in -AQ. In these verbs Homer uses 
both the contracted and uncontracted forms. In the dual 
of a few verbs, he contracts ae and ee into 7 instead of 
a, €l, AS TVANTHV (TVAAW), ATrELANTHY (ATrELAEw). 

Most frequently he resolves a into ax or aa, and w into ow or ww 


(into aa and ow, when the contraeted syllable is preceded by a short 
one, into aa and ww, when preceded by a long one). Thus, 





Ind. 8S. (épd-w) 6p@ dpdw Plur. (épd-owev) dp@uev Spdwpev 
(épd-eis) dpgs Spaas (dpd-ere) dpare dpaare 
(ipd-e:) dpa dpag (épd-over) dp@ou(v) dpdwoi(r) 
Subj. (dpd-ns) dpgs sépaas Inf. (dpd-ew) dpav bpdav 
Opt. (6pd-our) dopey: bpd@mt Part. (épd-wv) dpav bpdwy 
Imp. (épd-ere) dpatre ébpaarte (épd-ovca) dpdca Spdwoa 
Pres. (Spa-over) SpGo01 = 8 pdwot Part. (jBd-ovea)nBoca nBdwoa 


When @ is followed by v7, o is inserted before vr, as yeAdoryTes 
(yeAG@rres), yeAdovtes ; HBd-ovta (HBavTa), NBdovTa. 


§ 188.— Verbs in -EQ. When the e¢ is followed by oz, 
ov, or a long vowel, there is no contraction; as, @rArdorus, 
piréwpev. 

When the e is followed by a short vowel, contraction may take 


place or be omitted. When it takes place, eo is usually contracted 
into ev, as yévev for yéveo. The ¢ is sometimes lengthened into e: 


aipevuny for rpedunv veikecov for évelxeoy 
KaAedyres: ** Kadréovres: reAelero ** éreAéeTo 


N 2 


180 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 189.—Verbs in -OQ. They are either contracted 
regularly (as idpodvra for idpdovra), or change the charac- 
teristic o into » (as (tdp@ovtal, timvwovaa), or become 
analogous to the verb opdw. Thus, 


apdwo. for apdovar (Spdmuc for fSpdouunt 
dnidwyro ** SnidovTo Snidwev ‘* Snidorer 


Formation of the Tenses. 


§ 190.—1. Verbs in éw and dw make the future sometimes, 
like the present, without o. Those in ao after dropping o 
insert a cognate vowel before the contracted one. Thus 
kopéas for xopéceis, waxéovrat for waxéoovrat ; 


Pres. éAdw, fut. éArdow, Att. érddw, contr. éad, Epic éadw. 
Pres. Saudw, fut. daudoe, Att. Sauder, contr. daug, Epic dapuag. 


2. The liquid verbs «éAAw, land; xvpo, fall upon; 
dpvupt, excite; Pbeipw, destroy; Keipw, shave; hipw, knead ; 
and a few others, have in the fut. and aor. ow and aa, as 
Kédow, dpow (dpoa), Képoo, etc. 


3. The four verbs yéw, pour out; ced, shake; adevopar, 
avoid; and kalo, burn, make the 1 aor. without o; as, 
éyeva (Att. yea), éooeva, nrevapny, éxna and éxeva. 


4. The endings of the 2d aorist are sometimes used 
instead of those of the first. Thus of Baiva, dyo, aeida, 
and épa, 


Ind. é8jcero for éBjoaro Imp. delceo for &errat 
Inf. dtéuev ‘* ka Imp. oicétw ** oicdrw 


5. In the 2d aor. a transposition of the consonant some- 
times takes place. Thus of dépxopat, rép0w, dapfave, and 
apapTava, 


é5paxov for @5apkov €dpabov for @apbor 
Expaboy ‘* &mrapBoyv HhmBporov ‘‘ Huaproy | 


THE HOMERIC DIALECT. 181 


6. The « in perfects of both pure and impure verbs is 
often rejected, especially in the participle; as BeBaas, 
KeKMNwS, Kexapnas, from Batre, kapve, and yaipo. 


Verbs in pe. 


§ 191.—1. In the 2d and 3d pers. sing. present and imperfect, verbs in 
pt (from stems in ¢ and o) are often contracted, like verbs in -éw and -dw ; 
aS, TiWets, lets, didois. érider, €didous. etc. — Lue Zé pers. sing. pres. mid. is 
often ridncba, pnada. didoic6a. 


2. The future of d5f5wu: is sometimes reduplicated: d:déc0uev, ddd. 


3. The endings -ecav, -naav, -ocav, -wsay, ana -veay (of the 3d pers. 
plur. impf. and 2d aor.), are usually shortened in -ev, -ov, -dv, and -iv; 
as, Bdv (Bav) for €Bnoar; 


ériOey for érlOecar edev(Oev) for @ecav 
edidov ‘* edidocar eatav(ordv) ‘* eornoay 


4. In the 2d pers. sing. imper. pres. and 2d aor. mid., the o is often 
dropped, and the open form retained, as cdv@eo (for ctvOeco), Saivvo (for 
Salvuco), pao (for pdco). 

Forms such as é¢go: (or déno1), weOino, etc., are often used for d¢, 
meOiy (3d pers. sing. subj.). 


5. The short stem-vowel is sometimes lengthened, according to the 
demand of the verse, aS riOjuevos, 5fdwO, did0dvar, for riOguevos, 515001, 
etc. 


§ 192.— Epic forms of the 2d aorist (subj. of the verbs Yornu and 
TlOnp) : 


Sing. 1. or@ oréw, orelw Sing. 1. 66 bw, Oelw 
2. orfis oTnNNs 2. Ons béns, Ohns, Oelns 
3. OTH othn, €uBhn, ohn 3. OF 6én, Onn, avn, 
pohn pebely 
Dual.2. orjrov orherov ~ Dual. 2. 6j7rov Oeleroy 
Plur. 1. cr@pyev oréwuer, orelouev, | Plur. 1. Oducev,  Odwuer, Oclouev 
kaTaBelouey 2. OnTe Sapelere 
2.0THTe  oThere 3. O@ot Oéwor, Oelwoi(v) 
3. oTGo1(v) oréwol, wepiorh- 
wot 





Sing. 3 p. 5, dén, and déno.; Plur. 1. dduev and ddouev, 3. kam 
and ddéwoi. 


182 


GREEK GRAMMAR, 


§ 198.— The verb eipé, to be. 



































Indic. £udj. Opt. . | Imper. Infin. Partie. 
on nat éw, peTelw Eu(Eup-) evar ewy 
; 2. Zoot éys (Ion.) €ois =| €oo0 and éotica 
y. 3 én, fot, Not, | eoe Eu (€upu-) ev ébv 
a and ety 
BPI 1. eduév éw ev 
2. énre eiTe 
5. €dor(vy) | Ewor elev 
by S. 1. da, Ha, gov, Zoxov Plur. 1. reg. 
a 2. Enoda 2. reg. 
s 3. nv, nnv, hev, foxe 3. ray; elaro for #vTo (from junr) 
Fut. §. 1. @rouar and éocoua, 2. cea, 3. cera and écetrar 








§ 194.— The verb ei, to go. 


+2 
































Indic Subj. Opt. Imper. Infin. Partie. 
3 | & 1. iu(tup-) evar, 
é 2. eicOa | tnoba . tuev and 
a 3. Unou(v) You, letn, and ey iéuevat 
a | PL, Youev and twyev 
~ | 8.1 nia (fev), niov Vl. 1. power Fut. efcopac 
= 2. ues (Hews), ves st bas | Aor. eloduny and 
= 3. Hie (jer), le(v) 3. Hiov, ficav (Roar) éecodunv 
Yoav 
ed 











PROSODY. 183 


APPENDIX III. 


PRosopyY. 


Metres. — The Metres are, for the most part, the same 
in Greek as in Latin, and will be found sufficiently treated 
of in the Prosody at the end of our Latin Grammar, to 
which the learner is referred. We, accordingly, give here 
only the rules of Quantity. | 


RULES OF QUANTITY. 


General Rules. 


§ 195.—I. A short or doubtful (a, 4, v) vowel, followed 
by another vowel or diphthong or a simple consonant, is 
short; as, 06s, Adyds, way, Hiros, hiv}, deldo. 


II. Long vowels, diphthongs, and all contracted and cir- 
cumflexed syllables are long by nature, as, “npas, coun, 
oopatov; ’axov (for aékwv), ériua (for ériuae), raideins, 
Tas, Serdives. : 


III. A short or doubtful vowel followed by two econ- 
sonanis or a double consonant (either in the same word or 
in two successive words), is long by position; as, oTé\Xo, 
éruwe, dé&acOat, ypawWavtos, kdépak, tpdréla; diros Tis, 
vaipe Eetve. — Exceptions are rare, such as tAjecoa Zaxvp- 
Gos, ovd€ ZKdpavdpos. 


IV. A short vowel before a mute and liquid is common; 
as TaTpds, TUPAGS, TEKxVOY, Expia (but not in *éx-Aeira, 
‘ex-véwm, because in these words the mute and liquid belong 
to different syllables). 


184 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


1. When several short syliables follow in suecession, the first is often 
made long for the sake of the verse. ‘Thus, a0ivaros, Ovydrépes, ard-. 
ve eoOat. 


2. A long vowel or diphthong in the middle of a word, before another 
vowel, is sometimes (though rarely) made short; as, BéBAja, éelh, 


as. a vu 
TO.OUVTOS, EUMTALOS. 


3. A final long vowel or diphthong, followed by another vowel, usually 
becomes short in the thesis, but remains long in the arsis or when the 
word following has the digamma,. Thus, 


‘Hueré-|pp évt | otkg ev |”Apyet| rnAd| rdrpys. II. a. 30. 


4. A final short syllable is usually long in the arsis, when it is followed 
by a liquid or o or 6, or by a word with the digamma; e.g., drlo ev], 
hue |= fédev) ; wal wedi-|a Aw-| TedvTa. 


5. Homer not unfrequently uses a short vowel long in the thesis when 
it stands between two long syllables; e.g., €o@ émd | dééi- | 7. 


FINAL SYLLABLES. 


Final a. 
§ 196.— Final a is short, 


1. In nouns in ¢, gen. ns; as, wodod, -ns; Adawi, -ns ; 


2. In nouns in pa, preceded by o or a diphthong (as exveried) ; as, 
yepipa, THipd, uwoipa; but ava ; 


3. In polysyllables in eva, not derived from verbs in edw; a8, ddHOeia ; 


4. In the feminine ending of adjectives in vs and participles in ds; as, 
Aveta, TET IPE 5 


5. In compounds in oa; as, evvord, &vord 5 
6. In the vocative of nouns in ns (gen. -ov) ; as, & wodira 5 


7. In nominatives in a (instead of ys); 6 imméra (for 6 immérns), 6 
aiXUNTE ; 


8. In nouns in -rpia; as, PaArpia 5 
9. In the nom. and acc. neuter ; as, 7d cGud, Ta cduaTa, TA SHpa : 


10. In the ace. sing. 3d decl., as, thy Aauwdda, —in indeclinable words 
and the endings of verbs; as, évvéd, mapa, @rupad, rérupa. 


PROSODY. 185 


§ 197. — Final a is long, 


1. In nouns in a, gen. as; as, ond, copia, piAld, Hucpa, mnpa, xwpa ; 


2. In dissyllables in -e:a, -o1a, -oa; aS, Aela, Tpola, xpela, xpoid, 
TOG ; 


3. In polysyllables in ea, derived from verbs in -edw; as, mwodrrela,, 
SovAcla, Bacirdeia (from Baciredw, but Bactrca fr. Baoireds) ; 


4. In the feminine of adjectives in os, a, ov; as, Gyos, ayla ; 
5. In the vocative of nouns in as; as, @ Aivela, &”Araa; 
6. In the dual of the Ist decl. ; as, ra Movca ; 


7. In the acc. sing. 3d decl. of words in eds ; as, tov Baciréa. 


Final ap. 
§ 198.— Final av is short; as, potody, yiyav, wédat, 
é€Xvaoay, aay, AVoeLiw. 
Exc. Final av is long, 


1. In the accusative of nouns in a and ds; as, thy xdpav, Thy oKiar, 
rov veaviay ; 


2. In nouns in ay (-aves) ; as, Tirdy (-Gvos), may (-dvos) ; 


3. In those Doric forms in which ay stands for nv or wv; as, 6 mowmay, 
tov vuppay (for omy, vuude@r) ; 


4. In the adjective ray (but otumray has ay short). 


Final ap. 
§ 199. — Final ap is short; as, yap, Hrdp, véxrap. 


Excepted are monosyllabie nouns, such as Kdp, yap. 


Finai as 
§ 200. — Final as 1s short, 


1. In all cases of the 3d declension ; as, % Aaumas. robs d8dvTa's 5 


2. In the indic. and aorist of verbs ; as, érupas, rérudas, TUpeias. 


186 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Final as is long, 
1. In the Ist declension; as, THs OvUpds, 6 veavlas, Tobs hiteas Tas 
pmovcas ; 


2. In the accus. plur. of nouns in eds; as, rods Baoirdas (Ion. 
BaciAfjas) ; 
3. In the nominative sing. of nouns, adjectives, and participles in as 
(-avros) ; aS, & ylyas (-avros), adduds (-avtos), mas (wavtds) ; Tdpas (-avyTos) ; 
c f t t , - 
iotds (-dytos), Bas (Sdvrtos) ; 


4. In the two words pwéAds and tdAas. 


Final 4, us, ev. 


§ 201. — Final 1, ss, and wv are short; as, Naurddi, ypad- 
ovat, did@at, réxvodpi; mértis, Epis, ToAdAKis ; yapiv, Torin, 
od0Ua TV. 

Exc. Final c, cs, and wy, are long, 

1. In the Attic suffix .; as, odroot, vuvt, 68% (for 85€), ravrt (for rata). 


2. In monosyllables, as xis, xiv, xt (according to some «is, xiv, x7); but 
the pronoun ris (both indefinite and interrogative) is short and has i in 
all cases. 


3. In nouns in cs and w that increase leng; as, opayts, -t50s ; BadBis, 
180s ; bpvis, -iOos; deAgts Or Sergiy, -tvos; papavis, -ios. 


4. In the pronouns jyivy and spuiv (Epic juiy, duiv; Aecol. &upiv, tupiv). 


Final v, vs, uv. 


§ 202. — Final v, vs, and vv are short; as, ov, ddpu, 
Spay ; oTAYUS Cos), KAaLUS (ios), Képus (-v00s), d&ius ; 
xopry, o£Uv, THYUD. 

E *c. Final v, vs, and vy, are long, | 

1. In oxytones in ds (-%os) ; as, ixOis (-dos), ix Ov, voc. ixOu. 

2. In nouns that end both in us and uy, as ddpxis Or bdépxiv (-dvos). 

8. In verbs in -dui; as, aCebanney: eCevyvis, éCevyvi. 


Nore. — The quantity of a final syllable can often be ascertained from 
the acent. 


a) When the accent is on the antepenult, the final syllabie is short ; as, 
udxyawe, GAR0cia, BaclrAcia, queen . 


PROSODY. 187 

b) When the penult has the circumflex, the final syllable is short by 

nature, though it may be long by position; as, mpayud, «Atuak (-dKos), 
avdAak (-dxos). 


c) When the accent is on a penult that is long by nature, the final 
syllable is long ; as, Odpaé (-dkos), nhpvé (-dKos), ofa& (-axos). 


INCREMENTS. 


Increment a. 


§ 203.— The increment a is long, 


1. In monosyllables ; as, ypais, ypads; Kap, Kapés; Wap, papds; pdé, 
pads; BAat, BAaKds ; — but wAdk, Adds. 

2. In words in ay, -avos, and as, -avros; aS, Titdy, Tiravos; maidy, 
matavos ; ylyas (-ayros), dat. pl. yiyaau 

3. In the feminine of participles in as ; as, Avods, fem. Adoaca. 


4. In the Doric genitive in ao and dwy of the Ist decl.; as, Azpeliao, 
bmovodwy. 


§ 204. — The increment a is short, 


1. Inthe dative plur. of syncopated nouns; as, rarpdoi, avdpdci, dorpaor. 


2. In words in d, ap, as, af, and ay, and also in @s (‘dAéds). Thus, 
mpaypya (-dros), hap (-dros), Aaumads (-ddos), adrAat (.dxos), xdépak (-dkos), 
kAimat (-aKos), “Apay (-aBos), AatAap (-dros). 

But long increase orédp (-atos), ppéap (Att. usu. -aros, Epic ppeldtos), 
xépas (-aros, Hom. képdor) ; Odpak, tépat, nvddak, or dupa, olat, pévat 

(-dKos). 


Increment K; 


§ 205. — The increment « is long, 


1. In monosyllables ; as, sls, sivds ; ; pip, pirds; Wik, Pixds. — But net 
Aids ; ths, rivds; Opit, rpixds, and ori, orixds, increase short. 


2. In words in is, iv, and ig; as, akrts (or driv), -tvos; dprts, -idos ; 
_ Gapts, BadBis, nndts, Kants, xpynats, vnots, Wynots, pagavts (-id0s); opayis, 
xeipts (-td0s) 3 udorit, rérrit (-iyos); mépdit, potvit (-ixos), and others to 
‘be learned by practice and observation. 

The increment : is short in words in ts, :¢, and «a, in which the « is 
short (or long only by position) ; as, éAar/s, -Z30s; pis, -id0s ; xdpis, -iros; 
KdAuk, - cos; Kidd, -ikos 5 xépvup, -iBos. 


188 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Increment v. 


§ 206. —— The increment in v is long, 


1. In monosyllables ; as, yi (-irds), yp (-imds). But rip, riods, 
and Srvé, -iyds, increase short. 


2. In the dat. plur. of participles, as (evyvio.; also (evyvica (part. 
pres. fem.). 


3. In words in oy, vs, and vt; as, bdépxiv (-dvos), days (-vdos), rdpis 
(-0O0s) ; BouBvé, xhpvé (-vKos), KdKKvé (-dyos). 


The increment v is short in kuvdy (Kivds), cdpus (-t00s), waprup OY udptus 
(-épos), xdAvyp (-tBos), and in those in vé in which the v is long only by 
position, as in dpuk, bprvt, wrépvk (-tyos) ; Kddvé (-vKos) ; bvvs (-bxos). 


PENULTS. 


A. 


§ 207. — The a of the penult is long, 


1. In words derived from verbs in -dw and -pdw; as, dpa-ua, bpa-pa, 
bea- -ua, Onpa-ris, akpoa-rns, td-o1s, melpa-ocs. 


2. In proper names in -érns and ~dv0s ; as, Evppdrns, Srapriadrys, 
Tepu-avds, lovA:-advds. But short are: Tad-drns, Sapu-drns, and those in 
-KpaTns, as Swxparns, etc. 


3. In compounds in -dyéds (from &yw and &yvipt), aS, Aoxayds, vavayéds, 
and in the words "at, daip, davds, Adds, vads, Pavds, pais, oTparyis, Tpaxvs, 
"aerds, avddins, ouyar, olvam, Tidpa, and the proper names, Ad«wyr, "Audous, 
“Apatos, Ildowv, Tpiamos, steaks 


§ 208. — The a of the penult is short, 


1. In the endings -dAos, -duos, -dvos, and -dvoy; aS, mdoodAos, rotduds, 
ovpavds, bpyavoy;—but -ados is long in the proper names Sapdavdrados, 
Sriupadros, and dpoados. : 


2. In the words in -dois, aS KddAdo.s, avdotaots, mpdracis, &xTaars, 
avdBacts.. 


3. In the endings -drnp, -dpos, -dros, and -drinos; as, eda Hp, BipBap-:, 
Suvards, ypauuarixds. — But long are acparos, andpds, and patapos. 


PROSODY. : 189 


| s 
§ 209. — The « of the penult is long, 


1. In dissyllabic oxytones in -iAds and -iués, and in proparoxytones in 
-IAos and -tAoy. Thus, Pidds, xiAds, Aiuds, piuds, Suidros, wédiAov. 


2. In nouns in -iwy (gen. -covos), in comparatives in -iwy, neut. -iov, and 
in words in -irns (fem. -iris). Thus, kiwv, Bpaxtwy (xidv, snow, is usually 
short), moAirns, moAtris (but xpirhs is short).—Comparatives in wy are 
generally used short by Homer. 


3. In verbs in -iBw, -iyw, -i0w, -tvw, -idw ; aS, OATBw, trtyw, Bpldw, KAtvw, 
vipw (but i in its derivatives, as vipds, vipdes, etc.). 


4, In the words «pi0y, KkAtvn, vinn, ciyh, ottBn, tiwh, “txdp; axpiBys, 
litiwos, ativn, évinh, epidos, pOiuos, Kduivos, yaAdivds, wéAivoy, XeEAOOr, 
xtAids, xtuio0r; Aidd, Mivws, Siddv, XiAwv, Knoiods, “Ocipis, Powtkn. 


§ 210. — The ¢ of the penult is short, 


1. In the endings -ixos, -iuos, -iSys, and -fo1s; as, "Arrixds, pucikds, 
youimos, Neoropldns, xplois. 


2. In adjectives in -ivos, especially in those denoting time .and 
matter. Thus, adfivos, wipoivos (later Att. uippivos), éapivds, Ocpivds, 
Kédpivos, gvAivos. : 


3. In several other words in -:vos ; as, mivos, kdpkivos, xétivos, Kdpivos. 


¥. 
§ 211.— The v of the penult is long, 


1. In nouns in -vua, -vrnp, -vrns, and -vros, derived from verbs in dw ; 
4\> =~ 7 - 4 ~ > / _ 
aS, Korda, uNviThp, unviths, mpeaBuTns, kwkvTds, &ddxpvros. 


2. In verbs in -%nw, -dvw, -dpw, and -dyw; as, épiKw, Bivw, rAd, 
dpTivw, Tadvvw, KUpw, dipw, aOtpw, wpVoua, Bpdxw, Tpixw, Wixw ;—also 
in 1rv0w, otigw, and dpiyw. 


3. In the words Bpix}, Sun, idyh, Adun, Adwn, mbey, Toy}, pdun, ‘An, 
Woxn, ypimrds, yipds (adj.), Spiuds (Hom. neut. dpiud), Oduds, nipds (adj.), 
tivds, mipds, piuds, ripds, ‘dmeis, ‘duds (=‘vuerepos), xpvads, xvAds, Woxpds ; 
Kupwr, Tprydév ; dykipa, yépipa, auapiy, GAoADy}, KapuKn, cauBinn; Eui- 
xos, iAvds, KéAvHos, Klvddvos, mdripos, &ovAov, isxipds (but dxipds and 
éxipds). 


190 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


§ 212. — The v of the penult is short, 


1. In words in -vua, -vrnp, -vrns, -vtos, derived from verbs that 
shorten the penult of the perfect pass.; as, épiua, epirip, ditHp, AdTHp, 
OiTHSs. 


2. In verbs in -v», in which the v is preceded by a vowel short by 
nature ; as, dviw, wedw, evTvw, épiiw. 


3. The v is short in Bpvw, caAvw, but long in dia, tiw, rpiw, and ‘iw. 


DERIVATIVES. 


§ 213. — Derivatives follow the quantity of their primi- 
tives. ‘Thus, 
Ovickw (Odv-), Zdvov, Odvards, G0dvatos, 40d vacta. 
Oipds, Oijdw, A0iuos, AOdula, rpdOdurs, mpoOdula, EmBopew, exOoula, 
chilies Kéxpimat, explOnv, xplors, atvds Kp.THs, Kpithpiov, Kpiticds 


Mav0iva (uad-), maOnrhs, dudes, aud0ia, paenois, waOnua, puly- 
marinds. 


Nin, vicdw, vinnths, vienpdpos, dvikyros. 


Tluy, tTludw, tTiunua, tTlunots, &tiwos, ariula, artudw, Tinos, Tunes. 


SENTENCES. 193. 


READING LESSONS. 
SENTENCES. 
First Declension. 


T'pddopev ‘énustovds. — Kadiv ypdg¢w «cat paxpav ére 
oToAnv.— ’Apyia éott kaxoupyias apyn.—‘H aper) kari 


got. — @Oavpalw tiv THs Baotrelas codiav. — Ded ye Tv 
Tav ndovav dovrciav. — Kixe Tn Bla kal tH avayKn. —THv 
7 : ? , Hi YR}: ” 

\ > / a \ \ 7 / a A 
pev adiciav dedye, THY dé duKatocovynv diwKe. — Xaipere, 


hirta. adeAXhai.— Oi orpati@rat Tols AnoTAS diwKOVOL. 
—-‘H tis Baoirelas vavtTixy peyarnv ddEav exer. — M2) 


MLOTEVETE, @ VEeavial, Tos wWevoTais.—T@ veavia mpére 
’ / a a / / a € \ 
evKooula, TO KpLTH SiKatoovyn. — IloAXraKis Bpaxeta Hdov1 
\ / UA ” > / n / 
pakpay TikTer AVITHVY. — Axove, @ déo7rota. — Dedye veaviav 


Tpupntay. — Ex Weveraév yiyvovta: xkrértas. — Aé pépipvat - 
Thy Kapdiav éo0iovow. 


Second Declension. 


@PoBos xuplov apy aodias.— ‘O° Adyos TO Tov vod 
KkatomtTpov éotw. —‘H apetn Sapdv éaott tov Oeov. — 
Marrdov thy atoyvvnv doBovpat 7) Tov Oavatov.— Pevye, 
pire veavia, Tors Kakors étatpous. — Kara dépa tis codias. 
—QOi Onpevtat tots RAay@s évedpevovow. — Atxavoovyny 
doxe Kat épyp Kal royo.— Oi veaviar tao yalpovorv. 
—‘O otpatnyos Tovs otpatimras él tovs torepious ayet. 
—‘O @avaros tors avOpa@rovs pepimvav amraddaTTEL. — 
Tovs dpoviwovs tav avOparerv ai tov Tovnpav Téyvat ov 
NavOavovow.— Tov mioriv dirov Oeparreve.— Alwxe Kara 
épya. —‘O Geis tov avOparrmv 1c cable wR Ildpeys, & eds, 
tois pidols evtvyiav. 


192 _ GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Third Declension. 


"HE Hruka Téprret.—"“Hoatotos to mde yards Hv.— 
Tove famous pdotiéww édavvouer.— Oi tripyo. tais modect 


id lf i 

xdopmos eioiv. —’Apynv amavrav Kal tédos tole. Oedv.— 
‘ / a na 

Tovs yépovtas év Tipais éyete, maides.— Tots Kxteol Tas 


tpixas KreviCouev. — Beos exdotw Sov Tu Everpe + A€ovow 
arknv Kal TayUvTHTa, Tavpols Képata, peAlooals KEéVTpa, 
avopi Adyov Kat codiav.—‘O codos padrXrov yalipa TH 
apeTn i) Tos ypnwact.— Xapis yapw Tike, Epis Ep. — 
TérrE pév tértiys didos éoti, wvpunke dé pwipunké. — Xeip 
xeipa viTrret.— Xaderrov TO yhpas éotiw avOpwrows Bapos. 
—Tots od0vc1 Ta Bpwpyata Reatvouev.— Tois @alv axov- 
ouev.— Képact nal oddrmiyéw ot otpatiotat onpmaivov- 
ou. 


Comparison of Adjectives. 


Ti dptayiotepov rAvVKov; —‘O Oadvatos Kolvos Kal Tots 
yelpiatos Kal Ttois PedTioTows.-—— IloAXol TaVv yYedtddvev 
clot Dadrlotepor. — Teorres, ® Ag@oTe. — I'vOmar Tov 
yepaltépwv apeivouvs etoiv.—’Avapyias petfov ovK €or 

; e , +$ > ‘ / 4 / 
caxov. —‘O Kxpoxdderros €& éXaylotou yiyverat péytoTos. — 
Ovdev Oarrdév éott vonpwaros.—’EoOXev Kkakiovs toddakis 
> / / > > \ / ; > N > / 
evTuyéoTepot elow.—’Ael xpatiordy éott TO achadéoTator. 
—ZXueria viods éotw evdatmovertaTn TE Kal evpopwTaTn. 
—"H réye ouyrs Kxpeirrova, 4) o1ynv éye.— Ata Tovro dvo 
> ” / \ v4 vA / \ > 7 e/ 
@Ta éxouev, otoua Oé &, iva TrEiw MEV AKOVwpEV, NTTOVA 
dé Agyouev.—‘H yh edXatt@v écti Tod HnrAlov.—‘O puvo- 
Kepws THY Sopav iayvpotdrny exer.— Ovdev yruKvTEpor Tis 
matpioos. — Adka aaobevis ayxupa, mrovTos Ett acber- 
eoTépa. 3 


Pronouns. 


Tlatdes, o watnp otépye tpyas.—Ti todr éorw ;— 
‘Hueis tyiv ovyyalpowev.— ‘Hyeis tuav evtuyéctepot 
éopev. —"Q, trai, adxové pov. —-‘Hypeis pév ypadopev, vpels 


SENTENCES. 193 


de willere.— Oi rrovynpot adAnAoUs BAaTTOVaLY. — Ovdels 
3 £ 4 “ 4 an id ral € na r a e 
édevhepos eavTov pn KpaTta@v.— Oct mraides buav (or buar ot 
maidss) amrovdaiot eiow. —’OpéyerGe, piror veaviar, Tis 
aperns, Ns ovdev eott ceuvdrepov.— Tiva ddfav éyeus rept 

f e x 4 e / A ct / id > 
rovrwv ; — Oiov ro é00s éxdotov, Toios o Bios. —‘O épuav- 
Tov aderpos (or 0 adeAdds Oo euavTOv) TavTwY apioTevel. 

I / Q / , e a OE J > 06 
—latpé, Sepdrevoov ceavtov.—‘Hyiv ovddv éotw ayabov 
aX, Eb wn OTA Kal apeTn. 


The verb ecpié. 


Bi Ocoté eiot, eats Kal épya Ocov.—’QD, Evor, tives 


éoté; —Tévos tov Oeov éopev.— Tis ei ot; — ‘Huyeis 
€opev érevOepor, tpets S€ éote SovAOL.— Atmol Kal RoLpol 
” »” , ’ > vw 7 P 

écavtat. —"Ovoya aot Th éott; —"“Avopes éote, hiror. — 


Meyarn yapa éotae bpiv, pirtatro. traides. —"Eoovtra ot 
4 n > \ > / BA Pb 
éxyiutot mpato..—’ Kav 7s dtrdouabns, oer trodkvuabns. — 
Evéaiwov einv cal Oem hiros! — Méuvnoo (remember) 
véos @V, OS yeépwv eon TroTé.—PDidwv péurvynoo Kal Tapor- 

\ > / > \ > n b] “ nA AN 
Tov Kal arovrav.—’Hv Baopos ’A@nvas év tH vio, Kal 
avdoras apyupovs, Kal év tais THS Deas yepolv joav Aoyyn 
Kat aomls. 

Regular Verbs. 
_(Active.) : 


Qecdv pev vonoar yarerov: dpdcat dé advvarov. — Oi 
> \ \ / / / + 4 
aya0ot thy matpida KoopHnacovolv.— Xipwvidns edXeyev Ste 
AaAnoas pev TOAAAKIS peETEVOnTE, TiwTHTAS dé OvdETrOTE. 
—Qeds wavra év th dioe apiota dvarérayev. —‘Etaipos 
étraipo mistevodt@.— Ta xpuTTa pn exdnvns didrov. —‘H 
, ” \ 54 . \ \ > / 
Tuxn On ToAXAOS Ecpynrev. — Mnoevi cuudopar dverdions, 
Kown yap » TUYn.—@eds Tois avOpwrros TO wédAAOV KEKG- 
rhudev.— Mn dusyepavys nuiv.— IIdodTov éyov thy yeipa 


mevntevovaw odpefov.— Mndaca Ta Té&kva trepovevKvia 
Eyatpev.— Oi otpati@ras THY Els TO GoTU oddV éxda- 
Onpav. | : iy 


o 


194 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


(Mid. and Pass.) 


‘AytacOntrw ro dvowa cod. — Ilavta wird rod Weod 
/ 1 ‘O / 3 \ /; Py rd \ 
TUYNPMOT TAL.” — Aoyos ES THY TOALY OlEoTTAaPTO TOUS 
joAreniovs wKnOjvar. — Adyioat mpo Epyou. — Oi ’A@nvaior 
DrioN / / / e / 
ael OavpacOnoovrar.— II]dvov petarrgayOevtos ot médvot 
yAuKeis. —‘O otpatnyos Tois otpatimtais éveteiNaTo ért 
TOUS ToAEmious opunoalt.—‘H vicos paxpav tapatérata.* 
— ‘Pha apa Kaipoyv pipOév avétpere mroddaKis Biov.— 
TloAAa pév avédAmicta mpatreTat, TOANA O€ WETpPAKTAL, 
ToAAa 5€ mpayOnoovrat.— IloAXol peyiotov Tinav Eto 
Oncav. —’Hioyvveuny et b7r0 Troneuiou €EntratnOnv. 


(Second Tenses.) 


Luyav tov waida padrAov 7 Kexpayévar® mpére.— OvK 
xX \ \ b] ff 4 \ 7 \ 
av pn Kauov evdatmovoins. — IIXovT@ treroiGas adtca p71) 
/ T / / 4.2 ®. TI \ a n 
Tolnons.— Li Keynvas,* @ Tat;—IloAXAOL TwOY CTpPAaTLWTwV 
Tas Ta€ers KaTEALTTOV. — Oi Troreuor SueaTrapnoav. — Lodias 
€ \ BA / “A 'd / 
0 Kapiros ovtote PUapnoerat.— Tov Bactréws odayertos, 
Taca 9 dSvvauis dSuepOdpn.—Oi BdpBapot Kxatarrayevtes 
? f ¢ / » / Nu A 5) / 5 
atrepuyov. — Ou mroréeutor OtactrapevtTes Tad éeTTedHnvecav. 
—‘O Bacireds eis Tov 6hOarpov wrAnyels ToEevparte Sue- 
pOapn THv dpacw.— Oi mpos THY ddEav KeynvoTes oTraviws 
4 a ” > / e \ \ b] / 
évdoEot yiyvovtar. —"Adwus év Onpais vd avos érAHYN. 


(Contracts.) 


"Opdedrs admv éxiver AlMovs Te Kal dévdpa.— Oi avOpa- 
yOe \ ey lal bd ¥ 6 > 40 \ 
Tot ovoé TOV aépa Tois dpwuciw eiwv® érevOepov.— M2 
TWOAAG AdAEL+ TOV TeTEAEVTNKOTA paKapite: TOS TpEC- 
_ Burépovs aéBouv + Oupod xpare.— Tera 0 wa@pos Kav Tt 1) 
lal > / . / an € BY \ 
yeAotov 4.—Noe, Kal tore mpatte.—Ot avOpwro 0 
XN > A »” \ / aes," Ta 
maraiov év avtpois @Kovv.— Mnoevi POover: pur KaKois 
eae 4 \ / a oF Ay sai val a 
omirer: Oeods tiwa.—Ilas avnp att@ tovet. — Oemoro- 
A M A M e fa) AN 42°58 RE Bee x 
KAHS véos Ett @Y Edeyev, WS KalevoeLY avTOV ovK egn® TO 





1) cuvapudtw. *) waparelvw. *) kpdgw. *) xalvw; xpdgw aud xalyw have 
2 Perf. with present signification. 5) daiw  §%) <da: 


SENTENCES. 195 


tov MiAtiadouv tpdmavov.—“A ovKk éate Tovs traidas Troveiv, 
TavTa avTol Troveite. —Oi Lapd@ou tors dn yeynpaketas 
TOV TATEPWVY poTradols aVypouDV.* 


Miscellaneous Examples. 


1. 


Kav povos 7s, patrov pyre rA€ENS, unte épydon under. 
— Ilv@aycpas mpatov éavtov dirccodov a@vouacev: of &é 
TadatoTepo. sopot wvouacbnaav. — Aroyévns Avyvov pe? 
nucpav aryas, avOpwrov, dyol, Snta.— Tas tov davrAwv 

/ > F / 4 / > 
guvovaias oArlyos ypdvos dtéXvoev.— Ilavoavias é« Aaxe- 
Saimovos aotpatnyos vmod “EAAnvev éEerréudhOn peta elxoot 

“ > / v4 b HI al > / lal 
veav. —’AdéEavdpos, Ste évixnoe Aapeiov, améotetde Tos 
"EdAnot Geov attov Wwndicacbar.— Atoyévns id@v to€drnv 
aun, Tapa tov ocKxoTrov éxalicer, ciTrav, va pn PrAnyo.— 
Mawvouela travtes, ordtav opyifopueba. 


Bs 


= al \ ed a) 4 / Ul 
Eevopav To nulav Tov oTpaTrevpaTtos KaTéALTE huAAaTTELV 
40 atpatéredov. — Aixata Spdcas cuppdyov tev&er! Geod. 
—Tovs mertactas édéEavto? ot BdpBapot Kal éudyovto: 
émrel O éyyds joav ot omditat, éTpadtrovTo : Kal of TeATATTAl 
> \ / 3 € 7 b] / ’ > \ / 
evOvs etmrovto.® — Ou yiyavtes nKovTifov ets ovpavov métpas 

\ } a e / 4 7 OG / b] A/ > 
Kal Opus nupévas.t*— AvKos id@v troiuévas éoOiovtas év 
sKnvn mpdBatov, éyyvs mposerOov,® nriKos, &bn,® av Hv 
JdpuBos, «6 é€yw TovtTo érrotovy.— Aaywoit mote moXe- 
HOUVTES AETOIS TTAapEKAXOUY Els TUMMaYiaV ad@TreKAaS: ai SE 
eirrov : éBonOyncapev av vpiv, ec wn ndepev,’ Tives eoTe Kal 
Tiol TTONEMELTE. 


3. 


xtTépye pmev ta mdpovta,! Entra dé ta PBerTiw. —‘O 
Avoyévns edeyev, Stet of pev AdroL KUVEs? Tos éxyOpods 





T) dvaipéw. 
2.1) ruyxdvw. *) déyeuas. %) ropa. *) darrw. 5) rposépxoua. ©) pyul. 
T) 0°8.;. —& 1) wepem:. 2) dor. 


02 


{96 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


ddxvovow, éy@ dé Tors dirovs, va caocw.—*Hdatotos 
eppipn?® to tod Aus €& otpavod, bAev ywros éyévero.4— 
IIXatov mpds tia Tav Taidwv: pepactiywoo® av, é&dn, 
eb wn wpyfounv.—”* Apxtos tis mote peyddws exavydato, 
e Q@ / / > \ A , \ 6 \ 
os diravOpwrdratov Travtav éotl Tav Cowv: dacl® yap 
+ \ \ / e \ > , > 4 
adpxTov vexpov pndev BiBpwckev. “H d€ arorné axovovea 
Tavta éueldlace, Kal pos avTny avTépn: elOe Tors vexpods 
A @ \ \ \ na 7 € / a > 8 
noOtes, Kal pn tors Cavras.’— Ov mor€utol, ods @ovTo 
atropuyeiv, eEaihyns taphoav. 


4, 


Katayera tn’ avdpav ods ad pdvov! od mposKkuveis. — 
Znvev SovrNov éyactiyou émi KroTH: TOD Sé eElzrdvToS - 
elwapto* mot KrAeYrar: kal Saphvat, Znvov ébyn.2— PirH- 
HOV, 0 K@MLKOS, ETTA TpOS evernKoVTAa etn yeyoves,* KaTé- 
KelTO® ev él KAlWnS npewov: Oeacdpuevos dé dvov Ta 
Tapeckevacpeva avT@ ovKa KatecOiovta, Bpunoe pev eis 

/ / \ \ , / \ \ ~~ \ > / 
yédota, Karéoas S€ Tov oikérny, Kal oly TOAA@ Kal aOpd@ 
yéd@Te eitr@v mposdodvar® T@ dvm@ aKpdtouv podeiv, arro- 

\ ig \ La) / > / “ id / \ BA \ 
mvuyels vTO TOU yédAwTos amélavev.’ —‘Hddws pév exe mpos 
amavras, xp@* dé toils Pertiotous.— Ilvppos ev “Itanrtg 
évrodeunoey tn Sv0 Kal pHhvas Téooapas. 


5. 


\ LA e/ 

"Axovoas Kkandov péros Tephbeins! av.— Niklas ovrws 
9) / ef / > a) \ > / ? 
Vv tAOTTOVOS, @STE TOAAAKIS EPWTAY TOUS OLKETAS, EL 
npiotnKev.2 — @ewiotoxrAns Kal “Apioreidns éatacialérny 
ére mraide dvtTe.—’EpicOwoate tis dvov Tropevdpevos eis 
Aerdotvs. Kal ws kata Kxatrnreyev, 07d THY oKLaV TOU 
bd > / c Ud > / e \ 4p 4 
dvov éxdbicev 0 picOwodpuevos avtov. “O dé Tov dvov Sdeo- 
TOTNS €uayeTO avT@, A€ywv OTL TOV dvovy cor éeuicOwaoa, 





8) blrrw. *) ylyvoua. *) for eueuacriywoo. ©) pynul. 7) fdw. ®) ofouat. 
—4. 1) pbvoy od, nearly, almost, lit. ‘only not.’ 7) pelpoua. *%) pnt. 
*) ylyvoua. ©) Kkardxewor. ©) mposdldwm. 7) dmroOvicxw. §%) xpdouar.— 
5. 1) réprw. %) dpiurrdw, : 


WITTICISMS. ? 197 


: \ \ \ ’ a 5) , U See 
ovyl Kal THY oKlav avTov.— "Hv omovddatys, mavta Taye 
Ay, 3 >A aé A ’ é , € a 1 SAK 
mepavOnoetat.® —’Ayabois avOpwrrois optrodvTes pddiot av 
> val \ a ¢ a! La) b] n / b 
evdpavOcite. —To@ traide to Tod avtod didacKddov ére- 
madevoOnv. —’Avatravawpcba, diror.— Moy@npod  tivos 
a!) , ’ i ae \ 7 Ss: Pt SE | 
avOpwtrouv émiypayavTos émi THY olKiav, pnoev elsiT@ 
KaKov: 06 ovv KUpLos THS otKlas, o Avoyévns edn, Tov 
ae A 5 
eloeNOou°? av, 
WITTICISMS. 
(Selected from Hierocles.) 


4. 
YYoraoTiKOS lLaTP@® ouvaYTHTAS: sVYyyoOpnooy pmol, ElTE, 
Kal pn mot méurrn,! ott ovK évdonca. 
2. 


LyoraotiKos oikiav Tara@v, Aov am adTHs eis Seiypwa 
Teplepepev. . 


2 


3. 


2 NOdaTTLKOS pala ® OTL O ee bmép ta Staxdota etn 
Sh, ayopdoas Kdépaka eis ardmetpav erpeder. 


4, 


eee kat dvap 4 Sony NOV TET ATHKEVAL,” TOV 
ma brap” meptednoaro.! "Exrepos S& pabev® tiv airlar, 
én + Sud ri yap dvuddytos Kabevdes ; 


5. 


' | 
LyoracriKos amopav ta BiBrAla avTov érimpacKe Kal 
ypapev mpos tov matépa ereye: ovyxalpe ynuiv marep, 7dn 
\ id lal \ fe / 
yap nuas Ta BuBrlta Tpédper. 
% 6. 
Aidijpov aderpoy eis eTEAEVTICE. Syodaorunds ov atrav- 
thaas Ta CorTLS hpota: od améaves® 4 6 aderdds Fov: 





3) mepalyw. 4) else. 5) eisépxouar. 

1) uéupouat. 7) eis 5. asa sample. *) pavOdvw. *) Kar’ dvap (indecl.), 
inadream. °) waréw. ®) vmap (indecl.) used adv. when awake. 7) repr 
déw. 8) Sdw. %) dro-OvjoKw. 


198 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


(f 


LyoractiKos TYOAATTLK@ auvavTnaas eitrev: Ewalov® srt 
amr eOaves.9 Kaxeivos, ann pas pe, €bn, Caovra.® Kai 
0 TNONATTUOS Kal pnVv Oo ElT@V Mol TOAA@ cou akLoTic- 
TOTEPOS UTApYel. 

8. 

YVyoraoTKOs vavaryeiv EN @v, mivakiora ret,” iva Sid- 

Onxas ypaddn. Tors d€ olxéras opav adyoovras Sia Tod 
7 4 ll Q 0 = 
Kiwwouvov, édn,!! un AvTrEeiaGe, EXevPepa yap Uv 


| 9. 

ZyoraotiKos OéXwv Tov trmov avTov didaEar' ph Tpwyerr 
TOAAG, ov mapéBarev ait@ tpodas. ’AtmroBavevros® dé Tov 
imrov TO ALU, EAreye: meya ECnuLwoOnv, Ste yap Euale?® ur 
Tpwyelv, TOTe aTreVavev.® 

10. 

Tyoractixds BovrAdpevos mepdcat morapov avnrGev'* és 
TO mTAotoy epitrrros. IlvOopévov © dé Tivos THY attiav, épn,' 
oTrovoatev. 
| 11. 

LyoractiKos voocodvTa emlioKeTTOMEVOS, NpwWTA TeEpl THS 
bytetas: o O€ ovK wPivaro 16 arr oxpiOfjva. Opyabeis own, 
érxmifm, ébn, Kaye voonoev Kat édOovTt™ cot py arro- 
Kptveia Vat. 

12. 

VyoractiKos olKlav mpidpevos,!® rHs Ovpidos mpokdr as, 

np@Ta TOs TapLovTas,)!® ei mpéTEl aVT@ 7 OtKia. 


13. : 
VyoraoTiKds KokuuBav BovrAduevos, wapa pixpov™ érrviryn. 
"Opocev”! oty wn adrrac0ar™ vdaTos, édv pr mpa@Tov waly® 
KoAUP Pav. 





3) pavOdvw. 8) fdw. 9%) dro-Oyjcxw. 1) for kal éxetvos, § 5. 1) Pym. 
12) qiréw. 18) diddoxw. 14) dv-épxomar. 1) ruvOdvoua. 1) d¥vapar. 
17) Epxoua. 38) mplapat, used only in the 2 aor. érpidunp, Lpought ; see 
§ 82, 2 aor. mid. 1) 6 rapid, -dvros, a passer by, from rdpeuu, § 85. 
20) r. wu. nearly. 71 duvupi, § 95. 22 dar. 


FABLES. 199 


: 14. 
LyoracrKos latp@ auvavrncas, éxpvBn. TluOopuéevov 
3 \ > / 4 . \ 7 94 \ / \ 
é€ Tivos THY aitiav, pn: Katpov éyw™ pn acbevncas, Kal 


9° 


aioxyvvomar eis drpiv EXOeiv! Tov iaTpod. 


FABLES. 
1 e 


Avcos apviov édiwxev. To dé els te tepov Kxateduye 
[IposckadXovpévov dé tod AvVKov TO apviov, Kal AéyorTos, 
itt Ovovdcer avTo o lepeds TH Oe@, exeivo en: GAr 
e / / / i Q / 3 ig \ n 
aipeTotepov pot éatt Oem Ovaiav civat, 4 brd aod Sia 
pbaphvar. i 

‘O Adyos SnAol, Ste ols Errixertar TO AtroPavelv, KpeitTor 
éotiy o peta dons Odvaros. 


2. 


Tov dpviQwv Bovrovpévoy tromjoat Bacthéa, Tams éavTov 
n&iou dua TO KarXrOS yYeLpoTovety.! Aipovpevov dé TodTOY 
TOV adAAwWV, O KOXAOLOS UroAaBav? edn: AAN El, cot 
BactrevovTos, 0 aeTOS Huas KaTadiMKelY eTLyELPHoEL, TOS 
uty eTAPKETELS ; 

‘O pos dnroi, dre Tovs apyovTas ov dia KarXOS pOCVO?, 
AAG Kab pounv cal dpdvncw éxréyeOar Sei. 


3. 


"Odis bd ToAAOY aVOpdéT@v tTratotpevos TH Al! eve 
Tuyyavev. “O dé Zedvs mpos avrov eitrev’ aX El TOV 
mpoTepov TratnoavTa émrAn~as, ovK av o devTEepos errexelipynae 
TOUTO TOLHoal. 

‘O piOos Sdnrot, Ste of Tois mpdrepov émtBatvovow?* 
avOiatdpevor® trois ddXOLs hoBepol ylyvovrat. 





23) kpUrrw. 4) lit. ‘*I have had (and still have) a fair time of it in 
not having been sick ;’’ see § 148, 4. 

2.1) see § 145. Nore 1. 2) brodauBdvw. — 3. 1) Zeds. *) dat. pl. pres. 
part. %) dvOlornm. 


200 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


4. 

T'épwv more Evra Kdwas, tadta épwrv, ToAAnY odor 
éBadife, kat dia Tov toddY KOTrOV atroOguevos! év TéT@ 
\ \ / \ / b val an \ U 
Twi Tov ddéptov, Tov Odvatov émexareito. Tod dé Oavarov 
mapovtos? Kal muvOavopevov THY aitiav dv nv avTov éxanet, 

, c / yA = ~ \ / A 3 
deiudoas 0 Yépav epy va HOU mov hoptov dele 
/ a ¢ A b a if 
O XAdyos dnrol, btt Tas avOpwrres Pirclwos ev TH Bip 
Kav Sustuy7. 


5. 


Xeiavos wpa, Tov citwv BpayevTwy, ot wUpunKes EYruxor, 

/ \ / ” > \ / e \ 4 
réTTLE O€ ALM@OTT@Y TEL avTo’s Tpopdyv. Oi Sé ppprKES 
5 > ” \ / \ 7 > a / e \ 5 
eimrov avt@:* dia Ti Td Oépos ov auvhnyes Tpodyy; ‘O dé Eirev: 
oun éoydrafov, AAN HOov povatkas. Oi dé yeAdoavres eimrov: 
> > > / ¢/ BA “A I ‘a 
arr’ et Odpovs Spais nUrAELS, YElw@Vos apyov. 

‘O a 8 eo > } a > val 3 \ U " 

BvO0s Snroi, OTL od Set TLVa Aperety ev TraVTL TrPayywaTt, 

iva wn AVTNOH Kal Kivduvetcn. 


6. 


Eis AvKov aromné éevérecev.' ’Kdus@me: Sé ws ypavy 
Le ee. 5 ls a ¢ \ , ” >\ n 
auTnV ovoav pn amroxteivat. ‘O O€ AvKos edn~ edav Theis 
Adyous arnOeis elarns por, amoAvOnon. ‘H dé eirrev: ele 
un col ovvHVTnoAa, Kal pndaLas TH Opa TavTy Shoals, Kal 
UNTOS TAALY CUVAVTHTALS [MOL. 

¢/ > , > \ | \ \ / 9 

Ore év Tepiotdace. tis éutrecwv! Kal Tas Kexpumpmevas 
THS Wuyns Bovras éEaye. 


(¢ 


"Opuba tis ciyev @A ypvcd Tikrovaav’ Kal vopicas évdov 
avTns byKxov ypuciov civat, Ktetvas evpnxev! opolay Tov 
Aourav opviOav. ‘“O dé aOpdov mrodTov. édAricas evpjoey,} 
Kal TOD pwiKpov eoTépynTat Exeivov. 

‘O pvOos Snrob, dtt Set Tols mapovaow? apKeicOar Kai THY 
amrnotiav devyetv. 





4. 1) drorl@nm, 2 aor. mid. 7) mdpemu.  *%) atpw.— 6. 1) éumimro. 
2 kptrtw. —7. 1) edploxw. 7) rdpem. 


FABLES. - 201 


8. 


a 4 id \ / / > V4 

Tatpos Siwxdpevos bd Aéovtos KaTépuyev eis omnAaLor, 
év @ hoav alyes dyptat* TuTTopevos Sé UT avT@Y Oo Tavpos 

\ / ” b] e n F rad > / > \ 
Kal KepatiCopevos, bn: ovy vas PoBovpevos avéyoual, ara 
TOV po TOV omnAaiov bvTA. 

Oirw modrol dia doBov tev KpeiTTOVMY TAS eK TOV 
nTTOVeV UBpes vropevovowv. 


9. 


"ArornE pndérote Ocacauevn A€ovta, ered) KaTa. TLVa 
TUYNY UITHVTnOEY aAVT@, TO pev MpaTov Loovcoa! avTor, 
ovTws éepoByOn, ws pixpov Kal atroBaveiv.2 ’Ex devtépou bé 
avT@ cuvavTncaca époBynOn pév, AAN’ ovy wS TO TpPdTEpor. 
"Ex tpitov 5é€ Geacapévn avbtov ovtas KaTePdponcer, ws Kal 
mposerfotdaa® avT@ dSiareyOjvar. 

‘O wdOos Snroi, dre Kal Ta PhoBepa TaV TpayyaTaV 4 
cuvnfea KaTaTrpavvel. 


10. 


"ArornE AwoTTovcea ws EeacaTo éri Tivos avadevdpasqs 
Aérpvas Kpewapevors,! nBovrAnOn avTav meptryevea Vat, 2 Kal 
ovK novVaTO* amararropery dé mpos éauTny eitrev’ Guhakes 
ELoLD. 

\ n > ra] UY y a , 2 f 3 

Otro kal Tov avOpwrrwv Eriol, TOV Trpaypdatev édixéabat 
un Suvdwevor dv acbevaav, Tors Katpods aiTL@vTat. 


11. 


Adéwv adkovoas tore Batpaxov KeKparyoros,! erreaTpabn 
mpos. THD poviy OLO{LEVOS meya Tl caov elvalt* mpospeivas O€ 
pikpov ypdvov, ws COedcato avTov a7ro TAS wns eFerOovra,” 
mposeN Gav Rasen aTIRSH, eiTr@v* pndéva akon TapaTTéTw Tpe 
THs Oéas. 

‘O Adyos evKalpos mpos avdpa yAwoowdn, ovdév mTAé€oPr 
TOU Aarely Suvapevor. 





9. ‘) dpdw. 7) drodvickw. *%) mposépxouar. — 10. 1) kpeudvvvyu, short- 
ened pass. form xpéuapar. *) weprylyvoua. 8) épixvéowar.—11. 1) xpdgw- 
2) é&épxouat. 


202 GREEK GRAMMAR. 


12. 

T'vyy tis xnpa dp eye, Kal” Exdotny jycpav woy avrTn 

f N if be e ’ ig 1 ge 7 Q Aa 
tixtovaav. Nopicaca o€, ws, e mrelovs! tH dpmbu KpiOas 

U ry) / 2 A e / A / e 

mapaBanro., dis téEeTar* THS uépas, ToUTO Temoinkev. “H 
dé dps mipedns yevouern,® ovd’ amrak THs auépas Texeiv? 
NOUVATO. 

‘O pdOos Snrot, re ot Sta TreoveEiay THV TrELOV@V éTTI- 
Oupovvtes Kal Ta TrapovTa atroBadXovet. 


18. 

"Aromrn€ eis otxlav é€Xovca wroxpitov, Kal Exacta TOV 
avTov oKevav diepevvwpevn, evpe? Kal Kehadnv wopmoAUKeEtoU 
evpuas KaTecKevacpevny, nv Kal avadaBovdcoa® Tais yepaiv 
Epyn* @ ola Kepary Kal éyxépadov ovk exer. 

‘O pvOos mpos advdpas peyarorpereis pev TO cHOpmaTt, 
Kata O€ Yruyny ardoyiaTous. 

ne. Q@ / > Pd 13 e \ a > A Le) 26 iff 

vopwrdv Tis amoKxTeltvas bTO TAY avTOV auyyevav €dLO- 

xeTo. L'evouevos! dé cata tov Neirov trotapdv, AWKoV avTo 

> J \- > / 2 > / Mis A nm 

atravTnoavTos, PoBnGels avéBn? eri te Sévdpov TO ToTapae 
> al 3 ¥ Ul > “ 

Tapaxelwevov, KaKel® éexpvTrTeTo. @eacdpevos dé évtavla 

ey KaT avToU épyduevov, EavTov eis TOV TrOoTamOV KaOhKeV* * 
év O€ TOUT@ UTodeEdMEVOS avTOV KpoKddeLAOS KaTEDoLYHTATO. 

e / } a a b] / a > , wy as 

O Adyos Sndoi, Ott Tois evayéot TOV aVOpwWTwV OUTE YiIS 
oUTE aépos OUTE VOaTOS GTOLYELOY Aopares orev. 


15. 


AvKos Awortrav éfnte Tpodnv. Tevopevos b€ cata Tiva 
TOTOV, NKOVoE Taldiov KXaioVvTOS Kal ypads AEyoUTNS avT@' 
“A Lp f ’ \ A ores! UA a 
Ee eet TOU proce €l be M1, 2 one TUTE TapAahare ve 
T@ AVKM. Oldmevos 57) 0 AUKOS, STL AANOEVEL 4 Ypads, 

v 7 / 1 e / be / > / 
TOAANY wpav mposéuevev.1 ‘“Komépas o€ yevouevns, axovet 
TaN THS ypaos KOAaKEVOVaNS TO Traidiov, Kal Eyovans 
avT@* é€av €dXOn? o AvKos Sedp0, hovedoouev, B TEKVOY. 





12. 1) for wrelovas. 7%) rherw. 8) ylyvowar. —18. 1) Zpyoua. 2 edpioxw. 
®) dvadapBdvw.—14. 1) yiyvoua. 7) dvaBalyw. %) for Kal éxe?. *) Kablnu. 
—~15. 1) rpospévw. 7) Epxouat. 


FABLES. 2035 


Tatra axovoas o AvKoS EmropeveTO A€ywv: ev Tav’TH TH 
érravAe aAXa mev A€yovalv, GAXa S€ mpaTToVaty. 

c DO \ > Q UA (7 \ ” al l4 

O pv0o0s pos avOpwrrous, cities Ta Epya Tois Adryols 
ouK éyovaotv dpota. 


16. 


A / \ by \ b , / , 
éwv, Kab dvos, Kal adr@mrné, Kolveviav TrolnodpevoL, 
éEjrOov mpos adypav. ILoAAHns odv Onpas ovrAdAnPUeions,} 
/ £ / ” BY ‘ } a. b] a ‘O be lal 

mposérakev 0 r€wY TH Ovm Sdtedelv? avTois. é Tpeis 
wepidas otnoduevos ex TaVv lowv, éxréEacPat TovTous 
mpoutpémero.2 Kal 0 Adwv Ovpwbeis tov dvov Kkatépayev.* 
Kita rp ade@rrene pepiverv éxédXevoev. “H 0’ eis piav pepioa 
TavTa owpevoaca, éavtn Bpayv tT KatédiTe. Kal o dAéwv 
mpos auTnv: tis ce, ® Bertiotn, Statpeiy ovTws edidakev ; ® 
e ’ > : e a Sf U4 
H & eimev: 4 Tov dvov cupdopa. 

‘O pd0os Snroi, btt coppovcpol yiyvovtat Tots avOpa@rrois 
Ta Tov Tédas SusTUYXnMaTA. 


17; 


Tewpyds tis, wéAX@Y KaTadvev Tov Blov, Kai BovdAdpevos 
Tovs éavTov traidas Tetpav AaPelv! THS yewpyias, TposKane- 
/ > \ 7 A bd] f > \ \ x” nw f 
odpevos avtovs ébn: aides ewol, eyo pwev non Tod Biov 
wméfeut, vpels 8, dep ev TH apTrérA@ mor KeKpuTTTaL $nTN- 
cavtes eupnoete Tavta. Oi pév obv oinOévtes Onoavpor éxei 
jmov. KatopwpvyOa,' racayv thy THS aumédou ynv pera 
THY atroBiwow Tod TaTpos KaTécKayav: Kal Onoavp@ pév 

> t Ene Ba ” d n an 
ov mepiéruyov,> 7 O€ apumedos, Kaas oKadeloa, TOAXA- 
Traclova TOV KapTrov avédwxev.® 
e a) A a 
O pdOos Snroi, drt 6 Kapatos Oncaupds éott Tols av- 
Opa@rrots. : 





eee 


16. 1) cuvd\AauBavw. 2) diarpéw. 3) mporpérw. *) xarecOlw. °) diddoKw. 
—17. 1) \NauBdvw. 7) eiploxw. *) ofouar. *) xaropirrw, Att. redupl. 
5) mepitvyxavw. ©) dvadldmp. 


GREEK VOCABULARY 


Which contains all the words that occur in the preceding 


READING’ LESSONS 


And in the Exercises §§ 57, 60, and 63. 





The number 3, after an adjective, denotes that it is an adjective of 
three endings. — Other numbers, placed after any word, denote the para- 
graph (§) which ought to be consulted concerning that word. — The letters 
p. and m. denote the Passive and Middle voices respectively. — All verbs 
marked with the sign * are contained and ought to be looked for in § 95; 
when the verb is compounded (as mpos-épxopuat, dro-OvjoKw, etc.), the latter 
part of the compound (€pyoua, OvioKw) is to be looked for. 





"Ayabés, 8, good, brave. 
ayardw, to love. 
ayyé\\w, to announce. 
ayidtw, to hallow. 
&yxtpa, 4, anchor. 
dyopadgw, to buy. 

dypa, 7, hunting, chase. 
dyp.os, 3, wild. 

dyw,* to lead. 

adeAPH, 7, Sister. 
adeXpés, 6, brother. 
é5.xéw, to injure. 
ddixla, H, iniquity. 


ddikos, ov, wrong, unjust. 


advvaTos, ov, impossible. 
dw (for deldw), to sing. 
*Adwus, -Ld0s, 6, Adonis, 
del, adv. always. 

derds, 6, eagle. 

anp, dépos, 6, the air. 
"AOnva, -as, 7, Minerva. 
"AOHva, -Gv, ai, Athens. 
“AOnvatos, 3, Athenian. 





204 


dOpéos, 3, crowded, immense, fre- 
quent. 

aixlfouat, to outrage. 

alé, aiydés, 6, 7, goat. 

alperés, 3, desirable. 

aipéw,* to take. mM. to choose. 

alpw, to raise, lift up. 

alcxvvy, 7, disgrace. 

alcxtvw, to disgrace. mm. to be 
ashamed. 

airéw, to ask. 

airla, 7, Cause. 

airidouat, to accuse. 

axon, 7, hearing. 

dxovrifw, to throw, hurl. 

dxovw,* to hear, listen. 

&xparos, ov, unmixed, pure. 


- anyéw, to grieve, be distressed. 


’"AdéEavdpos, 6, Alexander. 
éAnGeva, 7, truth. 
adnbevw, to speak truth. 
adnOys, és, true. 

ary, , Strength. . 


VOCABULARY. 


ddXd, Cconj. but. 

—G&\Xos, 7, 0, another. 

andby.orTos, ov, silly, unreasonable. 

adware, -exos, 4, fox. , 

dpedéw, to be careless. 

dumeNos, 7, Vineyard. 

dva-Baivw,* to go up, climb. 

dvav«dtw, to force. 

avayKn, 7, necessity. 

dvayw, to carry up, raise. 

dvadevipas, -dd0s, 7, vine. 

dva-dldwu, to give, yield. 

dv-aipéw,* to take away, kill. 

dva-hauBdvw,* to take up. 

dva-ravw, to stop (trans.). mM. to 
cease, rest. 

dvapxla, 7, anarchy. 

dva-Tpérw, to overturn, ruin. 

avdpids, -dvros, 6, Statue. 

avéhrioros, ov, unlooked for. 

av-épxouat,* to go up. 

dv-éxw,* to hold up. Mm. to endure. 

dvnp, dvdpds, 6, man (vir), 15. 

dvé-lornut, to resist, withstand. 

dvOpwimos, 6, man (homo). 

dvrl-pynu, to reply, 84. 

dvrpov, Td, cave, cavern. 

avumddnros, ov, barefoot. 

aviTw, to accomplish. 

déubricros, ov, trustworthy. 

déiw, to deem worthy. 

dmr-ahd\arTw, to set free, depart. 

am-avTdw, to meet. 

dmraé, once. 

das, 3, all (§ 23, 3). 

dei (ard, eiul), to be absent. 

amdnorla, 7, greediness. 

dé, prep. 99. 


- 
2 UARROD RES, 
‘ BEES 


dmoBddkw, to lose, throw away 


(§ 71, 5). 
droBlwois, -ews, 7, death. 
a1ro0-OvicKw,* to die. 
dmroxkpivonar, to answer. 
dmro-xrelyw, to kill. 
drrohvw, to set free, let off. 
amémreipa, 4, trial. 
émoméurw, to send back. 





205 


dtromviyw, to choke. 

dmopéw, to be in want (a priv., 
topos). 

amrooré\iw, to send off. 

dro-rl@nut, to lay down. 

dmopevyw, to flee from. 

dmrrw, to kindle. mM. to touch. 

dpyla, #, idleness. 

dpyupois, a, odv, of silver. 

dpeTH, 7, Virtue, prowess. 

dpisra, adv. in a perfect manner. 

dpictdw, to breakfast. 

dpistevw, to excel. 

"Apioreldns, -ov, 6, Aristides. 

dpxéw, to suffice. p. to be contented 
with. 

d&pxros, 6 and %, bear. 

dpviov, 76, lambkin. 

dpmaé, -ayos, rapacious. 

4px, 7, beginning. 


dpxw, to begin, rule. 


dcdévera, 7, weakness. 
dcbevéw, to be weak, sickly. 
dobevys, és, weak. 

doKxéw, to practise. 

domls, -ldos, 7, shield. 


dopadns, és, Safe, secure. 
avAéw, to play on the flute. 
aguns, és, dull, awkward. 


Badlgw, to go, walk. 

BdpBapos, ov, foreign, barbarian. 
Bdpos, -ovs, 76, weight, burden. 
Baowrela, 7, kingdom. 

Bactihe, 7, queen. 

Baoired’s, éws, 6, king. 

Bacirtevw, to reign. 

Barpaxos, 6, frog. 

Bla, 7, violence. 

BiBdlov, 7d, book. 

BiBpdcxw,* to eat. 

Bios, 6, life. 

BrX\adr7w, to hurt. 

Bonbéw, to aid, help. 

Bérpus, -vos, 6, bunch of grapes. 
BovdAy, 7%, Will, intention. 


206 


Bovrouar,* to will, be willing. 
Bpaxus, 3, short, little. 
Bpéxw, to wet, moisten. 
Bp&pua, -atos, Te, food. 
Bwubs, 6, a stand, altar. 


T'dp, conj. for. 

vyeddw, to laugh. 

yerotos (Att. yédouws), 3 and 2, 
laughable. ! 

vyé\ws, -wros, 6, laughter. 

yévos, -ouvs, Td, race, kind. 

yepatés, 3, old. 

yépwv, -ovrTos, 6, old man, 21. 

yewpyla, 7, agriculture, 

yewpyés, 6, farmer. 

Yi, Yis, 7, the earth. 

Yfjpas, -aros, Td, old age. 

‘ynpacKw,* to grow old. 

ylyas, -avros, 6, giant. 

ylyvouat,* to become. 2d Pf. to be. 

ydukvs, 3, sweet, dear. 

yrwoowdns, és, chattering. 

yraun, 7, Opinion. 

ypavs, ypads, 7, old woman. 

ypadw, to write. | 

yuvn, yuvaikés, 7, WOMan. 


Adxvw,* to bite. 

Aapetos, 6, Darius. 

dé, but (dé never stands first). 
de7, oportet, see déw § 95. 
Seiya, -aTos, Td, sample. 
dechidw, to be afraid. 

Aer¢ol, -dv, ai, Delphi. 
5évdpov, rd, tree. 

dépw, to flay, scourge, flog. 
deomdrns, -ov, 6, master, owner. 
dedpo, hither, here. 

devTepos, 3, second. 

déxouar, to receive. 

67, then, therefore. 

5nr\dw, to show. 

did, prep. 99. 

5iabjKn, , & will. 

di-a.péw,* to divide. 

diaxédoror, two hundred. 





GREEK GRAMMAR. 


dcadéyouar, to converse. 
diadvw, to dissolve. 

diacrelpw, to spread, disperse. 
diardoow, to arrange. 
diapbelpw, to destroy, kill. 
d:ddoKxados, 6, teacher. 
diddoxw (fut. -déw), to teach. 
didvpuo., -wv, of, twins. 
di-epevvdw, to examine closely. 
Sixaos, 3, just. 

dixawocvvn, 7, justice. 

Avwvyévns, -ovs, 6, Diogenes, 
dls, twice. 

dusxw, to pursue, seek after. 
doxéw,* to seem. 

56£a, 7, renown, fame, opinion. 
dopa, 7, Skin. 

dovAela, 7, servitude. 

doddos, 6, Slave. 

dpdw, to do. 

dpds, Spvds, H, Oak. 

dtvaua,* I can, am able. 
OvUvapus, EWS, N, POWEF. 

duo, two. 

dustuxéw, to be unhappy. 
dustux nua, -aTos, TO, misfortune, 
dusxepalyw, to be displeased. 
duswréw, to prevail upon. 
5dpov, ro, gift. 


"Edy, conj. if. 

édw, to let, allow. 

éyyus, adv. near. 

éyxépandos, 6, brain. 

€0os, -ovs, 76, custom, manner. 
ef, it. 

eidov, see dpdw § 95. 

elOe, would that ! 

elxoo., twenty. 

elxw, to give way, yield. 
elul, to be, 46. 

eirov, See pnul § 95. 

els, prep. 99. 

els, ula, év, one. 

els-eut, to go in, enter, 85. 
els-Epxopuar,* to go in, enter, 
eira, then, afterwards. 


VOCABULARY. 


éx (é€), prep. 99. 

Exaoros, 3, each. 

éxet, there. 

éxeivos, n, 0, that (ile) 

éxéyw, to choose. 

éxréumrw, to send out. 

éx-palvw, to reveal. 

é\dTTwv, ov, comp. Of pixpds. 

éXavyvw,* to drive. 

é\dxtoTos, 3, superl. of pixpéds. 

édeéw, to pity. 

é\evdepos, 3, free. 

éXevbepdw, to free. 

"EAXnp, -nvos, 6, Greek. 

é\rliw, to hope. 

éuds, 3, my. 

éu-rimtw,* to fall in with. 

év, prep. 99. 

évayns, és, cursed, outcast. 

évdov, adv. within. 

évdoéos, ov, famous. 

évedpevw, to lie in wait. 

éveynkovra, ninety. 

€viol, at, a, Some. 

évravda, there. 

évré\Aouar, to command. 

év-rvyxdvw,* to meet, apply to. 

éé or éx, prep. 99. 

é&-d’yw,* to bring or draw out. 

éfalpvys, adv. on a sudden. 

é£-arratdw, to deceive. 

éé-Epxouar,* to go or come out. 

ér-apxéw, to help, protect. 

éravArs, ews, 7, abode, stable. 

érel, after, when. 

ére.dy, When, since, after that. 

érl, prep. 99. 

émi-Baivw,* to attack. 

érivypagw, to inscribe, write upon. 

ériOuuéw, to long for, desire. 

érixadéw, to call on. mM. to call to 
aid. 

érl-xe.uar, to impend, 89. 

émoKkémrTopat, to visit. 

érisToAH, 7, epistle. 

émrisTpépw, to turn. 

érixeipéw, to attempt. 





207 


&rouat,* to follow. 

émtTd, seven. 

épydfouar, to work, do. 

épyov, Td, work, deed. 

épis, -dos, 7, quarrel, contention. 
épxopar,* to go, come, 

épwrdw, to ask, inquire. 

és for eds, prep. 99. 

écbiw,* to eat, corrode. 


_écOX6s, 3, good, noble. 


éomépa, n, evening. 

éoxaros, 3, last. 

ératpos, 6, companion, friend. 

érepos, 3, the other, another. 

éri, ady. yet, still. 

€ros, -ouvs, TO, year. 

ed, well. 

evdaiuovéw, to succeed, prosper. 

eVdaluwy, ov, fortunate, wealthy. 

evdus, adv. forthwith, at once. 

eUKalpos, ov, opportune, fit. 

evkooula, 7, Orderly behavior. 

evploxw,* to find. 

evrux ns, és, fortunate. 

evTvxla, 7, happiness. 

eUdopos, ov, fertile. 

evppalyw, to delight, gladden. 

evpuds, ingeniously, cleverly. 

ép-ikvéowar,* to reach, arrive at. 

€gummos, ov, On horseback. 

éxOalpw, to hate. 

€xOpés, 3, hostile. 

€xOpds, 0, enemy. 

éxis, -wos and -ews, 6, viper, ser- 
pent. 

éxw,* to have, hold, keep. 


Zdw, to live. 

Zevs, Ards, 6, Jupiter, 22. 
m\dw, to emulate. 

fnurdw, to damage, punish. 
Znvwyv, -wvos, 6, Zeno. 
fntéw, to seek. 

(Gov, To, animal. 


"H, than, or. | Z 
4 —7, either — or, 








noéws, adv. gently, pleasingly. 
non, adv. already. 
750vy, 7, pleasure. 
nrlkos, 3, how great. 
ré, -cxos, like, comrade. 
#Avos, 6, the sun. 
nros, 6, nail. 
nuépa, 7, day. 
nuovus, 3, half. 
nv (for édv), if. 
pew, to be still, quiet. 
NOVXOS, ov, still, quiet, silent. 


Pee 


"“Hoaioros, 6, Vulcan. 


Odvaros, 6, death. 

Oarrwv, ov, (see Taxvs, 29). 
Odavudgw, to wonder, admire. 
Géa, -as, 7, Seeing, sight. 

. bed, -as, 7, goddess. 

Pedoua, to see. 

6éd\w, or €0éXw,* to will. 


ee 


Oeds, 6, God. 

deparrevw, to honor, serve, cure. 
Gépos, -ovs, TO, SUMmMer. 
O@jpa, 7, a hunting, game. 
| OnpevT hs, -od, 6, hunter. 
Onoavpds, 6, treasure. 
OXiBw, to press, afflict. 
OdpvBos, 6, noise, tumult. 
Oplé, rprxds, H, hair. 

Ouuds, 6, mind, anger. 
duudw, to provoke, enrage. 
Oupis, -ldos, 7, window. 
Ovcia, 7, sacrifice, victim. 
Ovoidg{w, to sacrifice. 


*Iarpes, 6, physician. 
iepeds, éws, 6, priest. 
iepdv, Td, temple. 

inelpw (poet.), to desire. 
tva, conj. in order that. 
irmos, 6, horse. 

toos, 3, equal. 

[iexints, 3, strong, hard. 
wiradia, 4, Italy. 





nTTwy, ov, comp. less, lower, weaker. 


OemioroKhijs, -éous, 6, Themistocles. 





GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Kaéalpw, to clear, purge. 

ka0apds, 38, pure. 

kabevdw,* to sleep, 
sleep. 

kabifw,* to sit down. 

ka0-inus, to let down, 86. 

kal, and, also; xafi—kxal, both — 

_ and. 

katpés, 0, the right time; pl. the cir- 
cumstances of the times. 

kakév, T6, an evil. 

kaxés, 3, bad, evil. 

kakoupyla, 7, wickedness. 

kadéw,* to call. 

Kaos, -ovs, Td, beauty. 

kanés, 3, beautiful, noble. 

kadUrTw, to cover, conceal. 

kada@s, well, fairly. 

Kkdpatos, 6, labor, toil. 

Kduvw,* to work hard at. 

kdurrw, to bend. 

kdéy (for cat édv), even if, although, 

kapdla, 7, heart. 

kaptrés, 6, fruit. 

kara, prep. 99. 

KaTtayeddw, to mock at. 

KaTadiwkw, to pursue. - 

Kkarabapoéw, to be bold. 

Kkatabo.vdw, to devour. 

KkaTa-Keiat, to lie down, 89. 

kaTa-Aelrw, to desert, leave. 

karadtw, to end. 

Kkata-raréw, to tread on. 

kata-rAjoow, to strike down, as- 
tound. 

kaTa-rpavvw, to mitigate. 

KaTacKkadmrTw, to dig. 

KaTagKkevafw, to prepare, adorn. 

katacTpépw, to overthrow. 

karagevyw, to flee to . . . for 
refuge. 

kaT-erelyw, to press down, urge. 

kat-ec Oiw,* to eat up. 

KdTomT pov, Te, mirror. 

kaT-opiTTw, to bury, hide in the 
ground. 


Katua, -atos, 76, heat. 


lie down to 


VOCABULARY. 


Kkavxdouat, to boast. 

keAevw, to order, command. 
KévTpov, TO, sting. 

Képas, -aros, 76, Norn, 21. 
keparifw, to butt, 

Kkepadry, 7, head, chapter. 
kivduvevw, to risk, endanger. 
klvduvos, 0, danger. 

kivéw, tO move. 

kXalw,* to weep. 

krérrns, -ov, 6, thief. 
KX\érTw, to steal. 

kAlyn, 7, couch, bed. 
k\or?, 7, theft. 

ko.vds, 8, Common. 

Ko.vwvia, #, Society. 
ko\akevw, to flatter. 

koNotds, 6, Jackdaw. 
ko\uuBdw, to swim. 

komdés, 0, toil, weariness. 
kérrTw, to cut. 

Kopaé, axos, 6, raven. 
koouéw, to adorn. 

kéo 40s, 6, Ornament, world. 
kpafw, to croak, cry, shout. 
kpatéw, to control, subdue. 


kpelrTwv, ov, comp. better, mightier. 


Kpéwapat,* to hang. 
Kp.0y, 7, barley. 

KpiTHS, -o0, 6, judge. 
Kpoxdde.Xos, 6, crocodile. 
kpurrés, 3, hidden, secret. 
KpvrrTw, to hide, conceal. 
xretvw, to kill. 

Kreis, kTevds, 6, & comb. 
KTevifw, to comb. 

kvpios, 6, lord, master. 
K¥wy, kuvds, 6, dog. 
kwutxds, 6, comedian. 


Aaywés, 6, hare. 

Aayuws, -w, 6, hare. ) 
Aakedaluwy, -ovos, 7, Lacedaemon. 
Aadhéw, to talk, chatter, babble. 
adds, 6v, loquacious, babbling. 
AapuBdvw,* to take. 

havOdvw,* to lie hidden. 


e 





209 


ANealyw, to grind. 

Aéyw, to say, collect (see § 70, 2). 

Aelrw, to leave. 

Aéwv, -ovros, 0, lion. 

AnorTHs, -o0, 0, robber. 

Aldos, 6, stone. 

Aluryyn, 7, pool, pond, lake. 

Auwds, 6, hunger, famine. 

Niwwrrw, to be hungry. 

Noylfouar, to reflect, consider. 

Nbyos, 6, Speech, word, report, fable. 

hoyx7, 7, Spear. 

Aoiuds, 9, pestilence. 

Nourds, 3, remaining. 

vKos, 6, Wolf. 

Aurréw, to grieve, distress. 

AUT, HN, SOYTOW. 

AUXvos, 6, (plur. usu. neut.) light, 
lamp. 


Malvoua, to be mad. 

Hakaplfw, to pronounce happy. 
paxpdy, adv. far. 

pakpds, 3, long, 30. 

para, adv. very, quite, right. 
wddiora, Most of all, especially. 
uadrov, rather, more. 
pavdavw,* to learn, hear. 
pactiyow, to whip, scourge 
pdorié, -iyos, 7, a Whip. 
waxouc,* to fight, contend. :ispute 
peyaXomrperys, és, magnificent. 
Meyddws, adv. greatly, very much. 
méyas, -dAy, -a, great, 27. 
pedidw, to smile. 

pelpouat,* to obtain. 

pédooa, 7, bee. 

wédXov, 70, the future. 

Bé\Xw, to be about to. 

wéXos, -ous, TO, SONG. 

péupoua, to blame, upbraid. 
pév, indeed. 

pév — dé, truly — but. 

pepliw, to divide. 

pépiva, 7, Care. 

pépis, -tdos, 7, a Share. 

perd, prep. 99. 


210 


peT-adr\drrw, to change. 

peravoéw, to repent. 

uy, not. 

undaues, not at all, in no wise. 

Myoded’, 7, Medéa. 

pnoels, no one (§ 31, 1). 

punodémore, never. 

unv, truly, indeed. 

nv, unvos, 6, month. 

unmrws, lest in any way, peradvent- 
ure. 

pyre — unre, neither — nor. 

puxpos, 3, small, little, 30. 

putkpovd, ady. nearly, almost. 

MudAriddns, -ov, 6, Miltiades. 

wipvjokw,* to remind. mM. to re- 
member. 

pucOdw, to let or hire out. 
hire. 

uvdoua, to remember, i. q. miury- 
TKOMAL. 

portvvw, to defile. 

udvov, adv. only. 

Lbvos, 3, alone. 

uoppoNvuKetov, 76, & mask. 

povorx@s, harmoniously. 

pox Onpds, 3, bad, wretched. 

4060s, 6, tale, fable. 

hobpuné, -nkos, 6, ant. 

p.&pos, 6, a fool. 


M. to 


- Navayéw, to go to wreck. 

vas, vews, H, Ship. 

vavTiKh, 7, fleet. 

veavlas, -ov, 6, youth. 

NetXos, 6, Nile. 

vexpés, 3, dead. 

véuw, to divide, 
VELNC Od. 

véos, 3 (Att. 2), young. 

vioos, 7, island. 

vikdw, to conquer, overcome. 

vikn, , Victory. 

Niklas, -ov, 6, Nicias. 

virtw, to wash. 

voéw, to think. 

vonua, -aTos, TO, thought. 


fut. veud and 





GREEK GRAMMAR. 


vouliw, to think. 
voos, 6, mind, soul. ~ 
vocéw, to be sick. 


=évos, 6, Stranger, guest. 
EevopOv, -Ovros, 6, Xenophon. 
Ev\ov, 76, wood ; plur. fagots. 


"Oyxos, 6, mass, bulk, weight. 

656s, 7, Way, road. 

dd0vs, -dvTos, 6, tooth. 

80ev, whence. 

oida, to know, 87. 

oixérns, -ov, 6, house-slave, menial. 

olxéw, to dwell, inhabit. 

olkla, 7, house. 

oivos, 6, wine. 

otouar,* to think, believe. 

oios, 8, what! such as. 

éxéX\Xw, to run ashore. 

éXlyos, 3, little. 

dutréw, to associate with. 

buvum,* to swear. 

duo.os, 3, like, resembling. 

duordw, to assimilate. 

duodoyéw, to confess. 

dudaé, -axos, unripe, sour. 

dvap, To, a dream (used only in the 
nom. and acc.; the rest from 
3verpos, -ov, 6, plur. dvelpara, -wv). 

évecdlew, to reproach, upbraid. 

dvoua, -aTos, TO, Aa Name. 

édvoudtw, to call, name. 

dvos, 6, ASS. 

éwdlrys, -ov, 6, heavy-armed foot- 
soldier. 

Srdov, TO, Weapon, arms. 

émdrayv, adv. when. 

8pacis, -ews, 7, Sight. 

dpadw,* to see. 

épyliw, to make angry. 
angry. 

épéyw, to stretch. mM. to seek for. 

é6pudw, to be eager, rush on or at, 
go, depart. 

Bpus, -0os, 6, 7, bird; fem. a hen. 

Oppevs, -éws, Orpheus. 


Pp. to be 


VOCABULARY. 


épxéouar, to dance. 

8re, adv. when. 

871, conj. that. 

ov (ovK, od~x), not. 

ovdé, not, not even. 
ovdé — ovdé, NOt even — nor yet. 
ovdels, nO one, § 31, 1. 
ovdérore, never, 

ody, therefore. 

ovrore, never. 

ovpavés, 6, heaven. 

ovs, wrdbs, 70, the ear. 
ovr é —ovré, neither — nor. 
ovrws (and ovrw), so, thus. 
ovxt (for ov), not. 
6p0aduds, 6, the eye. 

Sis, -ews, 6, Serpent. 

bYus, -ews, 7, Sight. 


Tlacdevw, to instruct. 

madlov, Td, little child. 

malfw, to play, sport. 

mais, -d6s, 6, 7, child. 

mats, -d6s, 0, boy, slave. 

manads, 3, old, ancient. 

maduv, adv. again. 

mapa, prep. 99. 

mapa uixpdv, by a little, almost. 

TmapaBadd\\w, to throw to, 71, 5. 

Tmapakadéw, to call, call to aid. 

Twapdkermat, to be (or lie) near, 89. 

Tapackevatw, to prepare. 

mapatelyw, to stretch. Pp. to extend. 

wdpeut (rapa elul), to be present. 

mapeu, to pass by, 85. 

mapéxw,* to grant, afford. 

mas, all, every (§ 23, 3). 

maréw, to tread on. 

marnp, -Tpds, 6, father (pl. fathers, 
parents). 

matpls, ldos, 7, one’s fatherland. 

Ilavoavlas, -ov, 6, Pausanias. 

mavw, to stop (trans.). Pp. and M. 
to stop, cease (intrans. ). 

melOw, to persuade. m. to obey; 
2d pf. to trust. 

neta, 7, trial. 

P2 





211 


méxw, to comb. 

mé\us, adv. near, 5 m4\as, neighbor. 

me\TaoT%s, -ov, 6, light-armed foot- 
soldier. 

mevntevw, to be poor. 

mepalvw, to finish, accomplish. 

mepdw, tO Cross. 

mepl, prep. 99. 

mepi-ylyvouat,* to get, reach. 

mep.oéw, to tie or bind round. 

mweploTtacis, -ews, 7, peril, distress. 

Tepi-Tvyxavw,* to find, meet with. 

Tepi-pépw,* to carry about. 

wérpa, 7, rock. 

miuedns, és, fat. 

mivakldiov, To, tablet. 

mwimpackw,* to sell. 

migrevw, to trust. 

mloris, -ews, 7, faith. 

miorés, 3, faithful. 

Il\dtwy, -wvos, 6, Plato. 


' wreovetia, 7, greediness; pl. ad- 


vantages. 
wAnoow, to strike, wound. 
mw otov, TO, Ship. 
mwdovros, 6, wealth, riches. 
mviyw, to choke. p. to be drowned. 
movéw, to make. 
moixki\A\w, to variegate. 
Tony, -évos, o, Shepherd. 
jwodewéw, to be at war. 
mwoNéuos, 0, enemy. 
mwoeuos, 6, War. 
TONS, -Ews, 7, City. 
mo\NdKis, adv. often. 
two\datAaclwy, ov, manifold, many 
times more. 
modupabys, és, learned. 
moNvs, 3, much, pl. many, 27. 
movéw, to toil, labor. 
mwovnpos, 3, wicked. 
mévos, 6, labor, toil. 
tmopevw, to convey. 
mwoTramos, 6, river. 
mworé, once, at some time. 
mov; where ? 
mov, somewhere (enclit.). 


P. to go, travel- 


212 


mous, 1odés, 6, foot. 

mpaiyua, -aros, 76, thing, affair. 

mparTtw, to do, act. 

rpéret, it fits, becomes. 

mer BUTEos, 3, elder. 

mptauar, used only in the 2d aor. 
érpidunv, I bought, 82. 

mpd, prep. 99. : 

mwpoBarov, To, sheep. 

mpoxUTTw, to peep out. 

mpdos, prep. 99. 

mposdldwu, to give besides, 82. 

mT pos-épxoual,* to gonear, approach. 

mposkahéw, to call to. 

mposxuvéw, to worship. 

mposuévw, to remain, await. 

mpostdoow, to order, command. 

mpérepov, adv. before, at first. 

mpdérepos, 3, before, first. 

mpotpérw, to exhort, urge. 

mpatov, ady. first. 

mprtos, 3, first. 

IIv@aydpas, -ov, 6, Pythagoras. 

muvOdvouat,* to ask, inquire. 

mupyos, 6, tower. 

Ilvppos, 6, Pyrrhus. 

mwhéw, to sell. 

mas; how ? 


‘PHua, -aTos, To, word, saying. 
pivdkepws, -wros, 6, the rhinoceros. 
plrrw, to throw, let drop. 
pomadov, To, club. 

popéw, to gulp down. 

poun, 7, Strength. 


Larmvyé, -vyyos, 7, trumpet. 

Zapdwa, oi, the Sardinians. 

céBoua, to revere. 

geuvds, 5, august, grand, venerable. 

gnualyw, to give a signal. 

ovydw, to be silent. 

ovyn, 7, silence. 

Zikedla, n, Sicily. 

Liwwvidys, -ov, 6, Simonides. 

otros, 6, Wheat; pl. ra otra, bread, 
food. 





GREEK GRAMMAR. 


cwmrdw, to keep silence, 
ow714rn, 7, Silence. 

oxamrrTw, to dig. 

oxevadfw, to prepare. 

oKevos, -ovs, 70, implement. 
oKnvy, 7, a tent. 

oxida, 7, Shadow, shade. 
oxomds, 6, mark. 

ZKvOys, -ov, 6, Scythian. 
oKkorTw, to jest, scoff. 
codla, 7, Wisdom. 

copds, 3, Wise. 

oraviws, adv. seldom. 
orelow, to sow, scatter. 
orévdw, to pour out. 
omyAaov, TO, Cave, Cavern. 
orovdd~w, to be zealous, in earnest, 
omovodatos, 3, busy, earnest. 
orac.d(w, to quarrel, revolt. 
oravpdéw, to crucify. 
orépyw, to love. 

orepéw, to deprive. 
otepavdw, to crown. 

oTtépw, tO crown. 


 oTorxetov, Td, an element. 


oTdua, -aTos, Td, Mouth. 

oTparevua, -aTos, TO, army. 

oTpatnyds, 6, general. 

oTpaTLwrys, -ov, 6, Soldier. 

orpardmedoyv, TO, Cainp, army. 

ovyyerns, és, akin, kinsman. 

ovy-xalpw,* to rejoice with. 

ovy-xwpéw, to grant, yield, par- 
don. 

adKov, TO, fig. 

ovd-AauBdvw,* to catch, seize. 

cuppaxta, 7, help, alliance. 

gUppdxos, 6, an ally. 

cuudopa, 7, misfortune. 

ctv, prep. 99. 

ovv-dyw,* to gather. 

cuv-avTaw, to mect. 

cuy-drrw, to fasten together. 

ouv-cpyocw, to arrange. 

cuyndec, 7, habit, custom, 
macy. 

cvvovola, 7, intercourse. 


inti- 


VOCABULARY. 


ois, suds, 6, 7, Swine, boar. 

opagw (Att. -rrw), to kill, slay. 

spddrdr\w, to deceive. 

cxodhdfw, to have (be at) leisure. 

cxoAacrTiKds, 6, a Simpleton. 

gHfw, to save (pf. p. céowopuar [ Att. 
céowpar|, 1 aor. éowOnr). 

g@pua, -aros, TO, body. 

gwpevw, to heap, pile up. 

swoppovicuds, 6, lesson, correction. 


Tags, -ews, 7, order, rank. 

Tapa7Tw, to disturb, alarm. 

Taoow, to order, arrange. 

tavpos, 6, bull. 

Taxa, adv. soon, quickly. 

Taxus, 3, swift. 

TAXUTHS, -HTos, 7, Speed. 

Taws, Taw, 6, peacock. 

ré—xal, both —and. 

réxvov, Té, Child. 

TereuTadw, to end, die. 

Tékdw (poet. ), to command. 

TéXos, -ous, TO, end. 

Tréprw, to delight, please. 

Técoapes, -pa, four. 

TérTlé, -v’yos, 6, grasshopper. 

Téxvn, H, art; pl. arts, wiles. 

tixtw,* to bring forth, lay. 

Tiudw, to honor. 

TiuH, H, honor. 

Totos, 3, such. 

Togérys, -ov, 6, archer. 

Togevua, -aTos, TO, ALTOW. 

Tdéros, 6, place. 

Tére, adv. then. 

Tpets, Tpla, three. 

Tpérw, to turn. 

tpépw, to feed, nourish. 

tptros, 3, third. 

Tpdra.ov, TO, trophy. 

Tpoph, 7, food. 

TpupyTys, -ov, 6, a Voluptuary. 

Tpwyw, to eat. 

Tuyxdvw,* to obtain, meet with, 
gain. 

Turrw, to strike. 





213 


Tuxn, 7, fortune, chance. 


"YBpts, -ews, #, insult, insolence. 
vyleva, 7, health. 

vdwp, vdaros, Td, water, ° 
jr-avTdw, to meet. 

vrap, Td, indecl. awake, 
virdpxw, to be. 

vréfequ, to go out, withdraw. 
brép, prep. 99. 

bro, prep. 99. 

drodéxouat, to receive, catch. 
VroKpiTHs, -o, 6, actor. 
vrro-hauBadvw,* to answer. 
drowévw, to endure, submit to. 


Palyw, to show. p. and 2d pf. te 
appear. 

gpadros, 3, evil, bad. 

pépw,* to bring, carry. 

pevyw, to flee. 

pnul,* to say, 84. 

pbelpw, to destroy. 

Pbovéw, to envy. 

POdvos, 6, envy. 

pir\avOpwires, ov, humane, kind, be- 
nevolent. 

Pirjuwv, -ovos, 6, Philemon. 

pir\dfwos, ov, fond of one’s life. 

ptrouabys, és, studious. 

gtiAdtrovos, ov, laborious. 

piros, 6, a friend. 

glros, 3, dear. 


‘pirdcogos, 6, philosopher. 


gpoBepds, 3, fearful. 

poBéw, to frighten ; m. to fear. 
PédBos, 6, fear. 

govevw, to kill, murder. 
dépros, 6, load, burden. 
gpagw, to speak, declare. 
ppdvnats, -ews, 7, prudence. 
ppdviuos, ov, prudent. 
gpovtifw, to care for. 
gvAdtrw, to guard, watch. 
piots, -ews, 7, nature. 
gutevw, to plant. 

pwvn, 7, sound, voice. 


214 ' GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Xalvw, to gape, yawn, look greedily 
after. 

xalpw,* to rejoice, delight. 

xarerds, 3, hard, difficult. 

xapd, 7, Joy. 

xX apis, -iros, favor. 

XEluwy, -@vos, 0, Winter storm. 

xelp, xeipds, 7, hand. 

xetporovéw, to elect. 

XEALS wy, -ovos, 7, Swallow. 

XHpa, 7, Widow. 

xijpos, 3, bereft. 

Xpdoua, to use, have intercourse 
with. 

XpHua, -aTos, Td, thing; pl. riches. 

xpévos, 6, time. | 

xpualov, rd, gold. 

Xpucovs, H%, odv, golden. 

xwr4s, 3, lame. 

xwpéw, to march, retire. 

xwpliw, to sever, divide. 





* 


xwplov, rd, region. 


WVarlfw, to clip, cut off. 
YdaddXw, to play on the harp. 
Wdumos, 7, sand. 

Yevdw, to deceive. m. to lie. 
Wevorns, -ov, 6, a liar. 
Ynoliw (usu. -ouar), to vote. 
Yux%, 7, soul, mind. 

Yixw, to dry. 


*Quos, 6, shoulder. 

adv, Td, egg. 

wpa, #, time, hour. 

ws, that, as, when. 

wsre, that. 7 

wopérera, 7, profit, help. 

adperéw, to benefit, assist. 
Gpérnua, -atos, Td, benefit, hely 
dpédiwos, ov, advantageous. 





x ie 
he a) 
tO : 
+ + 














YB 79104 | 


) = a 


44296 


THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 








x RA is s 
oe Ane Ao allt Xe 
aw 

#46 


Ot 
Oi) 

Hy 
BOK 


> 
; 
) 


~ 
— = 


» 
‘ 


a ee 
ee 


ee 
Pan Cates 


oe 
xa * bh 


A 
ts 
th 

t 

& 
(‘ee 


{* 
i 
M 
e 


Lor aa Med 
, ~~ =e & 
ne tears 


AA 
4 

4 

i 

+ 
es 


See 
ee een 
rei 


A ae 
te iS mw “< A 


Sow 
~~ > & 
BA i PF 


eke 
Paha 


a 


7 
? 


~ 
« 


bye 


Yate e, 


> ¥ 
rip at ete 





